minolta di250-350f service manual

FrameMaker Ver.5.5E(PC) COVER FOR Di250f/Di350f99.08.27


Copyright1999 MINOLTA Co., Ltd.

Printed in Japan

Use of this manual shoulbe strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563

Di250f/Di350f

SERVICE MANUAL

Di250f/D

i350f SE

RV

ICE

MA

NU

AL




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563

FrameMaker Ver.5.5E(PC) PL Standard Document Ver.0399. 1.22

P-1

Safety Precautions for Inspection and Service

When performing inspection and service procedures, observe the following precautions to prevent accidents and ensure utmost safety.

✽ Depending on the model, some of the precautions given in the following do not apply.

Different markings are used to denote specific meanings as detailed below.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

The following graphic symbols are used to give instructions that need to be observed.

Used to call the service technician’s attention to what is graphically represented inside the marking (including a warning).

Used to prohibit the service technician’s from doing what is graphically repre-sented inside the marking.

Used to instruct the service technician’s to do what is graphically represented inside the marking.

1. Always observe precautions.

2. Before starting the procedures, be sure to unplug the power cord.

3. Use the specified parts.

WARNING

CAUTION

WARNING

• Parts requiring special attention in this product will include a label containing the mark shown on the left plus precautionary notes. Be sure to observe the pre-cautions.

• Be sure to observe the “Safety Information” given in the Operator’s Manual.

• This product contains a high-voltage unit and a circuit with a large current capacity that may cause an electric shock or burn.

• The product also contains parts that can jerk suddenly and cause injury.• If this product uses a laser, laser beam leakage may cause eye damage or

blindness.

• For replacement parts, always use the genuine parts specified in the manufac-turer’s parts manual. Installing a wrong or unauthorized part could cause dielectric breakdown, overload, or undermine safety devices resulting in possi-ble electric shock or fire.

• Replace a blown electrical fuse or thermal fuse with its corresponding genuine part specified in the manufacturer’s parts manual. Installing a fuse of a different make or rating could lead to a possible fire. If a thermal fuse blows frequently, the temperature control system may have a problem and action must be taken to eliminate the cause of the problem.


P-2

4. Handle the power cord with care and never use a multiple outlet.

5. Be careful with the high-voltage parts.

6. Do not work with wet hands.

7. Do not touch a high-temperature part.

8. Maintain a grounded connection at all times. (This item may not apply in the USA.)

9. Do not remodel the product.

10. Restore all parts and harnesses to their original positions.

• Do not break, crush or otherwise damage the power cord. Placing a heavy object on the power cord, or pulling or bending it may damage it, resulting in a possible fire or electric shock.

• Do not use a multiple outlet to which any other appliance or machine is con-nected.

• Be sure the power outlet meets or exceeds the specified capacity.

• A part marked with the symbol shown on the left carries a high voltage. Touch-ing it could result in an electric shock or burn. Be sure to unplug the power cord before servicing this part or the parts near it.

• Do not unplug or plug in the power cord, or perform any kind of service or inspection with wet hands. Doing so could result in an electric shock.

• A part marked with the symbol shown on the left and other parts such as the exposure lamp and fusing roller can be very hot while the machine is energized. Touching them may result in a burn.

• Wait until these parts have cooled down before replacing them or any surround-ing parts.

• Be sure to connect the ground wire to the ground terminal even when perform-ing an inspection or repair. Without proper grounding, electrical leakage could result in an electric shock or fire.

• Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, telephone ground wire, or a lightning conductor.

• Modifying this product in a manner not authorized by the manufacturer may result in a fire or electric shock. If this product uses a laser, laser beam leakage may cause eye damage or blindness.

• To promote safety and prevent product damage, make sure the harnesses are returned to their original positions and properly secured in their clamps and sad-dles in order to avoid hot parts, high-voltage parts, sharp edges, or being crushed.

• To promote safety, make sure that all tubing and other insulating materials are returned to their original positions. Make sure that floating components mounted on the circuit boards are at their correct distance and position off the boards.


P-3

1. Precautions for Service Jobs

2. Precautions for Servicing with Covers and Parts Removed

3. Precautions for the Working Environment

4. Precautions for Handling Batteries (Lithium, Nickel-Cadmium, etc.)

CAUTION

• A toothed washer and spring washer, if used originally, must be reinstalled. Omitting them may result in contact failure which could cause an electric shock or fire.

• When reassembling parts, make sure that the correct screws (size, type) are used in the correct places. Using the wrong screw could lead to stripped threads, poorly secured parts, poor insulating or grounding, and result in a mal-function, electric shock or injury.

• Take great care to avoid personal injury from possible burrs and sharp edges on the parts, frames and chassis of the product.

• When moving the product or removing an option, use care not to injure your back or allow your hands to be caught in mechanisms.

• Wherever feasible, keep all parts and covers mounted when energizing the product.

• If energizing the product with a cover removed is absolutely unavoidable, do not touch any exposed live parts and use care not to allow your clothing to be caught in the moving parts. Never leave a product in this condition unattended.

• Never place disassembled parts or a container of liquid on the product. Parts falling into, or the liquid spilling inside, the mechanism could result in an electric shock or fire.

• Never use a flammable spray near the product. This could result in a fire.• Make sure the power cord is unplugged before removing or installing circuit

boards or plugging in or unplugging connectors.• Always use the interlock switch actuating jig to actuate an interlock switch when

a cover is opened or removed. The use of folded paper or some other object may damage the interlock switch mechanism, possibly resulting in an electric shock, injury or blindness.

• The product must be placed on a flat, level surface that is stable and secure.• Never place this product or its parts on an unsteady or tilting workbench when

servicing.• Provide good ventilation at regular intervals if a service job must be done in a

confined space for a long period of time.• Avoid dusty locations and places exposed to oil or steam.• Avoid working positions that may block the ventilation ports of the product.

• Replace a rundown battery with the same type as specified in the manufac-turer’s parts manual.

• Before installing a new battery, make sure of the correct polarity of the installa-tion or the battery could burst.

• Dispose of used batteries according to the local regulations. Never dispose of them at the user’s premises or attempt to try to discharge one.


P-4

5. Precautions for the Laser Beam (Only for Products Employing a Laser)• Removing the cover marked with the following caution label could lead to possi-

ble exposure to the laser beam, resulting in eye damage or blindness. Be sure to unplug the power cord before removing this cover.

• If removing this cover while the power is ON is unavoidable, be sure to wear protective laser goggles that meet specifications.

• Make sure that no one enters the room when the machine is in this condition.• When handling the laser unit, observe the “Precautions for Handling Laser

Equipment.”

DANGERInvisible laser radiation when open.

VOID DIREC EPOSREO BEM

094-12-01

1144D20

1167P001AA


P-5

• To reassemble the product, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified.• While the product is energized, do not unplug or plug connectors into the circuit boards

or harnesses.• The magnet roller generates a strong magnetic field. Do not bring it near a watch, floppy

disk, magnetic card, or CRT tube.• An air gun and vacuum cleaner generates a strong electrostatic charge that can destroy

the ATDC sensor and other sensors. Before cleaning a component with one of these devices, be sure to remove all the sensors. Otherwise, use a blower brush and cloth when cleaning parts.

• When handling circuit boards with MOS ICs, observe the “INSTRUCTIONS FOR HAN-DLING THE PWBs WITH MOS ICs” (applicable only to the products using MOS ICs).

• The PC Drum is a very delicate component. Observe the precautions given in “HAN-DLING OF THE PC DRUM” because mishandling may result in serious image problems.

• Note that replacement of a circuit board may call for readjustments or resetting of partic-ular items, or software installation.

• After completing a service job, perform a safety check. Make sure that all parts, wiring and screws are returned to their original positions.

• Check the area surrounding the service site for any signs of damage, wear or need of repair.

• Do not pull out the toner hopper while the toner bottle is turning. This could result in a damaged hopper motor or locking mechanism.

• If the product is to be run with the front door open, make sure that the toner hopper is in the locked position.

Other Precautions


P-6

ALL AreasCAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

GermanyVORSICHT!

Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßen Austausch der Batterie.Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen ähnlichen typ.Entsorgung gebrauchter batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.

FranceATTENTION

Ily a danger d’explosion s’ily a remplacement incorrec de la batterie.Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du meme type ou d’un type équivalent recom-mande par le constructueur.Mettre au rebut les batteries usageés conformément aux instructions du fabricant.

Denmark ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering Udskiftning må kun ske med bat-teri af samme fabrikat og type.Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

Norway ADVARSEL

Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.

Sweden VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-tillverkaren.Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

FinlandVAROlTUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, los se on virheellisesti asennettu.Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä Käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

Used Batteries Precautions

FrameMaker Ver.5.5E(PC) PS (Precaution For Service) Standard Document Ver.0199. 7. 2

PS-1

PRECAUTIONS FOR SERVICE

When performing inspection and service procedures, observe the following precautions to prevent mishandling of the machine and its parts.✽ Depending on the model, some of the precautions given in the following do not apply.

• When the user is using a word processor or personal computer from a wall outlet of the same line, take necessary steps to prevent the circuit breaker from opening due to over-loads.

• Never disturb the LAN by breaking or making a network connection, altering termination, installing or removing networking hardware or software, or shutting down networked devices without the knowledge and express permission of the network administrator or the shop supervisor.

1. DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT• To reassemble the product, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified.2. TROUBLESHOOTING• If a component on a PWB or any other functional unit including a motor is defective, the

text only instructs you to replace the whole PWB or functional unit and does not give troubleshooting procedures applicable within the defective unit.

• All troubleshooting procedures contained herein assume that there are no breaks in the harnesses and cords and all connectors are plugged into the right positions.

• The procedures preclude possible malfunctions due to noise and other external causes.

• Check the area surrounding the service site for any signs of damage, wear or need of repair.

• Keep all disassembled parts in good order and keep tools under control so that none will be lost or damaged.

• After completing a service job, perform a safety check. Make sure that all parts, wiring and screws are returned to their original positions.

• Do not pull out the toner hopper while the toner bottle is turning. This could result in a damaged motor or locking mechanism.

• If the product is to be run with the front door open, make sure that the toner hopper is in the locked position.

• Do not use an air gun or vacuum cleaner for cleaning the ATDC Sensor and other sen-sors, as they can cause electrostatic destruction. Use a blower brush and cloth. If a unit containing these sensors is to be cleaned, first remove the sensors from the unit.

Precautions Before Service

How to Use this Book

Precautions for Service


PS-2

• Be sure to unplug the copier from the outlet before attempting to service the copier.• The basic rule is not to operate the copier anytime during disassembly. If it is absolutely

necessary to run the copier with its covers removed, use care not to allow your clothing to be caught in revolving parts such as the timing belt and gears.

• Before attempting to replace parts and unplug connectors, make sure that the power cord of the copier has been unplugged from the wall outlet.

• Be sure to use the Interlock Switch Actuating Jig whenever it is necessary to actuate the Interlock Switch with the covers left open or removed.

• Do not plug in or unplug print jacks on the PWB or connect or disconnect the PWB con-nectors while power is being supplied to the copier.

• Never use flammable sprays near the copier.• A battery (lithium, nickel-cadmium, etc.) is used in this machine. Do not charge or short

circuit it and make sure of the correct polarity at replacement.• A used battery should be disposed of according to the local regulations and never be dis-

carded casually or left unattended at the user's premises.• When reassembling parts, make sure that the correct screws (size, type) and toothed

washer are used in the correct places.• If it becomes necessary to replace the thermal fuse or any other fuse mounted on a

board, be sure to use one of the rating marked on the blown fuse. Always note the rating marked on the fuse, as the rating and mounting site or number used are subject to change without notice.

• Never create a closed circuit across connector pins except those specified in the text and on the printed circuit.

• When creating a closed circuit and measuring a voltage across connector pins specified in the text, be sure to use the GND wire.

Precautions for Dis/Reassembly

Precautions for Circuit Inspection


PS-3

1. During Transportation/Storage:• During transportation or when in storage, new P.W. Boards must not be indiscriminately

removed from their protective conductive bags. • Do not store or place P.W. Boards in a location exposed to direct sunlight and high tem-

perature. • When it becomes absolutely necessary to remove a Board from its conductive bag or

case, always place it on its conductive mat in an area as free as possible from static elec-tricity.

• Do not touch the pins of the ICs with your bare hands.• Protect the PWBs from any external force so that they are not bent or damaged.

2. During Inspection/Replacement: • Avoid checking the IC directly with a multimeter; use connectors on the Board. • Never create a closed circuit across IC pins with a metal tool.• Before unplugging connectors from the P.W. Boards, make sure that the power cord has

been unplugged from the outlet.• When removing a Board from its conductive bag or conductive case, do not touch the

pins of the ICs or the printed pattern. Place it in position by holding only the edges of the Board.

• When touching the PWB, wear a wrist strap and connect its cord to a securely grounded place whenever possible. If you cannot wear a wrist strap, touch a metal part to dis-charge static electricity before touching the PWB.

• Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items.

• The magnet roller generates a strong magnetic field. Do not bring it near a watch, floppy disk, magnetic card, or CRT tube.

Handling of PWBs

Handling of Other Parts


PS-4

✽ Only for Products Not Employing an Imaging Cartridge.1. During Transportation/Storage: • Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the PC Drum. • The storage temperature is in the range between –20°C and +40°C. • In summer, avoid leaving the PC Drum in a car for a long time.

2. Handling: • Ensure that the correct PC Drum is used. • Whenever the PC Drum has been removed from the copier, store it in its carton or pro-

tect it with a Drum Cloth. • The PC Drum exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an

extended period of time. Never, therefore, expose it to direct sunlight. • Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oil-base solvent, finger-

prints, and other foreign matter.• Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum. • Do not apply chemicals to the surface of the PC Drum. • Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum.

If, however, the surface is contaminated with fingerprints, clean it using the following proce-dure.

Handling of the PC Drum

1. Place the PC Drum into one half of its carton.

1076D001

2. Gently wipe the residual toner off the surface of the PC Drum with a dry, Dust-Free Cotton Pad.

A. Turn the PC Drum so that the area of its surface on which the line of toner left by the Cleaning Blade is present is facing straight up. Wipe the surface in one continuous movement from the rear edge of the PC Drum to the front edge and off the surface of the PC Drum.

B. Turn the PC Drum slightly and wipe the newly exposed surface area with a CLEAN face of the Dust-Free Cotton Pad. Repeat this procedure until the entire surface of the PC Drum has been thor-oughly cleaned.

✽ At this time, always use a CLEAN face of the dry Dust-Free Cotton Pad until no toner is evident on the face of the Pad after wiping.

1076D002


PS-5

NOTES• Even when the PC Drum is only locally dirtied, wipe the entire surface.• Do not expose the PC Drum to direct sunlight. Clean it as quickly as possible even under

interior illumination.• If dirt remains after cleaning, repeat the entire procedure from the beginning one more

time.

✽ Only for Products Employing an Imaging Cartridge.1. During Transportation/Storage: • The storage temperature is in the range between –20°C and +40°C.• In summer, avoid leaving the Imaging Cartridge in a car for a long time.

2. Handling: • Store the Imaging Cartridge in a place that is not exposed to direct sunlight.

3. Precautionary Information on the PC Drum Inside the Imaging Cartridge:• Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oil-base solvent, finger-

prints, and other foreign matter.• Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum. • Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum.

3. Soak a small amount of either ethyl alcohol or iso-propyl alcohol into a clean, unused Dust-Free Cot-ton Pad which has been folded over into quarters. Now, wipe the surface of the PC Drum in one con-tinuous movement from its rear edge to its front edge and off its surface one to two times.

✽ Never move the Pad back and forth.

1076D003

4. Using the SAME face of the Pad, repeat the proce-dure explained in the latter half of step 3 until the entire surface of the PC Drum has been wiped. Always OVERLAP the areas when wiping. Two complete turns of the PC Drum would be appropri-ate for cleaning.

1076D004

Handling of the Imaging Cartridge




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563

FrameMaker Ver.5.5(PC) Di250f, Di350f99.08.27

1

SAFETY INFORMATION

Laser SafetyThis is a digital machine which prints by means of a laser. There is no possibility of danger from the laser, provided the machine is operated according to the instructions in this manual.

Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective housing, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.

This machine is certified as a Class 1 product. This means the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation.

Internal Laser RadiationMaximum Average Radiation Power: 36.7µW at laser aperture of the print head unit

Wavelength: 770-810nm

This product employs a Class III b Laser Diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The Laser Diode and Scanning Polygon Mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances.

CAUTION: The use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Because of this, Minolta strongly recommends that you operate your copy machine only as described in this documentation.

Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit

This figure shows the view inside the Right Side Door with the Imaging Unit removed.


2

CDRH regulationThis copier is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under the Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation.

The label shown on page 3 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.

This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 5mW and the wavelength is 770-810nm.

CAUTION: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.


3

Laser Safety LabelA laser safety label is attached to the outside of the copy machine as shown below.

The Manufacturer’s Name Plate is affixed at the position illustrated above.Please write down the Model Name and Serial No. of your copier here.

Model:

Serial No.:

Manufacturer’s Name Plate and Laser safety label


4

Label inside copy machineThe following laser safety label will be attached inside the copy machine as shown below.

Please read the following for your own protection.

Opening the cover indicated by the Caution label may expose you to harmful laser radiation which could cause damage or loss of eyesight. Do not open the cover when the power is on.

Caution


5

Service Precautions

(1) PrecautionsRefer to DISASSEMBLY/CLEANING for the Disassembly procedure.1. When unplugging connectors on the P.W.B.s themselves, always make sure the power

is OFF first. Be sure to unplug the copier before disassembling and cleaning.2. Always unplug connectors by holding the connector housing. Pulling on the wires can

lead to problems with poor contact.3. It is recommended that a body ground not be used when carrying out any troubleshoot-

ing procedure. Be sure to ground DC lines to a ground test point on the P.W.B.

(2) At Replacement/Adjustment/Cleaning1. Be sure to handle the Fusing Unit carefully. It remains hot a while after the copier is

turned off.2. Do not disassemble the Imaging Cartridge or Print Head Unit.3. Do not expose the PC Drum of the Imaging Cartridge to direct sunlight or to room light-

ing for more than 5 minutes.4. Turn off the power before removing the Print Head Unit to protect the eyes from possible

exposure to the laser beam.5. Use only a Fuse of the indicated rating.

(3) During Operation1. Keep your hands, clothing, etc. well away from operating or rotating parts.2. Never touch the terminals of electrical parts or high voltage parts.3. This copier uses an invisible laser beam. To prevent a laser beam leak, the copier per-

forms a trial run to make sure the covers are in position.

Handling the P.W.B.s

Observe the following precautions when handling a P.W.B. with ICs.(1) During Transportation/Storage1. During transport and storage, P.W.B.s should be kept in conductive bags or on mats

and not taken out unless absolutely necessary.2. P.W.B.s should be stored in a place where direct sunlight does not strike them.3. Do not touch IC terminals with your hands.

(2) At Replacement1. Before removing connectors from a P.W.B., make sure the copier has been unplugged.2. When P.W.B.s are taken out of their conductive bags or off their mats, hold them by their

edges to avoid touching the terminals or the patterned surfaces.3. Before installing connectors on a P.W.B., make sure the copier has been unplugged.




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563

FrameMaker Ver.5.5(PC) Di250f / Di350f99.08.27

INDEX

Chapter 1BASIC SPECIFICATIONS

Chapter 2STRUCTURE

Chapter 3OPERATION

Chapter 4REPORTS

Chapter 5SETUP FOR FAX OPTION

Chapter 6DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT

Chapter 7CHECK

Chapter 8MAINTENANCE FEATURE

Chapter 9TROUBLESHOOTING




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563

FrameMaker Ver.5.5(PC) Di250f/Di350f99.08.27

i

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS1-1. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................1- 1

1-1-1. FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................1- 11-2. LIST OF FUNCTIONS....................................................................................1- 5

Chapter 2 STRUCTURE2-1. NAME OF UNITS ..........................................................................................2- 12-2. EXTERNAL APPEARANCE, NAME OF PARTS ..........................................2- 22-3. CONFIGURATION OF COPIER ...................................................................2- 4

Chapter 3 OPERATION3-1. CIRCUITRY OPERATION .............................................................................3- 1

3-1-1. FUNCTION OF PKG ..........................................................................3- 2<<1>> MFB Board .............................................................................3- 2<<2>> HGB Board .............................................................................3- 7<<3>> CCD Board .............................................................................3- 9<<4>> INV for Reading......................................................................3-10<<5>> OPE UNIT ..............................................................................3-11<<6>> ACR Board .............................................................................3-12<<7>> BCR Board .............................................................................3-12<<8>> EMU Board.............................................................................3-13<<9>> ROT Board .............................................................................3-13<<10>> TMEM Board ........................................................................3-14<<11>> NCUK Board ........................................................................3-15<<12>> MPK Board...........................................................................3-16

3-2. OPERATION OF MECHANICAL PARTS ......................................................3-183-2-1. BOOK SCANNER UNIT (IR SECTION) ............................................3-18

<<1>> Image Processing Flow ..........................................................3-19<<2>> Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving

Mechanism .............................................................................3-20<<3>> Original Size Detection Timing ...............................................3-21<<4>> Original Size Detection...........................................................3-22

3-2-2. OPERATION OF COPIER..................................................................3-24<<1>> Copying process.....................................................................3-24<<2>> Drive system...........................................................................3-26<<3>> Operating sequence ...............................................................3-27<<4>> Image stabilization system .....................................................3-30

3-2-3. IMAGING CARTRIDGE (I/C)..............................................................3-31<<1>> I/C Drive Mechanism ..............................................................3-32<<2>> Identification and Life of I/C....................................................3-32

3-2-4. PC DRUM...........................................................................................3-333-2-5. DRUM CHARGING ............................................................................3-343-2-6. ERASE LAMP.....................................................................................3-353-2-7. PH SECTION......................................................................................3-36


ii

<<1>> PH Components .....................................................................3-37<<2>> Laser Emission Timing (SOS Signal) .....................................3-38

3-2-8. DEVELOPING UNIT...........................................................................3-39<<1>> Sleeve/Magnet Roller .............................................................3-40<<2>> Developing Bias .....................................................................3-41<<3>> ATDC Sensor .........................................................................3-42<<4>> Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism.........................3-43<<5>> Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism ...................3-44<<6>> Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism .......................3-45<<7>> I/C Cooling Fan Motor ............................................................3-46<<8>> Ozone Fan Motor ...................................................................3-46

3-2-9. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION ...................................................3-47<<1>> MP Cassette Paper Lifting Plate ............................................3-47<<2>> MP Cassette-in-Position Detection.........................................3-48<<3>> MP Cassette Paper Empty Detection.....................................3-49<<4>> MP Cassette Paper Size Detection ........................................3-50<<5>> Paper Take-Up Mechanism....................................................3-51<<6>> Manual Bypass Tray...............................................................3-51<<7>> Paper Take-Up Retry Mechanism ..........................................3-52

3-2-10. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS..........................................................3-53<<1>> Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism/Control ...................3-53<<2>> Paper Dust Remove .............................................................3-54

3-2-11. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION............................3-553-2-12. PC DRUM PAPER SEPARATOR FINGERS....................................3-563-2-13. PC DRUM CLEANING......................................................................3-573-2-14. FUSING UNIT...................................................................................3-58

<<1>> Drive Mechanism..................................................................3-59<<2>> Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism....................................3-59<<3>> Fusing Temperature Control.................................................3-60<<4>> CPM Control .........................................................................3-61

3-2-15. PAPER EXIT UNIT ...........................................................................3-623-2-16. FUSING COOLING FAN MOTOR ....................................................3-633-2-17. POWER UNIT COOLING FAN MOTOR...........................................3-64

3-3. SYSTEM CONTROL......................................................................................3-653-3-1. COMMUNICATION CONTROL..........................................................3-65

<<1>> Communication Mode ............................................................3-67<<2>> Encoding Method ...................................................................3-67

3-3-2. SELECTING PAPER..........................................................................3-68<<1>> Printing Area...........................................................................3-68<<2>> Printing Mode .........................................................................3-68<<3>> Paper Selection Mode (facsimile)..........................................3-69

Chapter 4 REPORTS4-1. LIST OF REPORTS .......................................................................................4- 14-2. HOW TO READ DATA OF REPORTS ..........................................................4- 2

4-2-1. ACTIVITY REPORT (TX) ...................................................................4- 24-2-2. ACTIVITY REPORT (RX) ..................................................................4- 3


iii

4-2-3. G3 PROTOCOL TRACE ....................................................................4- 44-2-4. MEMORY DUMP & FILE DUMP ........................................................4- 44-2-5. SERVICE CALL REPORT..................................................................4- 5

Chapter 5 SETUP FOR FAX OPTION5-1. CONNECT THE PHONE CABLES ................................................................5- 15-2. OPTIONAL PRODUCTS SETUP...................................................................5- 2

5-2-1. OPTIONAL MEMORY BOARD ..........................................................5- 25-2-2. TX (TRANSMISSION) MARKER........................................................5- 45-2-3. G3 MULTI-PORT................................................................................5- 6

Chapter 6 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT6-1. OVERVIEW....................................................................................................6- 1

6-1-1. IDENTIFICATION OF FUSES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS ...............6- 16-1-2. PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT ..........6- 16-1-3. INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBS WITH MOS ICS ......6- 26-1-4. HANDLING OF THE IMAGING CARTRIDGE....................................6- 26-1-5. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED ......................................6- 3

<<1>> Red Painted Screws...............................................................6- 3<<2>> Variable Resistors on Board...................................................6- 3<<3>> Other Screws..........................................................................6- 3

6-2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY ....................................................................6- 46-2-1. DOORS, COVERS, AND EXTERIOR PARTS: IDENTIFICATION

AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES.......................................................6- 46-2-2. REMOVAL OF CIRCUIT BOARDS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL

COMPOMENTS .................................................................................6- 76-2-3. PAPER TAKE-UP/TRANSPORT SECTION.......................................6-10

<<1>> Replacement of the Paper Take-Up Roll................................6-10<<2 >> Replacement of the Paper Dust Remover..............................6-10<<3>> Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover.....................................6-11<<4>> Cleaning of the Side Cover ....................................................6-11<<5>> Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Cover .........................................6-11

6-2-4. OPTICAL SECTION ...........................................................................6-12<<1>> Removal of the IR Unit ...........................................................6-12<<2>> Removal of the PH Unit ..........................................................6-13<<3>> Removal of the CCD Unit .......................................................6-15<<4>> Cleaning of the Scanner Rails/Bushings ................................6-15<<5>> Cleaning of the Mirrors ...........................................................6-16<<6>> Cleaning of the Lens ..............................................................6-16<<7>> Cleaning of the Original Glass................................................6-16<<8>> Removal of the Scanner.........................................................6-16<<9>> Removal of the Scanner Drive Cables ...................................6-18<<10>> Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables ..................................6-19

6-2-5. IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION...........................................................6-23<<1>> Removal of the Image Transfer Roller ...................................6-23<<2>> Cleaning of the Comb Electrode ............................................6-23<<3>> Cleaning of the Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate ...................6-24


iv

<<4>> Replacement of the Ozone Filter............................................6-246-2-6. DEVELOPING SECTION ...................................................................6-25

<<1>> Removal of the Imaging Cartridge..........................................6-256-2-7. FUSING SECTION .............................................................................6-26

<<1>> Removal of the Fusing Unit ....................................................6-26<<2>> Removal of the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp, Fusing Right

Roller, Fusing Left Roller, Fusing Roller Thermistor, Fusing Roller Thermostat, and Fusing Roller Heater Lamp Fuse......6-26

6-3. ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................................................6-296-3-1. ADJUSTMENT JIGS AND TOOLS USED..........................................6-296-3-2. ADJUSTMENT OF BELT TENSION ..................................................6-306-3-3. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS ...................................................................6-31

6-4. MISCELLANEOUS.........................................................................................6-336-4-1. INSTALLATION OF THE KEY COUNTER SOCKET (OPTION)........6-336-4-2. REMOUNTING THE EEPROM (IC3A)...............................................6-34

Chapter 7 CHECK7-1. CHECK LIST ..................................................................................................7- 17-2. BATTERY REPLACEMENT...........................................................................7- 2

Chaper 8 MAINTENANCE FEATURE8-1. OVERVIEW....................................................................................................8- 18-2. MAINTENANCE FEATURES AND OPERATION PROCEDURES................8- 28-3. DESCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE FEATURES AND OPERATIONS ........8- 4

8-3-1. START-UP..........................................................................................8- 48-3-2. INITIALIZATION .................................................................................8- 7

<<1>> Port/Line .................................................................................8- 7<<2>> TX Marker...............................................................................8- 7<<3>> RAM Clear..............................................................................8- 8<<4>> All Clear..................................................................................8- 9<<5>> Serial Number, Time and Date Setting, and Instalation

Date........................................................................................8-10<<6>> Touch Panel Position Adjustment ..........................................8-12

8-3-3. MAINTENANCE MODE......................................................................8-13<<1>> Memory Contents ...................................................................8-13<<2>> Memory Dump........................................................................8-13<<3>> File Display.............................................................................8-14<<4>> File Dump ...............................................................................8-15<<5>> Soft Set...................................................................................8-16<<6>> File Forward ...........................................................................8-16

8-3-4. SERVICE CHOICE.............................................................................8-17<<1>> System Input ..........................................................................8-18<<2>> ADFR Adjustment (2 sided ADF) ...........................................8-21<<3>> Printer Adjustment..................................................................8-22

8-3-5. SYSTEM INPUT.................................................................................8-25<<1>> Paper Size Input.....................................................................8-25<<2>> Change Fixed Zoom...............................................................8-27


v

<<3>> Machine Configuration ...........................................................8-27<<4>> Serial Number ........................................................................8-28<<5>> Permit Imaging unit ................................................................8-28<<6>> Original size detecting option .................................................8-28

8-3-6. COUNTER..........................................................................................8-29<<1>> Paper Counter ........................................................................8-29<<2>> Jam Counter...........................................................................8-31<<3>> PM Counter ............................................................................8-33<<4>> Trouble Counter .....................................................................8-35<<5>> Device Counter.......................................................................8-37<<6>> Maintenance Counter .............................................................8-38

8-3-7. FUNCTION .........................................................................................8-39<<1>> [F1] - Paper feed test without printing ....................................8-40<<2>> [F2] - Specification of output values for each HV ...................8-40<<3>> [F8] - Automatic adjustment for ATDC sensor........................8-41<<4>> [F12] - Printing pre-determined test patterns..........................8-42

8-3-8. I/O CHECK .........................................................................................8-428-3-9. MOVEMENT CHECK .........................................................................8-518-3-10. ROM VERSION ...............................................................................8-548-3-11. LEVEL HISTORY.............................................................................8-548-3-12. FAX SETTING .................................................................................8-55

<<1>> Setting the service call..........................................................8-55<<2>> Terminal transmission ..........................................................8-60

8-3-13. ADJUSTMENT FEATURES ............................................................8-62<<1>> Printer Adjustment ................................................................8-62<<2>> Scanner Adjustment .............................................................8-67<<3>> Document Size Detection .....................................................8-76

8-4. SOFT SWITCH LIST......................................................................................8-798-4-1. SOFT SWITCHES DISCLOSED TO USERS.....................................8-798-4-2. LIST OF DEFAULTS ..........................................................................8-838-4-3. LIST OF SOFT SWITCHES ...............................................................8-94

Chapter 9 TROUBLESHOOTING9-1. DIAGNOSIS BY ALARM CODE.....................................................................9- 1

9-1-1. COMMUNICATION ERROR CODES.................................................9- 29-1-2. PRINTER ALARMS (MALFUNCTION)...............................................9-10

<<1>> Detection Timing by Malfunction Code...................................9-10<<2>> Troubleshooting Procedures by Malfunction Code ................9-14

9-2. DIAGNOSIS OF DOCUMENT MISFEED ......................................................9-319-2-1. MECHANICAL MISFEED ...................................................................9-319-2-2. SENSOR FAILURE ............................................................................9-31

9-3. DIAGNOSIS OF PRINTER MISFEED ...........................................................9-339-3-1. MECHANICAL MISFEED ...................................................................9-339-3-2. ELECTRICAL MISFEED ....................................................................9-349-3-3. PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE (INCLUDING OPTIONAL

PARTS) .............................................................................................9-35<<1>> Paper Misfeed ........................................................................9-35


vi

9-4. DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOMS........................................................................9-708-5. CHECKPOINTS FOR TROUBLE IN ANALOG UNITS ..................................9-87

<<1>> Printer Signal Waveform ........................................................9-87<<2>> Communication Analog Signal Waveform..............................9-87<<3>> Image Memory Backup Signal Waveform ..............................9-89

9-6. WARM RESTART ..........................................................................................9-90<<1>> Overview ................................................................................9-90<<2>> How to Operate Warm Restart ...............................................9-90<<3>> Warm Restart Steps ...............................................................9-90

9-7. CLEARING RAM UNCONDITIONALLY.........................................................9-91<<1>> OvervieW................................................................................9-91<<2>> Operation of Unconditional RAM Clear ..................................9-91<<3>> Steps of Unconditional RAM Clear.........................................9-91

9-8. LOW-SPEED MODE SELECTING SWITCH .................................................9-929-9. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEMS ......................................................................9-93

FrameMaker Ver.5.5(PC) Pi350099.03.25

Chapter 1

BASIC SPECIFICATIONS




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


1-1

1-1. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS1-1-1. FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS L : Lengthwise, C : Crosswise

Di250f / Di350f

Facsimile type Console type transceiver

Scanning document size

ADF : Width 128 - 297 mm, Length 100 - 1000/4000 mm

BOOK : 11x17" max

ADFR : 11x17" max

Automatic docu-ment feed

Capacity : ADF-70 sheets, ADFR - 50 sheets

Max.size : 11x17"

Transport : Take-up face up, Exit face down

Scanning methodFlat surface scanning with super high resolution image sensor (CCD)

Detectable size

(Detection by main scanning width)

ADF : 11x17" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L / C, 5.5x8.5" L / C

BOOK : 11x17" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L / C, No document (option :5.5x8.5" L, A3L, A4L/C, FLS, B5C, B4L)

ADFR : 11x17" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L / C, Mixed Original Detection

Scanning rate (without zooming)

ADF & ADFR:Di250f 25 sheets/min. (LTR C copy)Di350f 35 sheets/min. (LTR C copy)


1-2

Di250f / Di350f

Papers size & Capacity

Multi purpose cassette (standard)

Capacity : 250 sheets max. (80g/m2)Size : 11x17" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L/C, 5.5x8.5" C,User Set (Automatic detection)

Type : Regular paper 60-90 g/m2

Special paper 91-157 g/m2

Postcard, OHP, Label (20 sheets max.)

Add-on Universal cassette

Capacity : 250 sheets max. (80g/m2)Size : 11x17" L, 11x14" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L/C 5.5x8.5" C, User Set (Dial setting)


Add-on 500 sheet cassette (fixed)

Capacity : 500 sheets max. (80g/m2)Size : 11x17" L, 11x14" L, 8.5x14" L, 8.5x11" L/C A3L, B4L, A4L/C (Maintenance menu setting)


Large capacity cabinet

Capacity : 2500 sheets max. (80g/m2)Size : 8.5x11" L/C only


Single manual feed (standard)Capacity : 1 sheetSize : Crosswise 3.5 to 11.75" Lengthwise 5.5 to 17 "


: Special paper 91-157 g/m2

Paper FinishingStandard : Face down stack, 500 sheets max. (LTR C, 80g/m2)

Option : Finisher, Mail-bin finisher, Job tray unit, Shift tray unit (Di250f only)

Recording method Electrophotographic recording (PPC)

Recording resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 16x15.4 mm automatically selectable

Recording rate Di250f :25 sheets/min. (LTR C), Di350f : 35 sheets/min. (LTR C)

warm-up time Di250f :60 sec., Di350f :70 sec.

Rotate print Yes (standard)

2-Sided print Yes (Di250f : option, Di350f : standard)


1-3

Di250f / Di350f

Size reduction/enlargement

Copy magnificationArbitrary : 25 - 400 % (0.1 % step) Fixed : 2.000/1.545/1.294/1.214/1.0/0.930/0.785/0.733/ 0.647/0.500

Communication magnification70 - 100 % (Regular size) auto/stepwise70 - 100 % (1% step) full automatic

First copy speed

Di250f : Less than 5.9 sec., Di350f : Less than 4.7 sec.(Specification of first copy timing is obtained with 1st drawer, LTR C paper, and BOOK scan)

Copy resolution600 dpi scanning / 600 dpi printing

Memory capacity 16 MB

Communication mode ECM/G3

Scanning resolution (main line x feed line)

G3/ECM : 8x3.85 line/mm, 8x7.7 line/mm, 8x15.4 line/mm, 16x15.4 line/mm

Data speed G3/ECM : 33.6Kbps - 2.4Kbps

Transmission time G3/ECM : Image signal 2 sec. approx. (V.34 JBIG)

Coding method MH / MR / MMR / JBIG

Applicable network G3/ECM : Phone line

Power 120V, 60 Hz

Power consumption

While idling : 190 W approx.

Power saving mode : Less than 45 W (International Energy Star will be met)

Max power consumption :Di250f : 1000 W approx.Di350f : 1200 W approx.

Physical dimensions W: 566mm (Di250f) / 616mm (Di350f) , D: 707mm, H: 635mm

Weight of main copierDi250f : 53.5kg Di350f : 55.5kg (no options)

Noise level

While idling :Di250f Less than 47 dB (A)Di350f Less than 50 dB (A)

While operating:Di250f Less than 69 dB (A) Di350f Less than 71 dB (A)


1-4

: available : unavailable

Options Di250f Di350f Remarks

Optional memory board

16MB, 32MB (64 MB max.)

• Up to 5 drawers (including the main prod-uct) in total.

Note: 4 drawers (including the main product) with Large Capacity Cabi-net.

• Only one finishing option selectable (Finisher, Mail-bin finisher, Job tray unit, or Shift tray unit)

• For Finisher/Mail-bin fin-isher, 5 drawers + Copy table or 3 drawers + Large Capacity Cabinet (or Copy desk) are required.

• TX marker is unavailable for 2 sided document feeder (ADFR).

Add-on drawer

• Universal cassette (250 sheets)

• 500-sheet cassette

• Large capacity cabi-net (2500 sheets)

2 sided document feeder (ADFR)

2 sided print unit (option) (standard)

Finisher

Mail-bin finisher

Job tray unit

Shift tray unit

G3 Multi-port

TX marker

Copy table

Copy desk

Plug-in counter


1-5

1-2. LIST OF FUNCTIONS (1/5)

Function ( : available : unavailable)

High speed scanning (0.55 sec./Letter Crosswise fine)

Speed High speed printout (Di350f : 35ppm/Letter Crosswise)

(Di250f : 25ppm/Letter Crosswise)ECM mode (2 sec. approx./Std. document)High speed half tone

High speed control

Super fine modeHalf tone transmission

ResolutionAuto retransmission after error

(ECM)

Full automatic exposure control

(Copy/FAX)

Manual exposure control (Only for copy)Smoothing (FAX function)Mixed mode (Text + Photo)

One-touch dialing (300 destinations)

# of abbreviated dialing numberAbbreviated dialing (500 destinations)

Operability One-touch program dialing (30 destinations)

# of one-touch dialing numberAuto re-dialing

Destination retrieval

LCD display (320 x 240)Operation (Analog touch Panel)Select auto-mode screen (Copy/FAX automatic switch)


1-6

(2/5)


2-in-1 printout

2-to-1 page transmission

TX marker (option)Automatic document feed (70 sheets, ADF)Automatic selection of print paper size FAX/Phone automatic switch

(Ringer count method)

Power Source Password communication

saving & utility Multi polling

functions Polling at regular times

Non storage transmission

Priority transmissionInsert destination

Message printing

Automatic pause for PSTN numberDisplay communication resultRecord TSI informationPower Source saving mode (ENERGY STAR )

Print lamp

Sound volume (setup on screen ; OFF/5 steps)Switch document reading length

(1m/4m)

ADF 2 sided transmission (Double scanning to compose 2-sided

document)Activity report (TX/RX)

Transmission report (with document margins, Result report)

Incompleted transmissionreport

(with document margins, Result report)

Report Serial broadcast report (with document margins, Result report)functions Relay report (with document margins)

User account report User listUser management list

Abbr. dial# list

One-touch dial# list

Fax program list

Memory clear report

Bulletin Board list

Relay group list

Setting list

R


1-7

(3/5)


Multi access Retransmission (destination changeable)Document retransmission Reception by memoryTransmission post (30 destinations)

Memory functions

Memory polling transmis-sionconfidential transmission confidential print

(F code)

Serial broadcast (210 destinations)Relay broadcast (F code)Multi copy (sorting function)Remote multi copy (F code)Memory full control (Separate Tx)Quick memory transmis-sionFile backup (2H Standard, 72H Optional)Rotated RxSelective polling Relay transmission

Extra telephone (PB forwarding receivable,

PSTN - port 1 only)System

ConfigurationManagement function per business section

(100 sections, User management)

Chain dialing

Hard disk

Inch/mm conversion

Memory (64MB max., option)

Paper feed drawer (3750 sheets max.)

Option: 250x1, 500x2, 2500x1PC print (Option)


1-8

(4/5)


EP-NET

Self diagnostics (Memory dump/display, protocol trace,

S/W switch list, service call setupPaper counter

Misfeed counter

Maintenance counter

PM counter

Trouble counter

Counter per applicationIn-file image data trans-mission

MaintenanceSwitch display of commu-nication error codeChange standard zoom ratioAdjust touch panel regis-tration.Adjust ADF zoom ratio(main/sub)

(Copy/FAX independently)

Adjust ADF registration. (main/sub)Adjust BS zoom ratio(main/sub)

(Copy/FAX independently)

Adjust BS registration. (main/sub)

Check sensors (ADF, BS, ADFR, engine, sorter)Adjust Document size sensorAdjust stop position for size option document

(2-sided / 1-sided)

Adjust registration of printer engine (main/sub)Adjust mask of printer engine (main/sub)Adjust feeder loop of printer engine (main/sub)Test printing

Adjust ATDC sensor

Paper through test

BS carriage free move

CCD drive

Lamp on


1-9

(5/5)


Continuous copy Di250f: 1-99 sheets,

Di350f: 1-999 sheetsRotation function (Required Duplex unit option)2 sided copy

2-to-1 page copy

4-to-1 page copy

Copy function Book document copySingle feed mode (ADFR manual feeder)

Mechanical sort Di250f: Finisher option,

Di350f: Finisher or Shift tray unit optionElectrical sort (Without mechanical sort)Stapler (Finisher option)Punch (Finisher option)Memory recall




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


Chapter 2

STRUCTURE




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


2-1

2-1. NAME OF UNITS

1. Duplexing Document Feeder (AFR-14)2. Automatic Document Feeder

*Di250f : AF-6*Di350f : AF-7

3. Plug-In Counter4. Printer Controller (Pi3500)5. Duplex Unit (AD-10)

*Di250f : option *Di350f : standard

6. Large Capacity Cabinet (PF-106)*2500-sheet cassette

7. Paper Feed Unit (PF-108)*500-sheet cassette

8. Paper Feed Unit (PF-110)*250-sheet universal cassette

9. Shift Tray (OT-100)*Di250f only

10. Job Tray (JS-200)11. Mailbin Finisher (FN-500)12. Finisher (FN-100)

1

3

11

2

10

12

9

7,8

5

4

6


2-2

2-2. External Appearance, Name of Parts

12

13

14

15

1

2 34

5

11 16

17

6

7

8

9

10

18

19

20

21

2223

24252627

2829

30

32

33

31


2-3

1. ADF Glass Assy.2. Rear Holding Bracket3. Original Glass4. Front Holding Bracket5. Control Panel6. Front Upper Cover7. Exit Lower Cover8. Front Cover9. LED Cover10. MP Cassette11. 500-Sheet Cassette12. Upper Front Left Cover13. Left Cover14. Upper Cover15. Left IR Cover16. Original Cover17. Rear Right IR Cover

18. Left Hinge Cover19. Rear Left IR Cover20. Rear Upper Cover21. Rear Lower Cover22. Right Hinge Cover23. Connector Cover24. Rear Inside Cover25. Toner Bottle Cover26. Harness Cover27. Right Lower Cover28. 500-Sheet Cassette Side Cover29. Manual Bypass Tray30. Side Cover31. Fusing Unit32. Front Inside Cover33. Right IR Cover


2-4

2-3. CONFIGURATION OF COPIER

1. 2nd Mirror2. 3rd Mirror3. Exposure Lamp4. 1st Mirror5. Lens6. CCD Unit7. Paper Exit Roller8. Fusing Roller Thermostat (TS1)9. Fusing Roller Heater Lamp (H1)10. Paper Exit Sensor (PC3)11. Right Fusing Roller12. Duplex Unit Transport Roller 113. Left Fusing Roller14. Duplex Unit Transport Sensor (PI1)

15. Fusing Cooling Fan Motor (M3)16. Duplex Unit Transport Roller 217. Image Transfer Roller18. Synchronizing Roller19. Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC2)20. Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor

(PC8)21. Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roll22. Vertical Transport Roller23. Paper Separator Pad24. Paper Take-Up Roll25. Imaging Cartridge (I/C)26. PH Unit

1 2 5 6 7 8 9

10

11

13

15

17

18

19

20

2425

26

43

21

22

23

12

14

16


Chapter 3

OPERATION




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


3-1

3-1. CIRCUITRY OPERATIONIntegrated block diagram

CP

UR

OM

IPU

SR

4K I/

F

SC

U1

SC

U2

LCD

C

VR

AM

Cen

tro1

Cen

tron

ics

conn

ecto

r

PC

I

CO

DE

C3

CO

DE

C1

CO

DE

C2

NC

U I/

F

ME

MC

MF

B

OP

E C

PU

INV

Con

trol

Pan

el

Spe

aker

OP

E U

nit

LCD

DR

AM

RT

C

BB

RA

M

Uni

vers

al P

ort

MD

M

FO

NT

-RO

M

AF

E

RO

M

RA

M

NC

UK

HG

B

ES

P2

CC

D

Dis

tanc

e m

easu

rem

ent

sens

or

Sca

nner

bas

e se

ctio

n

AC

R

Sca

nner

Pos

ition

Sen

sor

1S

cann

er P

ositi

on S

enso

r 2

Orig

inal

Siz

e D

etec

ting

Sen

sor

2,3,

4O

rigin

al S

ize

Det

ectin

g S

enso

r 7

Orig

inal

Siz

e D

etec

ting

Sen

sor

10

Siz

e R

eset

Sw

itch

Orig

inal

Cov

er D

etec

ting

Sen

sor

INV

Col

d ca

thod

e tu

be

Mot

or

Mot

or

AD

F d

oor

open

/clo

se s

enso

r

Orig

inal

Siz

e D

etec

ting

Sen

sor

Doc

umen

t Em

pty

sens

orR

egis

trat

ion

Sen

sor

Pap

er T

ake-

Up

Clu

tch

Prin

t lam

p

TX

mar

ker

FC

UE

Opt

ical

cab

le

DR

AM

RO

T8

16T

ME

MN

i-Cd

batte

ry

Ext

ende

d M

emor

y

PP

C

Cop

ier

engi

ne

Pow

er u

nit

Pap

er c

asse

tte

Cop

ier

Uni

t

No

pape

r LE

D

Li

DG

Lege

nd

LSI

Boa

rd

Opt

ion

KE

Y T

ouch

Pan

el

Ext

erna

l T

elep

hone

Dis

tanc

e m

easu

rem

ent

sens

or

Cen

tro2

Mul

ti-P

roto

col L

AN

NR

OM

NC

UK

MP

KM

ulti-

port

EM

U


3-2

3-1-1. FUNCTION OF PKGSummary of PKG functions

<< 1 >> MFB BoardThe MFB board is a main controller with an external 32 (internal 64) bit RISC processor. It controls several units of the system (e.g., circuitry of each unit, transmitter, reader, copier, mechanically moving parts, and operation) according to system software.The MFB board has 3 main blocks: [1] Main controller [2] Image Processor/FAX communicator [3] Centronics/expansion interface

[1] Main Controller(1) Overview The main controller has a CPU and an IPUS LSI for controlling several blocks, program memory (ROM), and work memory (DRAM). It also has backup memory (SRAM) to store status information of the system. The main controller uses this information for various controls.

Name of PKG-ASS’Y

Description

MFBA main control circuit with an external 32 bit RISC processor. It controls several units (circuitry of each unit, transmitter, reader, printer, mechan-ically moving parts, and operation) according to system software.

HGBThis PKG has circuitry for scanning controller, CCD driver, CCD output image processor, binary image processor, optical transmission I/F, motor controller, and sensor I/F.

CCDThis is a scanning image sensor and screwed to the lens housing. It receives control signals from an ESP2-LSI of the HGB board to scan documents and outputs analog image signals to the HGB board.

INV for Scanning A DC-AC inverter to control the cold cathode tube (1) for scanning.

OPE unit

An operation/display unit with the following parts: • AOP board that has several switches, an analog touch panel control

circuit, and a control CPU • LCD unit that has LCD with a backlight and the analog touch panel • Inverter for the backlight, a speaker and fixture plates, and a panel

case

ACR A relay between the HGB board and several sensors for ADF

BCRA relay between the HGB board and several sensors for the mechani-cally moving parts of the Book scanner. It has a motor driver.

EMU A work memory. Its memory capacity is 12MB

ROT It stores image information. Its memory capacity is 8 or 16MB.

TMEM It stores image information. Its memory capacity is 32MB.

NCUKThis is a line control unit that detects line signals including the line con-nection and the ringer.

MPK Connect this PKG to MFB for G3 Multi-port configuration.


3-3

(2) Block diagram

(3) Function 1) CPU This is the CPU of the system. It uses an external 32 (internal 64) bit RISC processor. 2) IPUS LSI It connects the CPU and the controller for controlling overall operation of the system. 3) Program memory (ROM) The software program for operating the system is stored here. It has a memory capacity of 12MB (4MB x 3). 4) Work memory (DRAM) This memory serves the area of the system operation. Standard memory capacity is 4MB on the MFB board. 5) Backup memory (SRAM) It is a 512KB memory that stores the status information of the system.

(4) Backup function 1) Method

Note: Daily usage 12 hours. It will last at least 10 years even if the system is always ON.

2) Backup contents

Backup location Method Lifetime Voltage/current

Battery backup RAM Lithium battery 5 years approx 3V/1000mAh

Clock LSI (discharge type) Note

Back up location Contents

Battery Backup RAM

• Phone number........ Abbreviated phone numbers• Self-data................TSI information and serial number are backed up• Soft switch..............Registration data of soft switches• Communication management....Information on activity reports

Clock LSI Time count

IPUS LSI

CPU

AD bus

Address bus

Address bus

Clock VariousI/Os

Controlpanel

LCD

DRAM SRAM

ROM data bus

Data bus

ROM

Back up battery


3-4

[2] Image Data Processor/FAX Communicator (1) Overview This processor has interface blocks with the scanner unit or the printer units, and the FAX communication block. It has the scanned image reception circuit (the optical reception circuit), a storage coder/decoder and a storage code memory manager (FCUE,LSI), image memory (DRAM FILE), a printer controller (FCUE LSI), a modem (V.34), and a communi cation controller (built in FCUE LSI). Each block is controlled by the CPU of the MFB board. The image memory has an external Ni-Cd battery for backup.

(2) Block diagram

FCUE LSI

Storage coder

Storagedecoder

Printimage sizeconverter

Backupcircuit

Storage coder

Communication coding/decoding

Communicationimage size converter

Modulator

FAXControl signal

V.34Modem

Video signal

Opticalreceptioncircuit

IPUSLSI

Scanner

Printer

Control signal

Optical cable

File management

Imagememory

Storage decoder


3-5

(3) Function 1) Scanned image receiver (optical receiver) An acquired image by the scanner is converted into an optical signal and then transmitted through the optical cable. The transmitted image is received by the optical receiver of the MFB board. The image data is transmitted with a high-speed transmission clock of 36.75 MHz. 2) Storage coder/decoder (FCUE LSI) The coder function codes image data into stored code data. The decoder function decodes stored code data into image data. 3) Image memory manager (FCUE LSI) This block reads/writes the stored code data through interface units (the scanner, the printer, and the communication units) from/into DRAM FILE by the unit of 1 block. The maximum data throughput for DRAM FILE is 320 Mbps. A time division method is used to refresh read/write of the data through the interface units, and DRAM FILE. 4) Image memory (DRAM FILE) Standard system has 16MB; 8MB on the MFB board and a ROT boards (8MB). The maximum capacity is 64MB by installing another ROT board and a TMEM board.

Each memory board (ROT (8MB,16MB) and TMEM (32MB)) has its designated slot. Be careful when you insert it. 5) Printer controller (FCUE LSI) It processes the line density conversion for print image data (serial data) from the storage decoder, and stores it in the internal frame memory. The converted data is read synchronized with the PPC printer, added information on the left margin and the white mask, and then output to the printer as serial data. The frame memory can hold up to 20 Kbit of data to be output to the printer. The printer controller exchanges commands/statuses for controlling the printer unit. 6) Modem (V.34 modem) This modem has a digital signal processor (DSP), an analog front end (AFE) for A/D and D/A conversions, a modem F/WROM, and boot memory (SRAM). It follows the electrical communication standards of the recommended V.8, V.34, V.17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21ch2, T.3, and T.4. It also follows the T.30 binary signal procedure. The transmission speeds are 33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400, and 300 bps. This modem has PB tone sending for PB calling. It is located on the memory map of the MFB board. 7) Communication controller (FCUE LSI and IPUS LSI) This controller performs necessary functions (relay control, ringer detection, line connection detection, polarity reverse detection, dialing and pulse sending) for G3 communication. It also detects the frequency of the tonal signal of G3 communication. 8) Image memory backup circuit This backup circuit switches the power source supply unit to the battery while the system is turned OFF or during power source failure so that the stored data in the image file memory (maximum 64MB) is being held.

Standard memory Add-on sort memory

16MB: MFB(8MB) + ROT(8MB) TMEM(32MB) and/or ROT (16MB)


3-6

[3] Centronics/expansion interface(1) Overview This interface block has a 36-pin bi-directional Centronics interface as a PC printer, a uni- directional Centronics interface and a PCI bus for LAN boards for future expansion, and an expansion interface for various system options.

(2) Block diagram

(3) Function 1) Special connectors (option for communication) Use them to attach the optional boards for the 2nd G3 Port.

•MPK board (G3 Multi-port) 2) Special connector Use them to add file memories. There are 3 boards that can be connected.

•ROT (8MB)•ROT (16MB)•TMEM (32MB)

3) 36-pin Centronics interface (universal connector) The system has the IEEE1284 interface (the Centronics interface) as a standard interface to be used as a PC printer for future expansion. 4) PCI bus (special connector) This connector is not used for general card edge types of interface but only for our pre- paratory board. Therefore, a commercial PCI board cannot be connected. It is reserved for a future expansion of network function.

IPUS LSI

Uni-directionalCentronicsconnector

(40pins)

PC PrinterController

(Future expansion)

LAN board(Future expansion)

IEEE1284Interface

36-pinCentronics

universal connector

(36pins)

PCI busconnector

(100pins)

Workmemory connector

(72pins) FCUELSI

add-on Work memory(EMU)

To PC

Specialconnector

(100pins)

Specialconnector

(168pins)

Specialconnector

(168pins)

Specialconnector

(168pins)

Multiportunit

(MPK)

Add-onfile

memory

(ROT08)

Add-onfile

memory

(ROT16)

Add-onfile

memory

(TMEM)


3-7

<<2>>HGB Board[1] OverviewThis board controls the scanning operation. The core device is an ESP2 LSI and has a CCD driver, a CCD output image processor, a binary image processor, an optical transmis-sion I/F, a motor controller, and a sensor I/F circuit.

[2] Block diagram

CCDdriver

Binaryimage

processor

A/Dcoverter

Analogprocessor

Image signalfrom CCD board

To CCD Board

Motorcontroller

SensorI/F circuit

ADFR I/Fcircuit

DPU I/Fcircuit

CCD driving clock

Address bus

Data bus

To BCR boardfor Book scanner

To ACR boardSensors for ADF

To BCR boardfor Book scanner

To ACR boardSensors for ADF

To ADFR unit

OpticalI/F circuit

To MFB boardOptical cable

To MFB board

ESP2 LSI


3-8

[3] Function of each block(1) CCD driver This driver is built in the ESP2 LSI and generates a clock for CCD driving.(2) CCD output image processor 1) Analog processor Two image signals from the CCD board are sampled and held by the analog processor. Then it restores the black level, adjusts the gain, mixes the 2 signals (i.e., adjusts the levels of the 2 CCD image signals to convert into 1 image signal), and then outputs the mixed signal to the A/D converter. 2)A/D converter The A/D converter receives the analog signal from Analog processor, converts it into a digitized parallel signal (8 bit for each pixel), and then outputs the digitized signal to the ESP2 LSI.(3) Binary image processor This processor is also built in the ESP2 LSI. It normalizes an 8 bit image signal from the A/D converter (shading correction), and processes it for high image quality (gamma correction and image region separation). It also performs MTF correction (ABC and moving average), and binary process (floating slice, dithering, and error diffusion). The binary image processor also performs zooming and the white mask process. The processed image signal is converted into serial data to output to the optical transmission I/F.(4) Optical transmission I/F This block converts an electrical (serial) signal from the ESP2 LSI into an optical signal in order for transmitting to the MFB board. The optical image signal and a synchronized clock signal will be transmitted.(5) Motor controller This controller is built in the ESP2 LSI. It generates signals for control, magnetic field excitation patterns, and currents of the motors of the Book scanner and the ADF scanner.(6) Sensor I/F circuit This controller is also built in the ESP2 LSI. It receives information such as the document size, the position of the top of the document, and the status of the cover, from sensors of the Book scanner and the ADF scanner. The sensor I/F circuit has a filtering circuit for removing chattering of signals from sensors.(7) ADFR I/F This circuit is built in the ESP2 LSI. ADF I/F sends command to the ADFR unit and it receives the status information from the ADFR unit.


3-9

<<3>> CCD Board[1] OverviewThe CCD board is the scanning image sensor. It is screwed to the lens housing unit.The CCD controlling signal from the ESP2 LSI of the HGB board is sent to the CCD via the CCD driver of the CCD board.There are two signals, one for odd number pixels and the other for the even number pixels, as the analog image signal from the CCD is sent to the HGB board.

[2] Block diagram

[3] Function of each block (1) CCD driver• Buffers 4 signals from ESP2 LSI (HGB board) and send them to CCD

(2) CCD• 7500 Pixels (can read an A3 document with 600 dpi)• High speed scanning (18.375MHz x 2 channels, Pixel rate is 36.75M pixels/sec.)

CCD driver

CCD

Document

CN2-1,3,5,6

CN2-1CN2-6CN2-5CN2-3

CN2-2,4

CN1-7,9

Gothic letters indicate pin numbers.

9-pinconnector

: HCCLK (Transmission clock): HCTG (Transfer gate clock): HCCP (Clamp pulse): HCRS (Reset pulse): AG

CN1-1,2,3CN1-4,5,6,8

CN1-7,9

: +12V : AG : APIX (Analog image signal)


3-10

<<4>> INV for Reading[1] OverviewThis is a DC-AC inverter for reading, and is used for controlling the cold cathode tube (1).

DC-AC inverter

[2] Block diagram

Input Voltage DC24V 5%

Input current Typ 1.3 A (ave.)

Load current 48 3 mA (rms)

Operating frequency 40 10 kHz

Secondary open voltage 2110 V (rms)

PSU

HGB

BCR

INVfor

reading Cold cathode tube(for both BOOK & ADF)

PSU Power Supply Unit (Low voltage unit)

Controlsignal

+24V

+24V Secondaryopen

voltage


3-11

<<5>> OPE UNIT[1] OverviewThe OPE unit has the following parts:

(1) OPE board (AOP) that has various switches, an analog touch panel control circuit, and a controlling CPU with A/D conversion function(2) LCD unit that has a LCD panel with backlight and an analog touch panel(3) Inverter for backlight(4) Speaker and fuser/fusing plates(5) Panel case

[2] Block diagram

[3] Major Specifications of OPE Unit(1) LCD unit

LCD screen 320 x 240 dots

Analog touch panel Effective operation region: 116.57 x 87.77

Brightness control voltage 17.3 to 20.1 V (at ambient temperature of 25 C)

Material Colored polyester film with anti-glare process

BacklightCold cathode tube , life time over 15,000 hoursCannot replace Xe lamp alone

CPU

Display dataconversion

circuit

Display datatoggle circuit

Contrastvolume

Controlcircuit

LEDX5

Key matrix

Speaker

ON/OFFcircuit

LCD unit

Analog touchpanel

Backlight

Inverter for backlight

IPU

Scan

Return

AOP board

LCD I/F

SerialI/F

MFB board

OPE Unit

Warm restart


3-12

(2) Inverter for backlight

[4] Adjustment switches(1) Slide switch for controlling LCD brightness Slide type switch : adjusts brightness of the LCD screen(2) Warm restart switch Non-lock type tactile switch : used for unconditional warm restart

[5] Remarks(1) FPC for the touch panel is extremely delicate. Do not detach it from the connector unless absolutely necessary.(2) When removing the OPE board, make sure that the speaker terminals and the fuser/ fusing plates are not in contact.

<<6>> ACR Board[1] OverviewThe ACR board relays between the HGB board and various sensors for mechanical moving parts of ADF. It has a motor driver.

[2] Block diagram

<<7>> BCR Board[1] OverviewThe BCR relays between the HGB board and various sensors for mechanical parts of the Book scanner. It has a motor driver.

[2] Block diagram

Input Voltage DC24V 5%

Input current Typ 130 mA (ave.)

Output voltage without load 1000 V (rms)

Lighting frequency 30 kHz

Tube current 4.5 mA (rms)

Various mechanism sensors

(document detection, size detection,

ADF door open/close, and tip detection

sensors)

S-motor driver pulse

TX marker

Cold cathode lamp control

Electromagnetic clutch

Copier lamp

HGB ACR

Various mechanism sensors

(size detection, door open/close, 15 sensors,

carriage sensor HP, carriage sensor L)

S-motor driver pulse

Cold cathode tube control

HGB BCR


3-13

<<8>> EMU Board[1] Overview(1) Used as work memory (for future expansion. Not mounted.)(2) Memory capacity : 12MB(3) Expansion method : Insert an EMU board of 12MB into the designated socket for SIMM module.

[2] Block diagram

<<9>> ROT Board[1] Overview(1) Used as memory for image information(2) Memory capacity : 8MB or 16MB (2 types)(3) Expansion method : Insert this board into a module socket of the MFB board. Insert the 16MB type into CN8 DIMM socket, and the 8MB type into CN9 DIMM socket of the MFB board, respectively.Note: When you add a memory board, make sure that nothing is stored in the image memory.

[2] Block diagram

2M Byte DRAM × 26 DRAMs mounted

IPUS G/A

EMU

2M Byte DRAM

FCUE G/A

ROT

MFB


3-14

<<10>> TMEM Board[1] Overview(1) Used as memory for image information(2) Memory capacity : 32MB(3) Expansion method : Insert this board into a module socket of the MFB board. Use CN7 DIMM socket of the MFB board.Note: When you add a memory board, make sure that nothing is stored in the image memory.

[2] Block diagram

8M Byte DRAM

FCUE G/A

TMEM

MFB


3-15

<<11>> NCUK Board[1] OverviewThe NCUK board has various functions such as line connection, ringer detection, off-hook detection, polarity detection, and dialing pulse transmission.

[2] Block diagram

[3] Function of each blockLINE is a modular port for connecting a phone line. TEL is another modular port to connect an extra telephone set.CML is a relay that switches from phone to fax. It will be turned ON by pressing the commu-nication switch, detecting a ringer, or a facsimile calling signal. TR1 of the dial pulse trans-mitter is then turned ON to establish a DC-connection with the transformer (T1) The NCUK board cannot be used in the back to back mode because a signal from LINE is DC-connected through ST1 of the dial pulse transmitter. The actual connection with the line is necessary for testing this board. The dialing pulse transmitter outputs dial pulses controlled by the MFB board. The ringer detector provides an automatic reception function. It isolates a receiver ringer signal with a photo-coupler, and outputs it to the MFB board. The ringer signal is counted by the counter of G/A.The polarity detector uses two photo-couplers to detect the DC polarity of the line. If either of the detected signals is "1", the other signal is "0."The off-hook detector shares a circuit with the polarity detector, and detects off-hook, i.e., direct current.

LINE

TEL

Photo coupler

Photo coupler

CML Dialing pulse transmission circuit

ST1 TR1

T1Line signal

Ringer input

Hook-off 1 input

Hook-off 2 input

[NCUI]

Photo coupler


3-16

<<12>> MPK Board[1] OverviewThe facsimile system will have G3 multi-port configurations once the MPK board is con-nected with the MFB board. The MPK board has 2 blocks:(1) G3 expansion port : This port has the same H/W as the modem of the MFB board, and will be used to connect the line through NCU for expansion.(2) CODEC : This unit is used for coding/decoding function.

[2] Block diagram<1>Block diagram for function (1).

<2> Block diagram for function (2).

MFB board

IPUS LSIModemDSP CLK/DATA

OSC

24.576MHzDATA

DATA

SRAM

NCU(Expansion board)

Control line

Dial pulse signal, ringer detectionHook detection, CML relay signal

PIO

AMPBuffer

TX path

RX path

Line signal

Tonal signal

LPF AMP

AMP

HYB

ModemF/W

Modem AFEanalog

front endRX TX

Analog signal

T-typecircuit

MFB board

CPUCommunicationbetween CPUs PIO V853

Control line

Address,data,selector

RAM

ROM

SRAM


3-17

[3] Overview of function for each block<1> G3 expansion port• Modem DSP = IC5• Modem analog front end = IC14• 1 Mbit high-speed SRAM = IC13 • 4 Mbit ROM = IC12These parts are assembled to work as a "G3 modem." The modem DSP has a host I/F and is controlled by the IPUS LSI of the MFB board. The modem DSP transmits/receives FAX signals to/from analog circuits (including NCU) through the modem analog front end.F/W of the modem DSP is stored in the 4 Mbit ROM.The analog circuits including the HYB circuit have a discrete configuration using OP ampli-fiers. This configuration has the same H/W as the basic port side (the MFB board side).


3-18

3-2. OPERATION OF MECHANICAL PARTS3-2-1. BOOK SCANNER UNIT (IR SECTION)• Light reflected from the original passes through three mirrors and a lens to form a

reduced image on the CCD Sensor as the Scanner is moved by the Scanner Motor. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern (image data) into an electrical image signal.

• The electrical image signal is then output to the MFB Board.

1. BCR Board (BCR)2. Original Size Detecting Sensor 5 (UN8)3. Original Cover Detecting Sensor (PC14)4. Original Size Detecting Sensor 4 (UN7)5. Exposure Lamp (LA2)6. Original Size Detecting Sensor 6 (UN9)7. Scanner Motor (M5)8. HGB Board (HGB)9. Original Size Detecting Sensor 1 (UN4)10. Original Size Detecting Sensor 2 (UN5)11. Original Size Detecting Sensor 3 (UN6)

12. Scanner Home Position Sensor 1 (PC12)

13. Size Reset Switch (S5) 14. CCD Board (CCD) 15. Lens 16. Scanner 17. 1st Mirror 18. Scanner Home Position Sensor 2

(PC13) 19. 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage 20. Inverter Board (INV)

1

2

56

7 89

10

11

12

13

14

1516

18

19

20

4

3

17


<<1>> Image Processing Flow• Image processing is made up of the following blocks.

1. Photoelectric Conversion (CCD Sensor)• Light reflected off the original is received through mirrors and lens by the CCD Sensor

which, in turn, outputs the corresponding data to the HGB Board.2. HGB Board• After converting the data received from the CCD to an analog signal, the board converts

it to 8-bit image data (A/D conversion). It further makes various corrections and outputs the resultant image data to the MFB Board over an optical cable.

3. MFB Board• This board compresses the image data received from the HGB Board, stores it, and

uncompresses it.• The image memory has a standard capacity of 16MB and can be expanded up to 64MB

(optional).4. PH• Emits a laser beam according to the image data provided by the MFB Board to expose

the surface of the PC Drum.

1. Photoelectric Conversion (CCD Sensor)

2. HGB Board

3. MFB Board

4. PH (Laser Emission)

Transmitted over an optical cable.

3-19


3-20

<<2>> Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism<Scanner>• During a scan, the Scanner projects an even amount of light from the Exposure Lamp

onto the entire surface of the original. The light is reflected from the original to the 1st Mirror of the scanner and then to the 2nd and 3rd Mirrors.

• The Scanner is driven by the Scanner Motor and front and rear Scanner Drive Cables.• Scanner speed is determined by the set zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode.• The Scanner is at home position when Scanner Home Position Sensor 1 is blocked. This

position serves as the reference for the scan motion.• Scanner Home Position Sensor 2 determines the home position of the Scanner when

AF-7 is used.

<2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage>• The 2nd and 3rd Mirrors are mounted to their holder at right angles to each other. They

direct the light reflected off the 1st Mirror through the lens to the CCD.• The 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage is also moved by the Scanner Drive Cables and pulleys

driven by the Scanner Motor. It travels at a speed half that of the Scanner, thereby keep-ing constant the optical path length between the Original Glass and lens.

Scanner Motor (M5)

Scanner Home Position Sensor 1 (PC12)

Scanner

Scanner Home Position Sensor 2 (PC13)

2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage


3-21

<<3>> Original Size Detection TimingThe copier CPU affirms and resets the readings of the original size at the following timings.• Takes size readings:

When the Original Cover Detecting Sensor is deactivated.• Affirms size readings:

When the Start key is pressed with the Original Cover Detecting Sensor activated or the Size Reset Switch deactuated.

• Resets size readings:When the Size Reset Switch is deactuated.

Original Cover Detecting Sensor (PC14)

Size Reset Switch (S5)

Magnet


3-22

<<4>> Original Size Detection• When the copier is in Auto Paper or Auto Size, the sensors mounted in the IR receive

light reflected off the original to allow the copier to determine the original size.

Original Size Detecting Sensor 6 (UN9)







3-23

<Original Size Identification: Metric Areas>

❍: Detected by sensor; L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

NOTEUN4, UN6 and UN8 are options.

<Original Size Identification: Inch Areas>

❍: Detected by sensor; L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

NOTEUN6, UN8 and UN9 are options.

Original SizeUN4 UN5 UN6 UN7 UN8 UN9

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9

11” × 17” ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

A3L ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

A4L ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

A4C ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

A5L ❍

B4L ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

FLS ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

Letter L ❍ ❍ ❍

Letter C ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

Legal ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

Original SizeUN5 UN6 UN7 UN8 UN9

S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9

11” × 17” ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

A3L ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

A4L ❍ ❍ ❍

A4C ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

B4L ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

5-1/2” × 8-1/2”L ❍

FLS ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

B5C ❍ ❍ ❍

Letter L ❍ ❍

Letter C ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

Legal ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍


3-24

3-2-2. OPERATION OF COPIER<<1>> Copying process

1. PC Drum• The drum is an aluminum cylinder coated with photosensitive material on which an elec-

trostatic latent image is produced.

2. Drum Charging• A scorotron charger employing a comb electrode generates a negative DC charged

layer on the surface of the PC Drum.

3. Photoelectric Conversion Section• The Exposure Lamp directs light onto the original. The light reflected off the original is

directed and resized by the mirrors and lens so as to produce a reduced-size image on the CCD Sensor.

4. HGB Board• Converts an electric signal into a corresponding 8-bit digital image signal (A/D conver-

sion), makes various corrections, and outputs the results to the MFB Board.

5. MFB Board• Compresses the image data received from the HGB Board, stores it, and uncom-

presses it.

6. Laser Exposure• The laser beam emitted from the LD (laser diode) strikes the surface of the PC Drum,

creating an electrostatic latent image.

7. Development• Negatively charged toner adheres to the latent image on the PC Drum surface, creating

a visible image.

8. Paper Feed• Feeds sheets of paper from the appropriate paper source.

9. Image Transfer• An Image Transfer Roller is used. A positive charge applied to the roller causes the vis-

ible image on the surface of the PC Drum to transfer onto the front side of the paper.

4. HGB Board

5. MFB Board 1. PC Drum

10. Paper Separation

9. Image Transfer

8. Paper Feed7. Development

2. Drum Charging

12. Cleaning

15. Paper Exit 14. Fusing

8. Paper Feed

3. Photoelectric Conversion Section

13. Erase

6. Laser Exposure

11. Duplex Unit


3-25

10. Paper Separation• The PC Drum Separator Fingers remove paper from the surface of the PC Drum.

11. Duplex Unit• Makes 2-sided copies.

12. Cleaning• The Cleaning Blade scrapes residual toner off the surface of the PC Drum and the toner

is recycled back to the Developing Unit.

13. Erase• The PC Drum is exposed to light, which effectively removes any residual charge from

the drum surface.

14. Fusing• Heat and pressure applied by the Right and Left Fusing Rollers fuse toner on the paper.

15. Paper Exit• Feeds paper out of the copier.


3-26

<<2>> Drive system

A: Scanner Motor (M5) Drives the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage.B: I/C Motor (M1) Drives the I/C Unit.C: Main Motor (M2) Drives the Paper Take-Up Roll, Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roll, Synchronizing Roller, Image Transfer Roller, and Fusing Unit.

1171M024AB

A

B C


3-27

<<3>> Operating sequence

Approx.400 msec.

OFFImage transfer output

Approx.15 min.

OFFDeveloping bias (DC)

A The power cord is plugged into the power outlet.

B The Power Switch is turned ON.

DC voltage outputON

Control panel displayON

Approx.560 msec.

ONFusing Roller Heater Lamp

C The warming-up cycle is completed.

Main MotorON

Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor turns at full speed.

Approx. 20 sec. Predrive stopsOFF

Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor turns at half speed.

Developing bias (DC)ON

Approx.100 msec.

ONI/C Motor

Image transfer output: - voltageON

Approx.700 msec.

ONImage transfer output: + voltage

Approx.400 msec.

ONImage transfer output: - voltage

ONImage transfer output: + voltage

Approx.400 msec.

Approx.400 msec.


T/C ratio is checked for abnormality for approx. 28 sec.

Normal T/C

Abnormal T/C: approx. 31 sec.OFF

I/C Motor

I/C Cooling Fan MotorON

I/C Cooling Fan MotorOFF


3-28

OFF

D The Start key is pressed.

Polygon MotorON

Fusing Cooling Fan MotorON

ONLaserApprox. 6 sec.

ONDeveloping bias (DC)

Approx.100 msec.


ONImage transfer current value for non-printing timing between sheets of paper

Approx.1.1 sec.

ONI/C Motor

Approx.140 msec.

ONMain Motor

The Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor turns at full speed.

The Ozone Fan Motor turns at full speed.

Approx.700 msec.

ONPaper Take-Up Solenoid

E The Synchronizing Roller Sensor is activated.

Approx.110 msec.

OFFPaper Take-Up Solenoid

VSYNC signal ON: approx. 50 msec. later

ONPaper Take-Up Solenoid

Developing bias (AC)

Synchronizing ClutchON

ON

OFFPaper Take-Up Solenoid

Approx.90 msec.

Approx.160 msec.

ONImage transfer current value for printing

F The Synchronizing Roller Sensor is deactivated.

Approx.130 msec.

OFFSynchronizing Clutch

Approx.170 msec.

OFFDeveloping bias (AC)

Approx.320 msec.


I/C MotorApprox.650 msec.

Approx.15 min.

OFFDeveloping bias (DC)

OFFLaser

I/C Cooling Fan MotorON

I/C Cooling Fan MotorOFF


3-29

G The Paper Exit Sensor is deactivated.

Approx.680 msec.

OFFMain Motor

OFFOzone Fan Motor

The Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor turns at half speed.

Polygon MotorOFF

Approx. 10 sec.

OFFFusing Cooling Fan MotorApprox. 20 sec.


3-30

<<4>> Image stabilization system• The following image stabilization controls are provided to ensure stabilized copy image.

Item Purpose Control

PC Drum temperature correction

To compensate for any change in ID due to changing PC Drum temperatures.

The I/C Thermistor is used to detect temperature and, according to the detected tem-perature, Vg/Vb is corrected.

PC Drum deterioration correction

To compensate for degraded sensitivity caused by a deterio-rating PC Drum.

Corrects Vg according to the period of time during which the PC Drum has turned.

1171M028AA

PC Drum Charge Corona

PC Drum Revolution Counter

I/C Thermistor (TH2)

Grid Voltage: (Vg)

Developing Bias: (Vb)

Sleeve/Magnet Roller

CPU

PC Drum


3-31

3-2-3. IMAGING CARTRIDGE (I/C) • This copier employs an Imaging Cartridge (“I/C” in this manual) that contains a PC Drum,

PC Drum Charge Corona, Developing Unit, and Cleaning Unit as one unit.

Toner Supply Port

1171M003AA

ATDC Sensor (E1)


3-32

<<1>> I/C Drive Mechanism• Drive from the I/C Motor is transmitted via a gear train to the PC Drum and Hopper.

<<2>> Identification and Life of I/C• When the Start key is pressed or the Side Cover is opened and closed, the copier deter-

mines whether the I/C is new or one which has been used previously.• The copier monitors the I/C life by storing in memory the period of time during which the

PC Drum has turned. The data is cleared when a new I/C is installed in the copier.

Electrical Component Control Signal ON OFF

M1 PJ16A-3 L H

1171M004AA

PC Drum Drive Gear

Hopper Drive Gear

I/C Motor (M1)


3-33

3-2-4. PC DRUM• The PC Drum used in this copier is the organic photoconductor (OPC) type.

The drum consists of an aluminum base coated with a charge generation layer and a charge transport layer.

Handling PrecautionsProlonged exposure to light can cause the photoconductor surface of the drum to suffer light fatigue, resulting in a loss of photosensitivity. If the I/C is removed from the copier, it should be wrapped in a soft, clean, opaque cloth or other protective covering to prevent exposure to light.

• Grounding of the PC DrumThe PC Drum ground point is located inside and at the front end of the I/C as viewed from the front of the copier and in constant contact with the Drum Holding Shaft. When the I/C is installed in the copier, the Drum Holding Shaft contacts the ground point. This provides for assured grounding of the PC Drum through the ground plate in the rear to the frame of the copier.

PC Drum Cross-Section

Gear

PC Drum Charge Transport Layer

Charge Generation Layer

Aluminum Base

Ground Plate

Shaft

Ground Point PC Drum


3-34

3-2-5. DRUM CHARGING• A scorotron charger system generates a negative DC corona discharge onto the PC

Drum surface. The grid mesh ensures uniform charging.• The grid voltage (Vg) applied to the grid mesh is controlled by the constant voltage cir-

cuitry within the High Voltage Unit. It is varied through image stabilization control.• To restrict ozone production, the copier uses a PC Drum Charge Corona with a comb

electrode.


Drum charging output PJ14A-3A L H

1171M006AB

PC Drum


1171M008AC

Comb ElectrodeGrid Mesh


3-35

3-2-6. ERASE LAMP• Any potential remaining on the surface of the PC Drum is neutralized by both light from

the Erase Lamp and a DC negative voltage applied by the Charge Neutralizing Sheet.• The Charge Neutralizing Sheet applies a negative charge on the surface of the PC Drum

which is positively charged by the Image Transfer Roller. A voltage of -820V is applied to the Charge Neutralizing Sheet from the High Voltage Unit. The Erase Lamp then illumi-nates the surface of the PC Drum to further neutralize it.

• The Erase Lamp consists of ten tungsten lamps.

Electrical Component Control Signal All lamps ON Standby ON

LA1 PJ11A-6A H L

Erase Lamp (LA1)

I/C

PC Drum

PC Drum



Erase Lamp (LA1)

Charge Neutralizing Sheet

Cleaning Blade


3-36

3-2-7. PH SECTION• Based on the image data output from the MFB Board, the LD (laser diode) is activated

and the corresponding light strikes the surface of the PC Drum.

PH Unit

Polygon Motor Drive Board (UN3) Di350f Only


3-37

<<1>> PH Components

1. Polygon Motor Drive Board (UN3) Di250f Only

2. Cylindrical Lens 3. SOS Mirror 4. Collimator Lens

5. Laser Diode Board (PWB-B) 6. SOS Sensor 7. f-θ Lens8. Polygon Motor (M10)


M10 PJ8A-3 L H

1

7

2

3

45 6

8


3-38

<<2>> Laser Emission Timing (SOS Signal)• The signal output from the Master Board triggers the firing of the laser. The laser beam

travels to the Polygon Mirror, lens, and SOS Mirror to eventually hit the SOS Sensor, which generates an SOS signal.

• The SOS signal determines the laser emission timing for each line in the main scanning direction.

A to B: LD activationB to C: LD OFFC to D: Laser beam exposure area according to the image data

Polygon Mirror

f-θ Lens

Polygon Motor (M10)

SOS Mirror

Cylindrical Lens Collimator LensLaser Diode Board (PWB-B)

PC Drum

SOS Sensor

✽ Illust for Di350f

PC Drum

SOS MirrorSOS

Sensor

SOS Signal

ABCD


3-39

3-2-8. DEVELOPING UNIT• The Toner Conveying Rollers mix the toner and carrier particles together and carry the

toner/carrier mixture up to the Sleeve/Magnet Roller. The magnetic brush formed on the surface of the roller allows the toner to come into contact with the charges on the surface of the PC Drum, thus forming an electrostatic latent image.

1. Spent Toner Recycling Coil2. PC Drum Charge Corona3. Spent Toner Feed Roller 24. Cleaning Blade5. Spent Toner Feed Roller 16. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger7. PC Drum Protective Shutter

8. PC Drum9. Sleeve/Magnet Roller10. 1st Toner Conveying Roller11. ATDC Sensor (E1)12. 2nd Toner Conveying Roller13. 3rd Toner Conveying Roller14. Spent Toner Recycling Duct

1 2 3 4 56

7

8

9

10111213

14


3-40

<<1>> Sleeve/Magnet Roller• This copier employs the MT-HG system with a Sleeve/Magnet Roller having the following

magnetic characteristics.• Turning of the sleeve surrounding the Magnet Roller ensures that fresh developer from

the Developer Mixing Chamber is always being conveyed to the point of development with respect to the PC Drum.

N1 : The point of development with the maximum magnetic flux density which ensures that the carrier is firmly held onto the Sleeve Roller when toner is attracted to the latent image.

S1, N2 : The magnetic flux density between these two poles is made low to ensure that the developer remaining on the surface of the Sleeve Roller is smoothly recy-cled. They also prevent developer from scattering.

N3 : The developer brush is formed by this pole and its height is moderated before the brush is regulated by the Doctor Blade.

S2a : This pole ensures that the developer is conveyed to the point of development over the wide interval between N3 and N1.

S2b : If developer is compacted and clogs at the Doctor Blade and, as a result, part of the surface of the Sleeve/Magnet Roller is not covered with developer, the nearby developer around this pole with a weak magnetic force goes to those uncovered areas. This helps prevent white lines from occurring on the copy.

PC Drum


1st Toner Conveying Roller

N1

S2b

S2a

N3N2

S1


3-41

<<2>> Developing Bias• The amount of toner attracted onto the surface of the PC Drum is controlled by varying

the developing bias voltage.• As the PC Drum deteriorates and its photoconductive layer begins to wear, it becomes

more sensitive to the increase in the amount of toner. As a countermeasure against this problem, the developing bias voltage is automatically switched according to the PC Drum temperature, thereby stabilizing the image quality level.


Vb PJ14A-1A L H

PC Drum


Developing Bias Contact Terminal


3-42

<<3>>ATDC Sensor• The ATDC Sensor automatic adjustment is made when a new I/C is installed in the

copier. Toner replenishing control is thereafter controlled as detailed in the following.

[1] ATDC Sensor Automatic Adjustment• The ATDC Sensor is automatically adjusted when a new I/C is loaded in the copier. Dur-

ing this sequence, the copier reads the sensor output value and sets it as the reference. This reference value is stored in memory and used until the I/C reaches its service life.

[2] Toner Replenishing Control• While the I/C Motor is turning, the ATDC Sensor samples T/C and, according to the read-

ings, the copier provides the following controls.

✽ Toner replenishment represents the operation of the Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor.

[3] Toner Empty Control (T/C Recovery Mode)• When the control is passed onto the T/C recovery mode, the Sub Hopper Toner Replen-

ishing Motor is energized to replenish the supply of toner into the Developing Unit and, if T/C is recovered to a level of 14% or higher (2.32V or less) within 150 sec., it resets the toner-empty condition.

T/C Ratio (%) Sampling Data (V) Control Details

More than 19 Less than 1.41 Defective ATDC Sensor

14 to 19 2.32 to 1.41 Toner replenished for 0 msec.

13 to 14 2.50 to 2.32Toner replenished for 54 msec. at intervals of approx. 1 sec.

12 to 13 2.68 to 2.50Toner replenished for 150 msec. at intervals of approx. 1 sec.

10 to 12 3.10 to 2.68Toner replenished for 378 msec. at intervals of approx. 500 msec.

7 to 10 3.92 to 3.10 Passed onto the T/C recovery mode.

Less than 7 More than 3.92 Defective ATDC Sensor


3-43

<<4>> Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism• Toner is replenished from the Sub Hopper to the Developing Unit by turning the Sub Hop-

per Toner Replenishing Motor for the period of time controlled by the ATDC output volt-age (T/C).


M7 PJ11A-8A DC24V L

Sub Hopper

Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor (M7)


3-44

<<5>> Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism• A toner-empty condition in the Sub Hopper is detected by the Magnet Lever that moves

up and down as the Sub Hopper Toner Agitating Lever turns and actuates and deactu-ates the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch.

• While the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper is more than the predetermined amount, the Magnet Lever rests on the toner, keeping the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch deac-tuated even when the Sub Hopper Toner Agitating Lever turns. As toner is consumed, the Magnet Lever lowers to eventually actuate the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch, at which timing the copier detects a toner-empty condition in the Sub Hopper.


S4 PJ11A-7B L H

Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch (S4)

Magnet Lever

Sub Hopper Toner Agitating Lever

Magnet


3-45

<<6>> Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism• When a toner-empty condition in the Sub Hopper is detected, the Main Hopper Toner

Replenishing Motor is energized to turn the Toner Bottle, thereby supplying toner from the Main Hopper to the Sub Hopper.

• The Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor mounted on the coupling ensures that the Toner Supply Port in the Toner Bottle is positioned at the top whenever the bottle is stopped.

• The Toner Bottle Cover Sensor detects whether the Toner Bottle Cover is open. If the cover is open, the copier does not authorize the initiation of a new copy cycle. If the cover is opened during a copy cycle, the copier interrupts the cycle.


M6 PJ11A-4A DC24V L

Electrical Component Control Signal Unblocked Blocked

PC10 PJ11A-2B L H

Toner Bottle

Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor (PC10)

Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor (M6)

Sub Hopper


3-46

<<7>> I/C Cooling Fan Motor• The I/C Cooling Fan Motor prevents the temperature inside the copier (around the entire

I/C) from rising inordinately.

<<8>> Ozone Fan Motor• Ozone produced by the PC Drum Charge Corona is absorbed by the Ozone Filter from

the air being drawn out of the copier by the Ozone Fan Motor.


M9 PJ18A-10 DC24V L


M8 PJ11A-1A DC24V L

I/C

I/C Cooling Fan Motor (M9)

I/COzone Fan Motor (M8)

Ozone Filter


3-47

3-2-9. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION

NOTE• For the details of the 2nd Cassette (500-Sheet Cassette), see the relevant option service

manual.

• This copier employs the Multi-Purpose (MP) Cassette whose capacity is about 250 sheets (about 20 sheets for special paper).

<<1>> MP Cassette Paper Lifting Plate• The Paper Lifting Plate installed in the MP Cassette is spring-loaded to push the paper

stack upward. When the cassette is slid into the copier, the lever located on the bottom of the cassette and used to lock down the Paper Lifting Plate is pushed and unlocked, allowing the Paper Lifting Plate to push the paper stack upward.

Paper Size Detecting Board (PWB-I)

Paper Take-Up Roll

Trailing Edge Stop

Paper Lifting Plate

Lever


3-48

<<2>> MP Cassette-in-Position Detection• When the MP Cassette is slid into the copier, the light blocking plate located in the rear of

the cassette blocks the Cassette Set Sensor and the copier determines that the MP Cas-sette has been slid into position.


PC6 PJ13A-5B H L

Cassette Set Sensor (PC6)

Light Blocking Plate

1167M052AB


3-49

<<3>> MP Cassette Paper Empty Detection• Two sensors are used in this copier: the Paper Empty Sensor detects a paper-empty

condition, while the Paper Near-Empty Sensor detects a paper near-empty condition.

Paper Near-Empty Detection:• A paper near-empty condition is detected as the paper is consumed and the Near-Empty

Lever lowers to eventually block the sensor (L).• At this time, the MP Cassette Paper Empty LED starts blinking.• A paper-empty condition results when about 50 more sheets of paper are used after the

near-empty condition has been detected.

Paper Empty Detection:• A paper-empty condition is detected as the paper is consumed and the Empty Lever low-

ers to eventually block the sensor (L).• At this time, the MP Cassette Paper Empty LED lights up steadily.


PC4 PJ14A-13A H L

PC5 PJ13A-2B H L

Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC4)

Near-Empty Lever

Paper Lifting Lever

Paper Empty Sensor (PC5)

Empty Lever


3-50

<<4>> MP Cassette Paper Size Detection• The Paper Size Detecting Board detects the length of the paper (FD).• A lever is connected to the Trailing Edge Stop of the cassette and, as the stop is slid to

the size of the paper loaded in the cassette, the lever is moved to turn ON and OFF the size detecting switches mounted on the copier side.

• The control panel settings are necessary for any paper size other than the following.

Paper Size Detecting Switches (PWB-I)Paper Size

1 2 3 4

ON OFF OFF OFF A3L, 11”×17”L

OFF OFF OFF OFF B4L, 8-1/2”×14”L

OFF ON ON ON A4L

ON ON ON ON B5L, 8-1/2”×11”L

ON ON OFF OFF A4C/A5L

ON OFF OFF ON B5C

OFF ON OFF OFF A5C

ON ON ON OFF 8-1/2”×11”C


PWB-I (1) PJ14A-1B L H




Trailing Edge Stop

Paper Size Detecting Board (PWB-I)

1 2 3 4


3-51

<<5>> Paper Take-Up Mechanism• Drive from the Main Motor is transmitted to the Paper Take-Up Clutch (spring clutch) and,

by energizing the Paper Take-Up Solenoid, the Paper Take-Up Roll is turned.• The paper separating mechanism employs a Paper Separator Pad.

<<6>> Manual Bypass Tray[1] Construction of the Manual Bypass Tray• Drive from the Main Motor is transmitted to the Manual Paper Feed Take-Up Clutch and,

by energizing this clutch, the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roll is turned.


M2 PJ16A-1 L H

SL1 PJ13A-13B L H

CL3 PJ4A-9A L H

Main Motor (M2)

Paper Take-Up Roll

Paper Take-Up Clutch

Paper Take-Up Solenoid (SL1)

Paper Separator Pad

Main Motor (M2)

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roll

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC8)

Manual Bypass Tray

Manual Paper Feed Take-Up Clutch (CL3)


3-52

[2] Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Detection• The Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor detects a sheet of paper that is fed via the Man-

ual Bypass Tray.• The size and type of the paper for manual feed are set on the control panel.

<<7>> Paper Take-Up Retry Mechanism• To minimize the occurrence of a paper misfeed due to a slippery Paper Take-Up Roll, the

Paper Take-Up Solenoid is energized a second time if a sheet of paper fails to reach the Synchronizing Roller Sensor within a given period of time after the solenoid has been energized first.

• A paper take-up misfeed results if the sheet of paper does not reach the Synchronizing Roller Sensor even after two paper take-up sequences.


PC8 PJ4A-7B H L

<Paper Present: Unblocked (H)>

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC8)

<Paper Not Present: Blocked (L)>


3-53

3-2-10. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS• The Synchronizing Rollers of this copier are located inside the Right Door. They are eas-

ily accessible for misfeed clearing by just opening the Right Door.

<<1>> Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism/Control• The Synchronizing Rollers are turned by the drive from the Main Motor transmitted to the

Synchronizing Clutch.• The rollers are started when the Synchronizing Clutch is deenergized.


M2 PJ16A-1 L H

CL1 PJ13A-2A L H

Synchronizing Roller

Main Motor (M2)Synchronizing Clutch (CL1)

Right Synchronizing Roller

Left Synchronizing Roller


3-54

<<2>> Paper Dust Remove• The Paper Dust Remover is installed so that it makes contact with the Left Synchronizing

Roller. It is intended for preventing paper dust from sticking to the surface of the PC Drum.

• As the roller turns in contact with the Paper Dust Remover, triboelectric charging occurs, which attracts paper dust from the paper that passes between the two rollers and the dust is, in turn, transferred onto the Paper Dust Remover.

Paper Dust Remover

Synchronizing Roller

Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC2)


3-55

3-2-11. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATIONImage Transfer• This copier employs an Image Transfer Roller to transfer the image to the paper. The

High Voltage Unit applies an image transfer current to this roller. To ensure that image transfer efficiency is stabilized, the image transfer current is automatically varied accord-ing to the paper size, paper type, and the B/W ratio of the original.

• To prevent toner from sticking to the Image Transfer Roller, an image transfer voltage of -975V is applied to the roller for cleaning.

Paper Separation• To neutralize any charge left on the paper, to which the image has been transferred, the

High Voltage Unit applies a voltage of -1200V via a ground plate to the Charge Neutraliz-ing Plate.


Image transfer output PJ14A-2A L H

PC Drum

Ground Plate

Charge Neutralizing Plate

Image Transfer Roller


3-56

3-2-12. PC DRUM PAPER SEPARATOR FINGERS• The three PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers fitted to the I/C mechanically separate

paper from the surface of the PC Drum to ensure good and positive paper separation.

PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers

PC Drum Protective Shutter

PC Drum

8.5cm

Paper Path Center

8.5cm


3-57

3-2-13. PC DRUM CLEANING• This copier employs a spent toner recycling mechanism. The Cleaning Blade which is

held pressed against the surface of the PC Drum scrapes residual toner off the surface. The waste toner is conveyed by Spent Toner Feed Roller 1 and 2 to the Spent Toner Recycling Duct and eventually back to the Developer Mixing Chamber.

Cleaning Blade

PC Drum

Toner Conveying Rollers

Recycling Duct

Spent Toner Feed Roller 1

Spent Toner Feed Roller 2

Spent Toner Recycling Coil


3-58

3-2-14. FUSING UNIT• The paper, to which the developed image is yet to be fixed, is fed through heated Left and

Right Fusing Rollers. The heat and pressure applied at this time fixes the image perma-nently to the paper.

1. Paper Exit Roller2. Fusing Misfeed Clearing Lever3. Paper Exit Sensor (PC3)4. Pressure Spring5. Right Fusing Roller

6. Fusing Roller Heater Lamp (H1)7. Left Fusing Roller8. Fusing Roller Thermostat (TS1)9. Fusing Paper Separator Finger

1 2

3

4

567

8

9


3-59

<<1>> Drive Mechanism• Drive from the Main Motor is transmitted via a gear train to the Right Fusing Roller.

<<2>> Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism• To ensure that there is a certain width of area of contact between the Left and Right Fus-

ing Rollers, pressure springs are installed.• The rollers are held pressed against each other at all times and they are released only

when servicing the copier or replacing parts.• The pressure between the two rollers is approx. Di350f: 17 kg, Di250f: 12kg• The rollers can be released by moving the Fusing Misfeed Clearing Lever in the direction

of the arrow.


M2 PJ16A-1 L H

Right Fusing Roller

Paper Exit Roller

Main Motor (M2)

Fusing Misfeed Clearing Lever

Pressure Spring


3-60

<<3>> Fusing Temperature Control• The Fusing Roller Heater Lamp inside the Left Fusing Roller provides the following tem-

perature control.

<Temperature Control>• The Fusing Roller Thermistor detects the surface temperature of the Left Fusing Roller.

It provides an analog voltage input to the Master Board allowing the copier to control the fusing temperature.


H1 PJ16A-8 L H

Electrical Component Control Signal Low Temp. ↔ High Temp.

TH1 PJ16A-5 Analog input

200

185

Warm-Up Completed (200°C)

Approx.1 min.

Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

- Temperature Control During Standby State -

Approx.5 min.

200

190

- Temperature Control During a Copy Cycle -

210

175

Special paper

Plain paper (1-sided)

TransparenciesPlain paper (2-sided)180

Approx.1 min.

Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

Approx.5 min.


3-61

<Temperature Control by Mode>• The mode that is initiated following the completion of a warm-up cycle varies as detailed

below depending on the machine condition and the Fusing Roller temperature at the restart of temperature control.

<<4>> CPM Control• As a measure to prevent the temperature on the edges of the Fusing Rollers (over which

no part of paper passes) from rising in a multi-copy cycle using small size paper (width of 250 mm or less), the paper feed interval is made greater.

<Control>• If a sheet of small size paper is taken up and fed in during mode 1, control is switched to

mode 2.• The number of sheets of small size paper that are fed through is counted.

<Timing>• The counter reaches 30.• The plain/special paper counter reaches N specified below:

If the control is in mode 1 or mode 2 when the counter starts counting, N = 30.If the control is in mode 3 when the counter starts counting, N = 100.

<Resetting>• If a period of 2 min. or more elapses, during which the counter does not count up after

the counter has started counting, the counter is cleared resetting the CPM control.

Machine ConditionFusing Roller Temperature

Less than 100°C 100°C or higher

Power is turned ON.

Mode 1

Mode 2

Temperature control is interrupted during warm-up.

Mode 1Temperature control is interrupted during mode 1.

Temperature control is interrupted during mode 2.

Mode 2Temperature control is interrupted during mode 3.


3-62

3-2-15. PAPER EXIT UNIT• The Paper Exit Roller feeds the paper, to which the developed image has been fixed, out

of the copier. The Charge Neutralizing Brush touches the surface of the sheet of paper being fed out of the Fusing Unit to neutralize any static charge left on it. This effectively prevents two sheets of paper fed out of the copier from sticking to each other due to static charge.

Charge Neutralizing Brush

Paper Exit Roller


3-63

3-2-16. FUSING COOLING FAN MOTOR• The Fusing Cooling Fan Motor located in the Right Door prevents the temperature of the

Fusing Unit Cover and the area above the I/C from rising inordinately. The motor also draws the paper after it has been separated from the PC Drum onto the transport guide to ensure that it is stably and smoothly fed into the Fusing Unit.

ElectricalComponent

ControlSignal

During Copy Cycle In Standby During Warm-Up

Full speed Half speed Stop

M3 PJ13A-3A Pulse output L

Fusing Unit

Fusing Cooling Fan Motor (M3)

I/C


3-64

3-2-17. POWER UNIT COOLING FAN MOTOR• The Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor prevents the temperature at the Power Supply Unit

and the Polygon Motor in the PH from rising inordinately.

ElectricalComponent

ControlSignal

While Main Motor is Turning In Standby

Full speed Half speed

M4 PJ6A-2 DC24V DC10V

1171M034AA

Power Unit Cooling Fan Motor (M4)

Master Board (PWB-A)

Power Supply Unit 1 (PU1)


3-65

3-3. SYSTEM CONTROL3-3-1. COMMUNICATION CONTROL

Communication control of this system follows ITU-T (previously known as CCITT) recom-mended T.30 binary procedure (G3/ECM; error collection mode).Communication mode will be selected automatically with the type of phone line (PSTN) and the ID signal from a remote terminal.

V3.4 Mode Communication Procedure

CNC CM

JMANS mn

CI B

A AA

B S PP TRN ALT

ALT

TS1 "1"DCS

NSF CS1 CFRDIS

P ph

P ph

M ph

M ph

M ph

M ph

S E

E

Flags

Flags

Flags

Flags

L1 L2BINF0 oc

INF0 oa

INF0 oh

2

1

3 4 5 6

Modemparameter sequence System parameter sequence

Network Interaction Line Probing T.30 Fax HandshakingPrimary Channel

Equalizer TrainingModem Parameter

Exchange Resync.

Primary Channel

Call Terminal

AnswerTerminal

75 5ms 70 5ms70 5ms

75 5ms

70 5ms

Pre-control

Source Terminal

Recipient Terminal

7-1

Image Data Image DataSh Sh ALT E PPS-MPS

Flags

Flags Flags

"1"

Sh Sh ALT MCFE

S B1PPS

Between pages

Source Terminal

Recipient Terminal

7-2

Image Data

Line Disconnect

Line DisconnectSh Sh ALT DCNE PPS-

EOPFlags

Flags Flags

"1"

Sh Sh ALT MCFE

Post-control


3-66

V3.4 mode does not always select the transmission speed of 36.6Kbit/s. An optimal trans-mission speed will be selected according to the sequences described in the item 3 and 4 below in order to establish communication.• Transmission speed : 36.6 to 2.4 Kbit/s (by 2.4K step)• Symbol rate : 6 rates (5 rates are supported)

3429, 3200, 3000, 2800, (2743), 2400 symbol/s[1] CNG• Calling tone

A monotone signal of 1100 Hz, transmitted with the period of 0.5 sec ON and 3 sec OFF.

[2] V.8• Modem ID sequence

A 300 bit/sec. signal.• This sequence exchanges information on function types and modulation methods with a

remote terminal. The following sequences will be proceeded with the modulation method that both terminals have among the exchanged system information.

[3] Line probing• Sequence to measure line characteristics.

This sequence measures the line characteristics by exchanging signals between two modems.The symbol rate will be determined by this sequence. This sequence will be one of basis for data to determine the transmission sequence.

[4] TRN• Equalizer training sequence• This sequence corresponds to the conventional procedure TCF. Sending a signal with

the fastest transmission speed specified by the remote terminal sets the equalizer of the modem of the receiver terminal.

[5] Control channel• Sequence to determine modem parameters and system parameters.• A signal of 1200 bit/sec.• It corresponds to the conventional procedure of phase B.(1) A sequence for determining modem parameters• It determines the transmission speed of the primary channel by the results of the line

probing sequence and TRN (equalizer training sequence).(2) Sequence to determine system parameters• The same sequence as the conventional phase B procedure.

[6] Primary channel• Sequence for transmitting image data.• It corresponds to the conventional phase C procedure.

[7] Control channel• It corresponds to the conventional phase D procedure. A signal of 1200 bit/s. (1) Sequences between pages when there are multiple pages.(2) Page termination sequence.


3-67

<<1>> Communication Mode[1] PriorityThis system has two communication modes: ECM and G3. Communication will be estab-lished with an appropriate mode determined by the capability of the remote terminal. The priority of the communication modes is as follows:

Note:G4/UHS/G2/MF modes are unavailable to the system.

[2] Communication modes of ECM/G3An optimal mode will be selected according to the capabilities of both terminals:

V.17:14000bps starting modeV.29: 9600bps starting mode

<<2>> Encoding MethodThere are 4 encoding methods available to this system: JBIG, MMR, MR, MH. An optimal method will be selected according to the capabilities and image quality of both terminals.

Note:UMH/UMR are unavailable to the system.

PriorityCommunication

modeRemark

1st ECMFollowed ITU-T (Previously CCITT) recommendation (Can communicate with other company’s system). Error correction by procedure signals.

2nd G3Followed ITU-T (Previously CCITT) recommendation (Can communicate with other company’s system)

RX (Receiver)

V.34/ECM V.17/ECM V.17/G3 V.29/ECM V.29/G3

V.34/ECM V.34/ECM V.17/ECM V.17/G3 V.29/ECM V.29/G3

TX V.17/ECM V.17/ECM V.17/ECM V.17/G3 V.29/ECM V.29/G3

(Sender) V.17/G3 V.17/G3 V.17/G3 V.17/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3

V.29/ECM V.29/ECM V.29/ECM V.29/G3 V.29/ECM V.29/G3

V.29/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3 V.29/G3

Encoding method Binary priority Remark

JBIG 1st ECM

MMR 2nd ECM

MR 3rd

MH 4th


3-68

3-3-2. SELECTING PAPER<<1>> Printing AreaThe figure below shows the printable area on the paper.

The minimum margins are 4 mm*.* The minimum margins can be adjusted with Edge erase adjustment.

<<2>> Printing Mode There are 2 printing modes available to this system. The soft switch (MODE 007) toggles these modes. They are valid only for printing received documents.[1] Automatic reduction modeIf the length of a received document exceeds the printable area, this mode cuts off the doc-ument within the cutting length specified with the soft switch (MODE 007). If the excess length is longer than the specified cutting off length, the document will be reduced within the upper limit of reducing the size specified with the soft switch (MODE 007).

[2] Cut off modeIf the length of a received document exceeds the printable area, this mode cuts off the doc-ument within the cutting length specified with the soft switch (MODE 007). (No reduction.)

4mm

4mm

4mm 4mm


3-69

<<3>> Paper Selection Mode (facsimile)This system has the following modes for selecting paper. The soft switch (MODE 008) tog-gles these modes. They are valid only for printing received documents.

[1] Standard modeThis mode selects paper to avoid document splitting as much as possible.Example Available sizes of paper : Letter Lengthwise and 11” X 17” Lengthwise Size of received document : 11” X 17” Lengthwise Printing mode : Automatic reduction (Upper reduction limit of 60%) In this case, the system will use the 11” X 17” paper without reduction. If the 11” X 17” paper has run out, the Letter Lengthwise paper will be used with reduction.

[2] Width preference modeThis mode selects paper whose width is the same as or smaller than a received document.(Example) Available sizes of print paper : Letter Lengthwise and 11” X 17” Lengthwise Size of received document : Letter Lengthwise Printing mode : Automatic reduction (Upper reduction limit of 60%) In this case, the system will use the Letter paper with reduction. If the Letter paper has run out, the printing job will be halted and wait for new paper.

[3] Fixed width mode This mode selects paper whose width is the same as a received document.(Example) Available sizes of paper : Letter Lengthwise and 11” X 17” Lengthwise Size of received document : 11” X 17” Lengthwise Printing mode : Automatic reduction (Upper reduction limit of 60%) In this case, the system will use the Letter paper with reduction. If the Letter paper has run out, the printing job will be halted and wait for new paper.

Note:The standard and the preference modes have 4 different submodes. Each of them has pri-orities for selection. (Users can select only submode1.)

Submode 1 :Selecting a paper whose width is the same as a received document with-out reduction.

Submode 2 :Selecting a paper whose width is the same as a received document with minimum margins (minimum non printing area).

Submode 3 :Selecting a paper to print out without reduction. (The width will not be considered.)

Sub mode 4 : Selecting a paper with minimum nonprinting area. (The width will not be considered.)


3-70

The following table summarizes the effective print length for paper which this system can use : L: Lengthwise, C: Crosswise ( Unit: mm )

Note 1: Available only with a multi-purpose tray or manual feeding (Copy and PC print).

Print papersize

Print paper size Effective print size

RemarkSub scanning length

Main scanning length

Sub scanning length

Main scanning length

Letter L 215.9 279.4 207.4 271.4

Letter C 279.4 215.9 271.4 207.9

Legal L 215.9 355.6 207.9 347.6

Ledger L(11” x 17”)

279.4 431.8 271.4 423.8

INVOICE L 139.7 215.9 131.7 207.9 Note 1

INVOICE C 215.9 139.7 207.9 131.7 Note 1


Chapter 4

REPORTS




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


4-1

4-1. LIST OF REPORTS: available : not available

Note:• Setting up the soft switch (MODE 020 Bit 3) is necessary to include communication error

codes in a report.• Setting up the soft switch (MODE 020 Bit 7) is necessary to include the number of pages

in a report.• The soft switch (MODE 023 Bit 3) can specify a transmission report with or without the

image merge function.• Setting up the soft switch (MODE 020 Bit 5) is necessary to include the transmission

speed in an Activity Report (TX/RX).

Report nameAuto print

Manual print

Reference

Transmission TRANSMISSION REPORT Operator’s Manual

management SERIAL BROADCAST REPORT Operator’s Manual

TRANSMISSION REPORT (incompleted)

Operator’s Manual

Statistical ACTIVITY REPORT (TX) 4-2-1

management ACTIVITY REPORT (RX) 4-2-2

USER ACCOUNT REPORT Operator’s Manual

Memory management

MEMORY CLEAR REPORT Operator’s Manual

ONE-TOUCH DIAL # LIST Operator’s Manual

List ABBR. DIAL # LIST Operator’s Manual

FAX PROGRAM LIST Operator’s Manual

BULLETIN BOARD LIST Operator’s Manual

RELAY GROUP LIST Operator’s Manual

USER LIST Operator’s Manual

USER MANEGEMENT LIST Operator’s Manual

SETTING LIST Operator’s Manual

Relay management

RELAY REPORT (TX) Operator’s Manual

G3 PROTOCOL TRACE 4-2-3

Maintenance MEMORY DUMP 4-2-4

FILE DUMP 4-2-4

SERVICE CALL REPORT (TX) 4-2-5


4-2

4-2. HOW TO READ DATA OF REPORTS4-2-1. ACTIVITY REPORT (TX)

Note:• Printing reports:

With automatic LOGOUT: All information on 50 communication activities will be printed.With manual printing : All information on the last 50 communication activities (if there are over 50 activities).

• Communication error codes will be listed only when requested to print (MODE 020 Bit 3).• “Transmission speed” on the right side requires the soft switch setting (MODE 020 Bit 5).

5500000-0005500000-0025500000-0035500000-0045512345-0055512345-006

DOCUMENT# TIME SENT DURATION DESTINATION MODE PAGE RESULT USER NAME

14:04, 5/2714:12, 5/2714:23, 5/2714:30, 5/2716:54, 5/2717:01, 5/27

ECM

ECMECM

203100

OKINTERROKOKINTERRINTERR

312 24312312 24 24

216421642164216411

22"59"29"15" 5" 8"

TOTAL

Printing a communication mode

Printing Communication results- Condition -

2'18" 6 sheets

(FRI) MAY 28 1999 15:16

OKBUSYNO ANSINTERRPT DELF MEM.NG

000000:

FFFFFFNG

Communication error codes

For disabled displayof error code(Same expression as broadcasting)

Printing the number of transmitted pages12

I.Pages for Tx = pages of completed

II.Pages for Tx = pages of completed Tx or without parentheses by soft switch

Pages of completed Tx

: 1:10:

999 999 or more

0:

10:

100:

999

Pages of completed Tx

Transmisson speed(See Note)

ACTIVITY REPORT ( TX )

GoodBusyNo responseInteruptionIncomplete broadcastingMemory overflowNo broadcasting at all

Orher than the above

- Condition -

Pages fo Tx

1:10:

999 999 or more

- Condition -

For using multiport port 1For using multiport port 2For using Single port

RY BRBR .CBRRY TXECM.BG3 .B .BECM.CG3 .C .C .NECM.PG3 .P .PECMG3

Relay broadcast TxConfidential broadcast TxBroadcast Tx (including broadcast relay Tx)Relay Tx Bach Tx (ECM)Bach Tx (G3)Bach Tx (with unspecified communication mode)Confidential Tx (ECM)Confidential Tx (G3)Confidential Tx (with unspecified communication mode)Bulletin board (with unspecified communication mode)Polling Tx (ECM)Polling Tx (G3)Polling Tx (with unspecified communication mode)ECM TxG3 TxOther than the above

999 or more

- Condition - 336 33.6K : 144 14.4K : 24 2.4K


4-3

4-2-2. ACTIVITY REPORT (RX)

Notes:• Printing reports:

With automatic LOGOUT: All information on 50 communication activities will be printed.With manual printing : All information on the last 50 communication activities (if there are over 50 activities).

• Communication error codes will be listed only when requested to print (MODE 020 Bit 3).• “Transmission speed” on the right side requires the soft switch setting (MODE 020 Bit 5).

0000000-0000000000-0010000000-0025534567-0025534567-0035534567-0045534567-0055534567-0065534567-007

DOCUMENT# TIME RCVED DURATION DESTINATION MODE PAGE RESULT USER NAME

14:06, 5/2714:06, 5/2714:07, 5/2714:07, 5/2714:09, 5/2714:12, 5/2714:17, 5/2714:27, 5/2714:28, 5/27

ECMECMECMECMECMECM

000114111

NGNGINTERROKOKOKOKOKOK

24 24 24144144312288312144

16"15"13"23"20"20"11"11"23"

TOTAL

Printing a communication mode

Printing Communication results- Condition -

2'32" 9 sheets

(FRI) MAY 28 1999 15:16

OKBUSYNO ANSINTERRF MEM.B. PRT.NG

000000:

FFFFFFNG

Communication error codes

For disabled displayof error code(Same expression as broadcasting)

Printing the number of printed pages12

I.Received pages = Printed pages

II.Received pages = Printed pages or without parentheses by soft switch

Printed pages

: 1:10:

999 999 or more

0:

10:

100:

999

Printed pages

Transmisson speed(See Note)

ACTIVITY REPORT ( RX )

GoodBusyNo responseInteruptionMemory overflowBefore completing printingNo broadcasting at all

Orher than the above

- Condition -

Received pages

1:10:

999 999 or more

- Condition -

For using multiport port1For using multiport port2For using Single port

ECM.CG3 .C .C

ECM.PG3 .P .PECM.RG3 .R .RECMG3

Confidential broadcast Rx (ECM)Confidential broadcast Rx (G3)Confidential Rx (with unspecified communication mode)Polling Rx (ECM)Polling Rx (G3)Polling Rx (with unspecified communication mode)Relay Rx (ECM)Relay Rx (G3)Relay Rx (with unspecified communication mode)ECM RxG3 RxOther than the above

999 or more

Example:"Printed pages = 2 when receivingan A4 document and printing on 2sheets of A5 paper.

1167M135AA

- Condition - 336 33.6K : 144 14.4K : 24 2.4K


4-4

4-2-3. G3 PROTOCOL TRACEProtocol trace:Each communication processes information on a protocol trace. If you wish to print it, go to the maintenance mode to press <Utility>. Then touch [Report 1] to specify [Protocol Trace].

Note:• Specify FCF names with capital letters for signals at 300 bps, otherwise use small letters.• If the information of a single frame is longer than a single line, the next line will also be

used. This will be repeated as necessary.• If there is no FCF name corresponds to the data in the FCF field, "?" will be displayed in

the FCF name field.• If the information cannot be printed in a single sheet of a specified paper, the excess

information will be printed on the next paper.

4-2-4. MEMORY DUMP & FILE DUMPMemory dump and file dump have the same format.

27F51E5E NSF FF 13 22 00 00 49 0C D2

27F51F08 NSS FF 03 20 00 00 49 40 00 00 00 00 C8 C8 .... 34 7D 02 00 DA 80 7E 04 86 10 89 20 19 50 7C 20 .... 00 26 00

Data of each commandCommand name

00080000 3653B850348ED88D365B01E878005B07 6C.P4...6.......

00080020 54A3B700F6443401740B804C34808064 T....D4....L4...

00000000 : FFFFFFFF

Prints ASCII code of the contentsPrints contents Prints physical address


4-5

4-2-5. SERVICE CALL REPORT

You can output the service call report to your terminal manually. The service call report will be transmitted to the Service Center automatically with a specified alarm.When this report is transmitted, it always includes “TSI” (even if this function is disabled).

[1] Report contentsThis report has the reason for transmission and the date of transmission.Contents:• # OF PRINT • PRT MALFUNCTION• PRT OPTION MALFUNCTION• SCANNER OPTION MALFUNCTION• TONER/DRUM A NEAR LIFE (Status A)• TONER/DRUM A LIFE (Status B)• TONER/DRUM B NEAR LIFE (Status C)• TONER/DRUM B LIFE (Status D)• DATE CALLED

REPORT CONTENTS :DATE CALLED :USER INFO TEL1

ISDNTEL2

CALL CONDITION TRANS.METHED: DATA FAX DEST. # : INFO. CALL : # OF PRINT : OFF PRT MALFUNCTION : ON PRT OPTION :OFF SCANNER MALFUNCTION : ON NO TONER NOTICE : ON TONER EMOTY : ON DRUM LIFE :ON TONER / DRUM A NEAR LIFE TONER / DRUM A LIFE : ON TONER / DRUM B NEAR LIFE : ON TONER / DRUM B LIFE : ON

SERIAL # : ABCDE12345

ROM REV

IDCALL# : G3-1 :

SERVICE CALL REPORT


4-6

[2] User and terminal informationThis report has various information on users and terminals of your facsimile system.

(1) Phone number The following information will be printed as phone number:Contents:• ID• USER INFO TEL1• USER INFO TEL2

(2) The dialing condition of transmitting the service call reportContents:• TRANS. METHED (DATA/REPORT)• CALL #• # OF PRINT• PRT MALFUNCTION• PRT OPTION MALFUNCTION• SCANNER OPTION MALFUNCTION• NO TONER NOTICE• TONER EMPTY• DRUM LIFE• TONER/DRUM A NEAR LIFE (Status A)• TONER/DRUM A LIFE (Status B)• TONER/DRUM B NEAR LIFE (Status C)• TONER/DRUM B LIFE (Status D)

(3) SERIAL #Contents:• SERIAL #

(4) ROM REVContents:• MAIN (MSC)• PRINTER• ADFR• LCC• FINISHER

(5) INSTALL DATEContents:• INSTALL DATE

(6) MAINTENANCE DATEContents:• MAINTENANCE DATE


4-7

(7) MACHINE CONFIGURATIONContents:• F MEM (7.6/8.0/15.6/23.6/47.6/55.6MB)• R MEM (8.3/0.0MB)• WORK MEMORY (4.0/16.0MB)• FAX (ON/OFF)• PORT (SINGLE/MULTI)• LINE (PSTN1 or PSTN1+PSTN2)• PC PRINT• ADF (NONE/ADF/ADFR)• TX MARKER (ON/OFF)• BS/IR (ON/OFF)• SCAN SPEED (25/35ppm)• SCAN QUALITY (400/600dpi)• PRINT SPEED (18/25ppm)• I/C TYPE (T-1,T-2,T-3,T-4)• 2 SIDED (ON/OFF)• JOB TRAY (ON/OFF)• SHIFT TRAY (ON/OFF)• FINISHER (ON/OFF)• MAIL FINISHER (ON/OFF)• TTL COUNT (ON/OFF)• SIZE SSR OPT (ON/OFF)• CASSETTE 1 TO 5

(8) VARIOUS SETTINGSContents:• AUTO PAPER MODE (INCH/METRIC)• FLS • COPY MODE (1-SIDED/2-SIDED OR 2-SIDED ONLY)• ANTI-DEW (SCAN or SCAN & DRUM or NO FUNCTION) • LTD COPY (OFF/ON)• PAPER SIZE INPUT (2ND Cassette)• PAPER SIZE INPUT (3RD Cassette)• PAPER SIZE INPUT (4TH Cassette)• PAPER SIZE INPUT (5TH Cassette)• ERASURE WIDTH• ZOOM (LGL LTR)• ZOOM (11 x 15 LTR)• ZOOM (11 x 17 LTR)• ZOOM (x 0.5)• ZOOM (LGL 11 x 17)• ZOOM (LTR 11 x 17)

• ZOOM (51/2 x 81/2 LGL)• ZOOM (x 2.0)• ZOOM (FULL SIZE)• TOTAL COUNTER• SIZE COUNTER• COPY KIT COUNTER• PLUG-IN COUNTER• KEY COUNTER• VENDER MODE


4-8

[3] Counter information(1)TOTAL COUNTER Service call report has 9 various counter information for TOTAL COUNTER.(2)PAPER COUNTER Service call report has 17 various counter information for PAPER COUNTER.(3)JAM COUNTER Service call report has 30 various counter information for JAM COUNTER.(4) PM COUNTER Service call report has 24 various counter information for PM COUNTER.(5) TROUBLE COUNTER Service call report has 36 various counter information for TROUBLE COUNTER.

[4] Adjustment information(1) For scanner • NADF MAIN REG• NADF SUB REG• NADF M-SCAN % (COPY)• NADF S-SCAN % (COPY)• NADF M-SCAN % (FAX)• NADF S-SCAN % (FAX)• BK-S M-SCAN REG• BK-S S-SCAN REG• BK-S M-SCAN % (COPY)• BK-S S-SCAN % (COPY)• BK-S M-SCAN (FAX)• BK-S S-SCAN (FAX)• ADFR DOC. STOP (1-SIDED)• ADFR DOC. STOP (2-SIDED)• ADFR DOC. STOP (SINGLE FD)• ADFR REGISTRATION LOOPNote: NADF corresponds to ADF in Minolta.

(2) For printer (Printer corresponds to Copier in Minolta.)• REGIST. (CD) 1ST• REGIST. (CD) 2ND• REGIST. (CD) 3RD• REGIST. (CD) 4TH• REGIST. (CD) 5TH• REGIST. (CD) 2-SIDED• REGIST. (FD)• LOOP ADJ. (1ST)• LOOP ADJ. (OTHERS)• LOOP ADJ. (2-SIDED & MAN)• EDGE ERASE LEAD• EDGE ERASE TRAIL• EDGE ERASE (R/L)• ID• ATDC SENSOR GAIN• VG


4-9

[5] Error LOG information(1) History of misfeeds This report contains and prints the last 10 misfeed incidents. When the number of incidents exceeds 10, the oldest one will be deleted.Misfeed information:• Date and time of misfeeds• Location of jams (scanner or copier)

(2) History of system malfunctions This report contains and prints the last 10 incidents. When the number of incidents exceeds 10, the oldest one will be deleted.Information on malfunction:• Date and time of malfunctions• Malfunction codes

(3) History of communication errors This report contains and prints the last 10 incidents. When the number of incidents exceeds 10, the oldest one will be deleted.Information on communication error:• Date and time of communication errors• Communication error codes

[6] Information on soft switchesMain productThis report has information on the soft switches of the main product (512 byte). The default setting will also be printed for the switch that was set up differently.




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


Chapter 5

SETUP FOR FAX OPTION




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


5-1

5-1. CONNECT THE PHONE CABLES[1] Connect cables from the phone line and other devices with the system as shown below.

[2] Connect the power source cable.

This facsimile uses the rated voltage of 120 10V, 50/60Hz.The power source line must be rated more than 11A.

No. Name Connect to Remark

1 LINE Phone line Standard

2 TEL Extra telephone set Standard

3 OPTION PC print option Option

4 LINE(PORT2) Phone line (PORT2) Option

OPTION

TEL LINEPORT1

LINEPORT2

412 3

External Port Plate


5-2

5-2. OPTIONAL PRODUCTS SETUP5-2-1. OPTIONAL MEMORY BOARD[1] Precaution (1) Keep all packing materials out of the reach of children.(2) Before starting the installation work, check to see that the storage memory has been cleared to 0%. If the amount of memory used is not 0%, get the customer's approval to output or erase the contents of the memory. After confirming that the memory has been cleared to 0%, set the POWER SOURCE SW to OFF.(3) Disconnect the NiCd battery cable from CN6 provided on the MFB board before mounting the add-on memory. If you forget to disconnect the cable, damage to the memory IC could result.

[2] Installation

NOTE:Disconnect the NiCd battery cable from the provided on the MFB board to stop the supply of the power from the NiCd battery to the add-on memory.

(1) Remove 2 screws and Upper Cover.

(2) Remove 4 screws and MFB Box Cover.

(3) Disconnect the NiCd battery cable.


5-3

(4) Insert an add-on memory card into its appropriate slot.

Note:• Do not touch the electric connection edge of the memory board with bare hands. Make

sure of the orientation of the board for proper insertion. The memory board has a notch. Insert it until you hear a click sound.

• See Section 8-3-5 "System Setup << 3 >> System Configuration."

(5) Reconnect the NiCd battery cable to CN6 provided on the MFB board as before.

Note:If you forget to reconnect the battery cable, no backup will be made in the event of a power failure. Be sure to reconnect the battery cable.

(6) Reattach the Upper Cover and MFB Box Cover.

[3] INSPECTION PROCEDURES (1) Make sure the installation has been completed properly.

(2) Make sure that the volume of memory has increased. 1) Select SERVICE MODE 2) Touch [System Input] - [Configure] 3) Check volume of memory

12

1

2

8MB Memory (ROT08)

16MB Memory (ROT16)

32MB Memory (TMEM)

EMU Memory


5-4

5-2-2. TX (TRANSMISSION) MARKER[1] Precaution• See Section 5-2-1 [1] Precaution

[2] Installation(1) Remove 2 screws from the backside of the ADF. (2) Open the Take-Up Cover of the Document Loading Tray to remove a screw.(3) Open the ADF to remove a screw from the right corner.(4) Remove 2 fixtures.(5) Detach the ADF cover (R).

12ADF Rear Cover

3

4

5

Take-Up Cover

Document Loading Tray

(6) Remove 4 screws and the cushion from the back side of the ADF cover.

(7) Remove the bracket (G).


5-5

(8) Attach the TX Marker to the backside of the scanner unit.

NOTE:The shaft of the TX Marker should not come out.

(9) Feed the cables of the TX Marker into the side of the scanner unit where the motor is located.

(12) ReassemblingReassemble the unit in the reverse direction of the disassembling steps of this section.

Note:• Make sure that the cables are not caught by the unit while reassembling.• Fix screws to make the intervals between adjacent covers even.

[3] Setup/InspectionSetup(1) Go to the initial setup mode and set the system model "With Marker." (2) Set the items for TX Marker under "Mode 000" of the soft switch.

InspectionPress <FAX> and select [Setup 1] from [FAX Menu] to set how to operate TX Marker.Carry out a test transmission to confirm the operation of the TX Marker.

8

9

CN7

(10) Connect the cables of the TX Marker to the connector of the ACR (CN-7) (MARKER)

(11) Lead the ink stamp into the TX Marker.


5-6

5-2-3. G3 MULTI-PORT [1] Precaution• See Section 5-2-1 [1] Precaution

[2] Installation (1) Remove 2 screws and Upper Cover.• See Section 5-2-1 [2] (1)

(4) Disconnect the NiCd battery cable.• See Section 5-2-1 [2] (3)

(2) Remove 4 screws and MFB Box Cover.(3) Unplug five connectore of the MFB Board.

3

2

(5) Remove 2 screws and the MFB Box Assy.

(6) Replacing NROM Board. If the kit has check mark made on the outer case marking NR-168857-011/ -02, replace or mount the NROM board.

NROM board


5-7

(7) Mount the NCUK Board on the MFB Box Assy. Check to ensure that connectors and card spacers have been securely inserted. Secure the board with a screw.

(8) Mount the module in such a way that sheet metal will be sandwiched in between. (Line up the bars of the holder and module) Cable to be connected to: NCUK board (CN101) and LINE PORT2 slot. Secure the cable with cable clamps in 4 places.

NCUK board

Card spacer

PSTN

Holder

Clamp

NCUK board (CN101)

PORT2 slot


5-8

(9) Mount the MPK board on the MFB Box Assy. Check to ensure that the connectors and card spacers have been securely inserted.

(10) Mount the cable between MPK and NCUK. Cable to be connected to: MPK board (CN2) and NCUK board (CN5).

(12) ReassemblingReassemble the unit in the reverse direction of the disassembling steps of this section.

Note:• Make sure that the cables are not caught by the unit while reassembling.• Fix screws to make the intervals between adjacent covers even.

[3] Setup/InspectionSetup(1) Setting the copier model in the initialization mode, select Port Type and Line Type.(2) For verification set the power switch to ON. Peform the following procedures to verify that data can be transmitted and received without any error.

PSTN line (2 lines) check(1) Place a call from PSTN2 to PSTN1.(2) In the on-hook state, place a manual call from PSTN1 to PSTN2.

MPK boardCard spacer

MPK board (CN2)

NCUK board (CN5)

FrameMaker Ver.5.5E(PC) Di250f/Di350f Chapter 899.08.27

Chapter 6

DIS/REASSEMBLY,ADJUSTMENT




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


6-1

6-1. OVERVIEW6-1-1. IDENTIFICATION OF FUSES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

6-1-2. PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT• The laser used in this copier is a semiconductor laser having the following specifications.

• When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications.

• When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when working around the printerhead and PC Drum, be sure first to turn the copier OFF.

• If the job requires that the copier be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser protective goggles.

• A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use utmost care when handling tools on the user’s premises.

• The printerhead is not maintainable in the field. It is to be replaced as an assembly including the control board. Never, therefore, attempt to remove the laser diode or adjust trimmers on the control board.

Max. power: 5mW

Output wavelength: 770~810nm

Power Supply Unit 2PU2 125V 5A

Fusing Roller Heater Lamp FuseTF1 125V 15A

Fusing Roller ThermostatTS1 250V 10A

125V 5A

125V 3.15A

Master BoardPWB-A 125V 3A (F1)

125V 3A (F2)250V 1A (F3)250V 1A (F4)

Power Supply Unit 1PU1 125V 10A (F1)

125V 15A (F2)250V 3.15A (F3)250V 3.15A (F4)


6-2

6-1-3. INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBS WITH MOS ICSThe following precautions must be observed when handling P.W. Boards with MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) ICs.

During Transportation/Storage:• During transportation or when in storage, new P.W. Boards must not be indiscriminately

removed from their protective conductive bags. • Do not store or place P.W. Boards in a location exposed to direct sunlight. • When it becomes absolutely necessary to remove a Board from its conductive bag or

case, always place it on its conductive mat in an area as free as possible from static elec-tricity.

• Do not touch the pins of the ICs with your bare hands.

During Replacement: • Before unplugging connectors from the P.W. Boards, make sure that the power cord has

been unplugged from the outlet.• When removing a Board from its conductive bag or conductive case, do not touch the

pins of the ICs or the printed pattern. Place it in position by holding only the edges of the Board.

• Before plugging connectors into the Board, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet.

During Inspection:• Avoid checking the IC directly with a multimeter; use connectors on the Board. • Never create a closed circuit across IC pins with a metal tool.• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the

PW Board, be sure to ground your body.

6-1-4. HANDLING OF THE IMAGING CARTRIDGEDuring Transportation/Storage: • Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the Imaging Cartridge.• The storage temperature is in the range between –20°C and +40°C.• In summer, avoid leaving the Imaging Cartridge in a car for a long time.

Handling: • Ensure that the correct Imaging Cartridge is used. • Store the Imaging Cartridge in a site that is not exposed to direct sunlight.

Precautionary Information on the PC Drum Inside the Imaging Cartridge:• The PC Drum exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an

extended period of time. Never, therefore, expose it to direct sunlight. • Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oil-base solvent, finger-

prints, and other foreign matter.• Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum. • Do not apply chemicals to the surface of the PC Drum. • Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum.


6-3

6-1-5. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED<< 1 >> Red Painted Screws

Purpose of Application of Red PaintRed painted screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be readjusted, set, or removed in the field.

Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions, only one representa-tive screw may be marked with red paint.

<<2>> Variable Resistors on Board

Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in “ADJUSTMENT.”

<<3>> Other ScrewsAlthough not marked with red paint, the following screws must not be loosened or read-justed.

8 screws on the PH Unit Cover


6-4

6-2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY6-2-1. DOORS, COVERS, AND EXTERIOR PARTS: IDENTIFICATION

AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES

12

13

14

15

1

2 34

5

11 16

17

6

7

8

9

10

18

19

20

21

2223

24252627

2829

30

32

33

34

31


6-5

No. Part Name Removal Procedure

1 ADF Glass Assy. Remove No. 2, 4. → Remove two holding brackets. → Remove two screw caps. → Remove two screws that secure the ADF Glass Assy.

2 Rear Holding Bracket

Remove No. 17, 18. → Remove two screw caps. → Remove two screws that secure the Rear Holding Bracket.

3 Original Glass Remove No. 4. → Remove two holding brackets.

4 Front Holding Bracket

Remove two screw caps. → Remove two screws that secure the Front Holding Bracket.

5 Control Panel Remove No. 8. → Remove No. 6. → Remove No. 4. → Remove No. 12. → Remove five screws that secure the con-trol panel and unplug one connector.

6 Front Upper Cover Remove No. 8. → Remove No. 12. → Remove six screws that secure the Front Upper Cover.

7 Exit Lower Cover Remove No. 32. → Remove No. 24. → Unhook the two tabs of the Exit Lower Cover and remove the Exit Lower Cover.

8 Front Cover Slide out No. 10. → Open No. 25. → Remove three screws that secure the Front Cover.

9 LED Cover Slide out No. 10. → Remove one screw that secures the LED Cover.

10 MP Cassette Slide out the MP Cassette. → Pushing the tab on the right rail, pull out the cassette.

11 500-Sheet Cassette

Slide out the 500-Sheet Cassette. → Pushing the tabs on both the right and left rails, pull out the cassette.

12 Upper Front Left Cover

Remove No. 4. → Remove two screws that secure the Upper Front Left Cover.

13 Left Cover Remove six screws that secure the Left Cover.

14 Upper Cover Remove two screws that secure the Upper Cover.

15 Left IR Cover Remove two screws that secure the Left IR Cover.

16 Original Cover

17 Rear Right IR Cover

Remove No. 22. → Remove No. 19. → Remove two screws that secure the Rear Right IR Cover.

18 Left Hinge Cover Remove one screw that secures the Left Hinge Cover.

19 Rear Left IR Cover Remove No. 17. → Remove two screws that secure the Rear Left IR Cover.

20 Rear Upper Cover Remove No. 21. → Remove No. 17. → Remove No. 19. → Remove four screws that secure Rear Upper Cover.

21 Rear Lower Cover Remove No. 26. → Remove No. 25. → Open No. 30. → Open No. 32. → Remove five screws that secure the Rear Lower Cover.

22 Right Hinge Cover Remove one screw that secures the Right Hinge Cover.

23 Connector Cover Remove one screw that secures the Connector Cover.

24 Rear Inside Cover Remove No. 22. → Remove three screws that secure the Rear Inside Cover.


6-6

No. Part Name Removal Procedure

25 Toner Bottle Cover Open the Toner Bottle Cover. → Unhook the dowels at four places of the Toner Bottle Cover.

26 Harness Cover Remove one screw that secures the Harness Cover.

27 Duplex Unit Rear Cover

Remove No. 31. → Remove two screws that secure the Duplex Unit Rear Cover.

28 500-Sheet Cas-sette Side Cover

Open the Side Cover. → Slide the Side Cover to the front and, at the same time, pull the rear side out of the frame.

29 Manual Bypass Tray

Remove No. 26. → Unplug one connector. → Remove three screws that secure the Manual Bypass Tray.

30 Side Cover

31 Duplex Unit Remove two screws that secure the Duplex Unit.

32 Fusing Unit See D-26.

33 Front Inside Cover Remove No. 8. → Remove No. 32. → Remove two screws that secure the Front Inside Cover.

34 Right IR Cover Remove three screws that secure the Right IR Cover.


6-7

6-2-2. REMOVAL OF CIRCUIT BOARDS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs” contained in SWITCHES ON PWBs and follow the corre-sponding removal procedures.

• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.

• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.

BCRINV

PWB-R

PU2 HGB

UN1PWB-L

PWB-I

PWB-A

PU1

PWB-R

PWB-R

PWB-H

UN3

UN2

PWB-A

PWB-A

PWB-N

HV1

CCD


6-8

Symbol Part Name Removal Procedure

PWB-A Master Board Remove the Upper Cover. → Remove nine screws and the MFB Box Cover. → Remove two screws and the MFB Box Assy. → PWB-A

PWB-A Cassette Main Board Remove the Connector Cover. → PWB-A

PWB-A Duplex Main Board Remove the Duplex Unit. → Remove the Duplex Unit Rear Cover. → PWB-A

PWB-H Double Feed Detecting Board

Slide out the MP Cassette. → Remove one screw and the PWB-H Mounting Bracket Assy. → PWB-H

PWB-I Paper Size Detecting Board

Remove the Harness Cover. → Remove the Rear Cover. → Remove two screws and the PW Board Cover. → PWB-I

PWB-L PPM Switching Board Remove the Harness Cover. → Remove the Rear Cover. → Remove one screw and the PWB-L Mount-ing Bracket Assy. → PWB-L

PWB-N RAM Board Remove the Upper Cover. → Remove nine screws and the MFB Box Cover. → PWB-N

PWB-R Fuser Frame Register Board

Remove the Fusing Unit. → Remove the rear lamp cover. → PWB-R

PWB-R Pre-Transfer Guide Plate Register Board 1

Remove the Vertical Transport Unit. → Remove two screws and two ground plates. → PWB-R

PWB-R Pre-Transfer Guide Plate Register Board 2

Open the Side Cover. → Remove the Imaging Car-tridge. → Remove one screw and the PW Board Cover. → PWB-R

PU1 Power Supply Board 1 Remove the Harness Cover. → Remove the Rear Cover. → Remove the Left Cover. → Remove five screws and the Reinforcement Bracket. → Remove three screws and the PU1 Mounting Bracket Assy. → PU1

PU2 Power Supply Board 2 Remove the Harness Cover. → Remove the Rear Cover. → PU2

HV1 High Voltage Unit Open the Side Cover. → Remove the Imaging Car-tridge. → Remove two screws and the HV1 Cover. → HV1

INV Inverter Board Remove the Original Glass. → INV

BCR BCR Board Remove the Rear Left IR Cover. → Remove three screws and the Harness Cover. → BCR

HGB HGB Board Remove the Original Glass. → Remove the Right IR Cover. → Remove the Optical Cover. → Remove the Rear Lower Cover. → Remove the Rear Upper Cover. → Remove the Shielding Plate. (U.S.A. and Canada only) → Remove one screw and the Harness Cover. → Unplug nine connectors. → Remove five screws and the HGB Mounting Bracket Assy. → HGB

CCD CCD Board See D-15.


6-9

Symbol Part Name Removal Procedure

UN2 MFB Board Remove the Upper Cover. → Remove nine screws and the MFB Box Cover. → UN2

UN3 Polygon Motor Drive Board

Remove the PH Unit. → UN3


6-10

6-2-3. PAPER TAKE-UP/TRANSPORT SECTION<<1>> Replacement of the Paper Take-Up Roll

<<2>> Replacement of the Paper Dust Remover

1. Slide out the MP Cassette.

2. Lock the Paper Lifting Plate.3. Snap off one C-clip of the Paper Take-Up Roll

Assy.4. Slide the Paper Take-Up Roll Assy to the rear so

that it can be pulled off the bushing at the front.

5. Snap off one C-clip and remove and replace the Paper Take-Up Roll.

1. Open the Side Cover.

2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover and replace it.


6-11

<<3>> Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover

<<4>> Cleaning of the Side Cover

<<5>> Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Cover


2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover.

3. Using a brush, whisk dust and dirt off the Paper Dust Remover.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Side Cover.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Duplex Unit Cover.


6-12

6-2-4. OPTICAL SECTION<<1>> Removal of the IR Unit1. Remove the Original Cover, Front Holding Bracket, Upper Front Left Cover, Front Cover,

Front Upper Cover, Rear Right IR Cover, Rear Left IR Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Rear Upper Cover, and Front Inside Cover.

2. Remove one screw and the Motor Cover.

3. Remove the Shielding Plate. (U.S.A. and Canada only)

4. Remove one screw and the Harness Cover.

5. Unplug eight connectors of the HGB Board.

6. Remove three screws and the Harness Cover.7. Unplug one connector of the BCR Board.

8. Remove one screw and the Total Counter Mount-ing Bracket Assy.

9. Unplug one connector of the Control Panel.10. Remove two screws that secure the front end of

the frame.


6-13

<<2>> Removal of the PH Unit

NOTES• Do not place the PH Unit upside down or subject it to excessive shock.• Replace the PH Unit as one unit.• NEVER attempt to disassemble or adjust the PH Unit.• Whenever the PH Unit has been removed, make the following adjustments:

Edge Erase, Registration (CD, FD, Printer), Registration (IR).

11. Remove five screws that secure the rear end of the frame.

12. Raise the rear end of the IR Unit and pull the unit out toward front.

1. Remove the Upper Cover, Front Cover, Left Cover, and Rear Cover.

2. Remove four screws and the MFB Box Cover.3. Unplug five connectors of the MFB Board.

4. Remove two screws and the MFB Box Assy.


6-14

5. Remove five screws and the Reinforcement Bracket.

6. Remove four screws and the handle.

7. Unplug all connectors (13) from Master Board PWB-A.

8. Remove the harness from all cord clamps (12) on the PH Base Plate.

9. Remove four screws and the PH Unit.


6-15

<<3>> Removal of the CCD Unit

3. Unplug two connectors of the CCD Unit.4. Remove two screws and the CCD Unit.

NOTES1. When removing the CCD Unit, remove only those screws and parts that are specified.

(Remove the CCD Unit as one unit.)2. Whenever the CCD Unit has been replaced, make the following adjustment:

FD of Zoom Adjust (IR).

<<4>> Cleaning of the Scanner Rails/Bushings

1. Remove the Original Glass.2. Remove four screws and the Cover.

1. Remove the Original Glass.2. Using a soft cloth, wipe clean the Scanner Rails

and Bushings.


6-16

<<5>> Cleaning of the Mirrors

<<6>> Cleaning of the Lens

<<7>> Cleaning of the Original Glass

<<8>> Removal of the Scanner1. Remove the Original Glass.2. Remove the Rear Holding Bracket.

1. Remove the Original Glass.2. Wipe clean the Mirrors with a soft cloth.

1. Remove the CCD Unit.2. Wipe clean the Lens with a soft cloth.

Wipe clean the Original Glass with a soft cloth.

3. Slide the Scanner to the position shown.


6-17

4. Remove one screw and unplug the connector of the Exposure Lamp.

5. Remove the flat cable of the Exposure Lamp.

6. Remove one screw and the Lamp Fixing Bracket.

7. Slide the Exposure Lamp to the front and remove it.

Rear

Front

8. Remove two screws and the Scanner.


6-18

<<9>> Removal of the Scanner Drive Cables1. Remove the Original Glass and ADF Glass Assy.2. Remove the Left IR Cover.3. Remove the Scanner.

8. Remove the Scanner Drive Cable, hook end first.

4. Unhook the spring of the cable on the hook side, one each at the front and in the rear.

5. Remove one screw and the Original Size Detection Sensor.

✽ Inch Areas Option.

6. Snap off one E-ring and remove one mounting screw from the front pulley and slide the pulley to the rear.

7. Snap off one E-ring and remove one mounting screw from the rear pulley and slide the pulley to the front.


6-19

<<10>> Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables

Pulley H

Pulley F

Pulley E

Pulley G Pulley B

Pulley A

Pulley C

Pulley D

1. Position the round bead of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley as shown.

Front

2. Wind the hook end of the Scanner Drive Cable two turns counterclockwise from the rear side to the front.

Cable on Hook End

3. Wind the bead end of the cable four turns clock-wise from the front to the rear. Then, secure the cable with tape.

NOTEMake sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.

Cable on Bead End


6-20

4. Slide the pulley to the front and install one mount-ing screw and one E-ring.

5. Wind the bead end of the cable around pulley D and pulley C, then hook the bead onto the Adjust-able Anchor.

Pulley D

Pulley C

6. Wind the hook end of the cable around pulley A and pulley B.

Pulley BPulley A

7. Fit the hook end of the cable into the groove in the Cable Guide and hook the spring.

Cable Guide

8. Position the round bead of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley as shown.

Rear


6-21

9. Wind the hook end of the cable two turns counter-clockwise from the front to the rear.

Cable on Hook End

10. Wind the bead end of the cable four turns clock-wise from the rear to the front. Then, secure the cable with tape.

NOTEMake sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.

Cable on Bead End

11. Slide the pulley toward the rear and install one mounting screw and one E-ring.

12. Wind the bead end of the cable around pulley H and pulley G and hook the bead onto the Adjust-able Anchor.

Pulley H

Pulley G

13. Wind the hook end of the cable around pulley E and pulley F.Pulley E

Pulley F


6-22

15. Peel off the tape from the pulleys at the front and rear.16. Mount the Scanner.17. Mount the Original Size Detection Sensor.18. Reinstall the Left IR Cover.19. Reinstall the Original Glass and ADF Glass Assy.20. Perform the Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage.

(For details, see ADJUSTMENT.)

NOTEWhenever the Scanner Drive Cables have been removed, be sure to make the following adjustment: CD of Zoom Adjust (IR).

14. Fit the hook end of the cable into the groove in the Cable Guide and hook the spring.

Cable Guide


6-23

6-2-5. IMAGE TRANSFER SECTION<<1>> Removal of the Image Transfer Roller

<<2>> Cleaning of the Comb Electrode


2. Raise the Image Transfer Guide Plate.

3. Remove the Image Transfer Roller and replace it.

NOTEDo not touch the surface of the Image Transfer Roller directly with bare hands.



6-24

<<3>> Cleaning of the Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

<<4>> Replacement of the Ozone Filter

2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Comb Electrode.

NOTES• Make sure the alcohol does not touch the surface of

the Image Transfer Roller.• When wiping the Comb Electrode, make sure the

cloth is not caught by the ends of the combs.


2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate.

NOTEMake sure the alcohol does not touch the surface of the Image Transfer Roller.

1. Remove the Rear Lower Cover.2. Pull out the Ozone Filter and replace it.


6-25

6-2-6. DEVELOPING SECTION<<1>> Removal of the Imaging Cartridge


2. Holding onto the green handles, slide the Imaging Cartridge part of the way out.

3. Then grasp the handle on top of the cartridge and pull the cartridge out.

NOTEWhen installing the Imaging Cartridge, push it all the way into the machine.If the cartridge is not properly installed, the PC Drum protective shutter of the cartridge may not be opened or may even be damaged.


6-26

6-2-7. FUSING SECTION<<1>> Removal of the Fusing Unit

<<2>> Removal of the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp, Fusing Right Roller, Fusing Left Roller, Fusing Roller Thermistor, Fusing Roller Thermostat, and Fusing Roller Heater Lamp Fuse


2. Remove the Front Cover.3. Unplug one connector at the front.

4. Open the Exit Cover and unplug two connectors in the rear.

5. Close the Exit Cover and remove two screws and the Fusing Unit.

1. Open the Exit Cover.2. Remove one screw and the Fusing Front Cover.


6-27

3. Snap off one E-ring and remove the Exit Cover.

4. Unhook one spring to free the Idle Lever.5. Remove two harnesses.6. Remove two screws and the Rear Cover.

7. Di350f:Remove three screws and the rear Lamp Holder.

Di250fRemove two screws and the rear Lamp Holder.

Di350f

Di250f

Di350f8. Remove one screw and the front Lamp Holder.9. Remove one screw and the Fusing Roller Heater

Lamp.

Di250f8. Remove one screw and the front Lamp Holder.9. Remove the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp.

Di350f

Di250f


6-28

10. Remove two screws and the Fusing Rear Guide Assy.

11. Remove two pressure springs.

12. Snap off one E-ring and remove the front Misfeed Clearing Lever Assy and bearing.

13. Remove the Fusing Right Roller.

14. Snap off two retaining rings.15. Remove one gear and two bushings.16. Remove the Fusing Left Roller.

NOTEWhen the Fusing Left Roller is removed, it can cause the spring to come off the Separator Finger. After the Fusing Left Roller has later been reinstalled, be sure to hook the spring onto the Separator Finger.

17. Remove one screw and the Fusing Roller Ther-mistor.

18. Remove two screws and the Fusing Roller Heater Lamp Fuse.

19. Remove two screws and the Fusing Roller Ther-mostat.


6-29

6-3. ADJUSTMENT6-3-1. ADJUSTMENT JIGS AND TOOLS USED1. Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jigs


6-30

6-3-2. ADJUSTMENT OF BELT TENSION• Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Timing Belt

1. Remove the Original Glass.2. Remove four screws and the Cover.

3. Loosen the two screws that secure the Scanner Motor. Using a bar tension gage, pull the motor to the right with a tension of 1000 g ±50 g and, at the same time, tighten the mounting screws.

NOTEAfter the adjustment, turn the timing belt to check that the belt teeth are in mesh with the pulley grooves.


6-31

6-3-3. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS• Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage

NOTEMake this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed:• After the Scanner Drive Cable has been replaced.• When the Scanner Fixing Bracket has been removed from the Scanner Drive Cable.• When the Scanner Drive Cable comes unwound.

RequirementWith the Scanner fixed to the Scanner Drive Cables, there should be no gap between the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig and the Scanner and also between the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig and the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage.

Adjustment Procedure1. Remove the Exposure Lamp. (For details, see

steps 1 through 7, (8) Removal of the Scanner, 2-4 OPTICAL SECTION.)

2. Temporarily loosen the set screws of the cable holding plate of the Scanner Drive Cable.

3. Fit the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jigs in the space between the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mir-rors Carriage.

4. Press the Scanner up against the jig and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage and, at the same time, tighten the set screws of the cable holding plate.

Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig

2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage

Scanner


6-32

✽ If the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jigs are not available, follow these steps to make the adjustment.

NOTEIf the Scanner does not run parallel with the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage when the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jigs are in position, turn the adjusting screw for the rear Scanner Drive Cable as necessary.

Adjusting Screw

1. Temporarily loosen the set screws of the cable holding plate of the Scanner Drive Cable.

2. Obtain a distance of 13 mm between the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage and rail.

13 mm

3. Secure the Scanner where it is located at a posi-tion 21 mm from the right side face.

4. Tighten the set screws of the cable holding plate.

21 mm

NOTEIf the Scanner does not run parallel with the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage, turn the adjusting screw for the rear Scanner Drive Cable as necessary.

Adjusting Screw


6-33

6-4. MISCELLANEOUS6-4-1. INSTALLATION OF THE KEY COUNTER SOCKET (OPTION)

1. Remove the Front Cover.2. Remove the knockout from the Front Upper Cover.3. Using two screws, secure the Counter Mounting

Bracket.

4. Route the harness of the Key Counter as shown.

5. Connect the Key Counter Socket connector.6. Using two screws, secure the counter socket.

7. Using two screws, secure the Key Counter Cover.

NOTEWhen the Key Counter Socket is mounted, set to “ON” the “Key Counter ” available from the Security mode.


6-34

6-4-2. REMOUNTING THE EEPROM (IC3A)

NOTES• If the Imaging Cartridge is not to be replaced after the Master Board has been replaced

with a new one, be sure to remount the EEPROM (IC3A) from the old to new Master Board.

• If the Master Board has been replaced with a new one and the EEPROM (IC3A) has not been remounted, be sure to replace the Imaging Cartridge with a new one. Because the EEPROM contains no data in this case, make settings and readjustments as necessary.

1. Remove the Master Board. (For details, see 2-2. REMOVAL OF CIRCUIT BOARDS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.)

2. Demount the EEPROM (IC3A) from the new Master Board.3. Demount the EEPROM (IC3A) from the old Master Board and remount it onto the new

Master Board.

New Master Board

New EEPROM

Old Master Board

Old EEPROM

NOTENote the alignment notch on the EEPROM (IC3A) when mounting the IC.

A

A


Chapter 7

CHECK




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


7-1

7-1. CHECK LISTThe steps of checking are to be performed according to the items in the following table.Table-Checking Point 1: Checking of System

Item Method Standards Remarks

Check for dirt and damage

Visual check of exter-nal surface of exposed part

No abnormal dirt and damage should be found.

External part (covers and doors)Operational panel Paper drawer, and so on

External PartCheck parts Visual and contact

check of external exposed parts

No dirt, loose or fall-ing should be found.

External part (covers)Operational panel Paper cassette,Glass assembly,Original glass and so on

Check WIRING Visual and contact check of external exposed parts

No loose contact,connection problem should be found.

Various connectorsVarious cables

Check for dirt and damage

Visual check inside equipment

No abnormal dirt and damage should be found.

Whole

Check installa-tion condition of parts

Visual and contact check:attachment condition of light source, engaging condition of gears, loose screws for attachment parts, carriage operation and so on

No loose, falling, or abnormal deforma-tion, abnormal opera-tion should be found.

Light source partOptical readerBelt frame assemblyAuxiliary roller assemblyGear plate assemblySeparator roller assemblyFuserResist guideGear unit, and so on

Check WIRING Visual and contact check::loose soldering, touching of wiring, unconnected or loose connector, coating and exposure of cables, and so on

No loose contact,connection problem should be found.

Various connectorsVarious cablesNFB boardand so on

Others Check the num-ber of sheets

Check the number of sheets regarding the reading system and the printing system by the accu-mulated number in the maintenance mode.

The number of sheets specified by periodical mainte-nance.

See the details of each counter.


7-2

7-2. BATTERY REPLACEMENTTo replace the Ni-Cd battery, take the following procedure.

Note:Be sure to turn the machine ON after replacing the battery.

START

0%?

Transmitting?

Turn OFF the machine.

Replace the battery.

Turn ON the machine.

END

Check the amount of used

memory displayed on the LCD.

Printout memory contentsWait until transmission

is completed.

Y

Y

N

N


Chapter 8

MAINTENANCE FEATURE




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


8-1

8-1. OVERVIEWThe copier / facsimile has various maintenance features in addition to routine functions. They are categorized into 4 types:

(1) Initialization modeThis mode clears various data including initialization and default settings.

(2) Maintenance modeThis mode displays data on screen and reports. It is possible to carry out routine operations.

(3) Service modeThis mode is used for on-site adjustments such as setting service calls and printout papers.

(4) Adjustment modeThis mode is used for factory adjustments.

NoteThe maintenance mode is not disclosed to end-users. You need to turn off the Power switch and then turn it on to exit the maintenance mode once you complete necessary maintenance jobs.


8-2

8-2. MAINTENANCE FEATURES AND OPERATION PROCEDURES

The following table outlines the maintenance features and their procedures.Please see Section 8-3-1 “Start-up” to enter each mode.

(1) Initialization mode

(2) Maintenance mode

No. Features Description Procedure (ref.)

1 Port/Line Selects type of port and line to be used. 8-3-2 << 1 >>

2 TX Marker Selects ON/OFF setting when TX Marker option is installed.

8-3-2 << 2 >>

3 RAM Clear Clears BBRAM data of sender, receiver, communication management, printout image, and soft switch.

8-3-2 << 3 >>

4 All Clear Clears all BBRAM data. 8-3-2 << 4 >>

5 Serial number and current date and time

Registers serial number and sets current date and time.

8-3-2 << 5 >>

6 Installation date Sets date of installation. 8-3-2 << 5 >>

7 Touch panel position adjustment

Adjusts position of LCD touch panel. 8-3-2 << 6 >>


8 Memory contents Displays data of RAM information. (Specifies absolute address)

8-3-3 << 1 >>

9 Memory dump Prints a report on RAM information. (Specifies absolute address)

8-3-3 << 2 >>

10 File display Displays file information on screen. (Specifies file name)

8-3-3 << 3 >>

11 File dump Prints a report on file information. (Specifies file name)

8-3-3 << 4 >>

12 Soft switch set Displays and changes setups of soft switches for maintenance.

8-3-3 << 5 >>

13 Touch panel position adjustment

Adjusts position of LCD touch panel. 8-3-2 << 6 >>

14 File forward Forward information of image in file to another fax system.

8-3-3 << 6 >>


8-3

(3) Service mode

(4) Adjustment mode


15 Function Operate system to adjust/check functions. Paper feed test, setup HV outputs, automatic adjustment of ATDC sensor (not available), and test pattern output.

8-3-7

16 Service choice Sets up system environment, printer adjustment, ADFR adjustment.

8-3-4

17 System input Sets up input paper size, fixed zoom ratio, system configuration display, factory serial number, permit Imaging Unit.

8-3-5

18 Counter Displays and changes values of various counters as reference data for checking.

8-3-6

19 I/O check Displays each sensor’s status. 8-3-8

20 ROM version Displays versions of ROMs. 8-3-10

21 Movement check Confirms scanner functions by operating specified sections.

8-3-9

22 Level history Displays data of image stabilizer. 8-3-11

23 FAX setting Set up service call. 8-3-12


24 Printer adjustment Adjusts main scanner and sub scanner registration for each cassette

8-3-13 << 1 >>

25 Scanner adjustment Adjusts main/sub magnifications and registration for each ADF&BS.

8-3-13 << 2 >>

26 Document size detection

Adjusts document size sensor automatically. 8-3-13 << 3 >>


8-4

8-3. DESCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE FEATURES AND OPERATIONS

8-3-1. START-UPYou can start the maintenance mode in 3 different ways; (1) press <1> after warm start, (2)

enter <1919...> + < > + <Panel Reset> on the dial input screen, and (3) enter a special

password < (4 asterisks)> in [User Number] on the user selection screen. Each method has different maintenance features that can be carried out.(The start key LED flashes in orange.)

Start-up Methods and Maintenance Features

X : Enable - : Disable

[1] Press <1> After Warm Start

< Available features >(1) RAM Clear(2) All Clear(3) Serial number(4) Current time(5) Installation date(6) All other maintenance menus (in the maintenance and service modes)

< How to start >(1) Turn on the power switch and wait for the

standby screen. Then touch [WARM RESTART SWITCH].

(2) Press <1> of the 10-key pad while the system displays a phrase, [Under Processing...].

Start-up

Maintenance Features

Push <1> after warm start

Enter<1919...(20 digits)>+< >+<Panel Reset> on dial input screen

Enter special password on user selection screen

1. Initialization(1) RAM Clear(2) All Clear(3) Serial number(4) Current time(5) Installation date

2. Maintenance mode3. Service mode

XXXXXXX

-----XX

-----XX


8-5

[2] Enter <1919...>

< Available features >(1) All under the maintenance menu (in the service and maintenance modes).

(The features from (1) to (7) described in [1] are unavailable.)

< How to start >(1) Press <FAX> in the standby mode.

(2) Touch [10-key Dialing] and then enter <1919...> (20 digits).

(3) Press < >.

(4) Press <Panel Reset>.

[3] User Selection Screen

< Available features >(1) All under the maintenance menu (in the service and maintenance modes).

(The features from (1) to (7) described in [1] are unavailable.)


8-6

< How to start >(1) Press <Access>.(2) Touch [User Number].

(3) Enter < > (4 asterisks).

[4] Displaying Maintenance Menu(1) Press <Utility>.

(2) Touch [Maint.], then [Service Mode] and [Maint Mode] will appear in the maintenance menu.

(3) The screen for the service mode will be displayed by touching [Service Mode].


8-7

(4) The screen for the maintenance mode will be displayed by touching [Maint Mode].

Now you can use various maintenance features.

Note• The service mode and the maintenance mode are not disclosed to users at all. Care

should be taken when you access these modes.• Turn off the Power switch and then turn it on after a maintenance job to prevent changing

setups accidentally.

8-3-2. INITIALIZATION<< 1 >>Port/Line

[1] Features(1) Setting per port type(2) Setting per line type

[2] Procedure(1) Press <1> after warm start. (See Section 8-3-1 [1].)(2) Select a port type.

* Touch [Single] for the G3 type system.* Touch [Multi] if the system has G3 Multi-Port Option.

(3) Select a line type.• Possible combination

For single : highlight only [PSTN1].For multi : highlight [PSTN1] and [PSTN2].

* Caution: Press the [ISDN] key of line type and rerersethe indication to white. When the indication remains black, it will cause malfunction of the product.

• Select “Auto/Manual” in the line selection.(<Utility>-[Maint.]-[Administ.]-[TX Setting]-[TX Set3]-[Line Selection])This can be done with the soft switch MODE 006 Bit 1 PSTN port automatic selection enable/disable.

<< 2 >> TX Marker

[1] FeaturesThis feature is used to indicate when the TX marker option is installed.(The automatic 2 sided Document Feeder (ADFR) has no TX marker.)


8-8

[2] Procedure(1) Press <1> after warm start. (See Section 8-3-1

[1].)

(2) Touch [Enter].

(3) To install TX Marker option, touch [ON] . Then touch [Enter].The next screen displays “RAM Clear” described in Section 8-3-2 << 3 >>.

<< 3 >> RAM Clear[1] FeaturesThis feature clears the data stored in BBRAM such as• self data (self-telephone number, self-password, TSI and so on)• destination data (abbreviated dialing data, one-touch dialing data, programmed data and

so on) • activity data (TX data, RX data and so on)• image data• software switches• all data

[2] Procedure(1) Press <1> after warm start. (See Section 8-3-1-

[1].)

(2) Touch [Enter].


8-9

(3) Touch [Enter].

(4) Touch the BBRAM item to be cleared (the item will be highlighted) and then touch [Enter].

* Touch the highlighted item again, then the highlighted display will be reset.(If it does not clear data, touch [Cancel].)

(5) Touch [Enter] to exit from this operation. The screen for the initial setting appears again.

<< 4 >> All Clear

[1] FeaturesThis feature clears all data in BBRAM except adjustment settings and the accumulated values of counters. When you replace the board or ROM, you need to confirm that the counted numbers of pages will be displayed correctly. Therefore, you need to record the numbers before starting replacement. (See Section 8-3-6 “Counter.”)

[2] Procedure(1) Go to the screen of “RAM Clear” (See Section 8-

3-2 << 3 >> RAM Clear)

(2) Touch [All Clear].


8-10

(3) Touch [Enter].* The last [Enter] completes this operation and returns

the standby screen.

<< 5 >> Serial Number, Time and Date Setting, and Instalation Date

[1] Features(1) Registering the serial number. (Usually, this is done before shipping.)(2) Setting the current date and time (year, month, day, hour, and minute).(3) Setting the date of installation.

[2] Procedure(1) Touch [Enter] on the screen of “RAM Clear” (See

Section 8-3-2 << 3 >>.)

(2) Touch [Serial Number].

(3) Type the serial number and then touch [Enter].


8-11

(4) Touch [Time and Date Setting].

(5) Type the current time.(Example) Type the data from the year to the minute.

Then the input data will be interpreted as the order of [Year], [Month], [Day], [Hour], and [Minute] automatically.

* For entering the data separately, touch [Year], [Month], [Day], [Hour], and [Minute] separately and type each data.

(6) Touch [Enter].

(7) Touch [Installation Date].

(8) Type the date of installation and then touch [Enter].

(9) The last [Enter] completes the operation and returns the standby screen.


8-12

<< 6 >> Touch Panel Position AdjustmentThere are 2 ways to adjust the position of the touch panel: the initial setting, and the maintenance mode. This adjustment is required when you replace the touch panel.

[1] Initial Setting (You can adjust the position of the touch panel in the initialization mode.)(1) Go to “RAM Clear” and then touch [Enter]. (See

Section 8-3-2 << 3 >>.)

(2) Touch [TP Position Adj.].

(3) Touch [+] at the upper left corner. Touch the next [+] following the arrow symbol on screen in a clockwise direction. Repeat this step for all 4 corners.Push the center of each [+] with a fine soft felt pen.

(4) The touch panel returns the standby screen after completing this routine.

[2] Maintenance Mode(1) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1 [1].)(2) Touch the utility maintenance menu [Maint

Mode]. (See Section 8-3-1 [4].)

(3) Touch [TP Position Adj.].

(4) Touch [+] at the upper left corner. Touch the next [+] following the arrow symbol on screen in a clockwise direction. Repeat this step for all 4 corners.Push the center of each [+] with a fine soft felt pen.

(5) The touch panel returns the maintenance mode.


8-13

8-3-3. MAINTENANCE MODE<< 1 >> Memory Contents

[1] FeaturesThis displays the RAM data of MAIN-CPU on the LCD by specifying its absolute address which will be provided by our technical department.

[2] Procedure(1) Type <1919...> or the special password to go to the maintenance mode. (See

Section 8-3-1.)(2) Press <Utility> and then touch [Maint.] - [Maint

Mode].

(3) Touch [Mem. Contents].

(4) Input the address with the 10-key pad or the touch keys and then touch [Enter]. It should be typed in the HEX code (0-9, A, B, C, D, E, F).

(5) Touch [↑] or [↓] to change the address.(6) Touch [Enter] twice to return to the maintenance mode.

<< 2 >> Memory Dump

[1] FeaturesThis displays the RAM data of MAIN-CPU on the LCD by specifying its absolute address which will be provided by our technical department.


Section 8-3-1.)


8-14

(2) Press <Utility> and then touch [Maint.] - [Maint Mode].

(3) Touch [Memory dump].

(4) Touch [Address].(5) Input the address with the 10-key pad or the touch keys and then touch [Enter]. It

should be typed in the HEX code (0-9, A, B, C, D, E, F).(6) Touch [Length].(7) Input the length with the 10-key pad or the touch

keys and then touch [Enter]. It should be typed in the HEX code (0-9, A, B, C, D, E, F).

(8) Touch [Enter] to return to the standby mode.

<< 3 >> File Display

[1] FeaturesThis displays the RAM data of MAIN-CPU on the LCD by specifying its file name.(The file name will be provided by our technical department.)



Mode].


8-15

(3) Touch [File Display].

(4) Type the file name and then touch [Enter]. It should be typed in the alphanumeric code (0-9, A-Z).(For typing the file name, refer to the input method of the destination of one-touch dialing.)

(5) Touch [↑]or [↓] to change the displayed address. (↓ : beginning display address + 30H.)

(6) Touch [Enter] to return to the maintenance mode.

<< 4 >> File Dump

[1] FeaturesThis outputs a report on the RAM data of MAIN-CPU by specifying its file name.



Mode].

(3) Touch [File Dump].

(4) Type the file name and then touch [Enter]. It should be typed in the alphanumeric code (0-9, A-Z). (For typing the file name, refer the input method of the destination of one-touch dialing.) File dumping will be started and returns to the standby mode. (Standard display ... C:¥TRCFILE.DAT)


8-16

<< 5 >> Soft Switch Set

[1] FeaturesThis sets up the soft switches for maintenance.

[2] Procedure(1) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.)(2) Press <Utility> and then touch [Maint.] - [Maint

Mode].

(3) Touch [Soft Switch Set].

(4) Touch [Mode Selection].(5) Type the value for a mode of the soft switch and then touch [Enter].(6) Touch [Bit Selection] or [HEX Selection].(7) Type the value of the soft switch with the 10-key pad and then touch [Enter]. Use

<0> and <1> of the 10-key pad to type bit values. For hex numbers, use 0-9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.

(8) The last [Enter] returns to the screen of the maintenance menu.

<< 6 >> File Forward

[1] FeaturesYou can forward a received image data in a file to another facsimile with this feature. Use this feature under special circumstances to prevent loss of the image data - when your printer is out of order but you cannot turn off the system because there is an important document received. This feature should be run while opening the side cover on the right side of the main machine (after step (2) of the procedures).

[2] Procedure(1) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1).


8-17

(2) Touch [Activity List] on the standby screen and then touch [RX].

(3) Use [↑]or [↓] to select a document for transferring.(4) Touch [Forward].

(5) Type the destination with the 10-key pad. Then touch [Enter] to start transferring. The print-queued document remains after transferring.

8-3-4.SERVICE CHOICE

[1] Features(1) System input: see Section 8-3-4 << 1 >>(2) ADFR adjustment: see Section 8-3-4 << 2 >>(3) Printer adjustment: see Section 8-3-4 << 3 >>

[2] Procedures(1) Select [Service Choice] in the service mode.

(2) Select [System Set], [2 Sided ADF], or [Printer] on the screen of the service choice.


8-18

<< 1 >>System Input

[1] Features(1) Automatic paper configuration mode

< Function/default > • Specifies the paper selection according to the result of the document size detection or from the A-size and B-size papers, at the time of APS.

• Valid for ADFR or the optional document size detection sensor.

(2) Priority FLS setup

< Function/default > Specifies the size of FLS.

(3) Copy mode< Function/default > Specifies whether single-sided copy is displayed in the selection of

the copy setup. (If you specify “1 Sided & 2 Sided”, a new item, “1 Sided → 1 Sided,” will be added and become available in “Document → Copy” setup.)

Display Description Default

Inch/A-size, B-size Performs APS with the detected size.Converts the detected size to an optional size regardless of

the country-specification.

X

Inch size Converts the detected document size into a Inch size.


F: 330 mmC: 203 mm(Rounding off below decimal point)

Use this size for detecting the universal size, the document size, and the paper size for manual feed FLS setup.


The same as above X


The same as above


The same as above


1 Sided & 2 Sided Will not restrict document copy setup to 2 sided only.

2 Sided only Will restrict document copy setup to 2 sided only. X


8-19

(4) Anti-dew< Function/default > Specifies whether “Dry Key Set” is displayed in the utility “user

maintenance.” If displayed, it specifies the parts to be done.

(5) Disable functions< Function/default > Specifies whether some functions in the copy mode should be

disabled.“Document → copy” and “Application” can be disabled.

NoteThis function is unavailable for PC print, i.e., no mode can be disabled.

[2] Procedures(1) Touch [System Set] on the screen of the service

choice screen. (See Section 8-3-4 “Service Choice Screen.”)

(2) Touch [Auto Paper Configuration] on the screen of the system setup.

(3) Select [Inch/Metric] or [Inch].


Scanner Performs the dehumidify process for the scanner only.

Scanner & drum Performs the dehumidify process for the scanner and the drum.

Disable Will not display the dehumidify process. X


OFF No modes will be disabled. (All modes are available.) X

ON Two modes (“Document → copy” and “Application”) can be disabled.


8-20

(4) Touch [END] to return to the system setup screen.(5) Touch [FLS Paper] on the screen of the system

setup.

(6) Select one of the following choices:F : 330 mm F: 330 mm F: 330 mm F: 330 mmC : 203 mm C: 210 mm C: 216 mm C: 220 mm(7) Touch [END] to return to the system setup screen.(8) Touch [1 Sided/2 Sided] on the screen of the

system setup.

(9) Select [1 Sided & 2 Sided] or [2 Sided only].(10)Touch [END] to return to the system setup screen.

(11)Touch [Dry Key Set] on the screen of the system setup.

(12)Select [Scanner only], [Scanner & Drum], or [Disable].

(13)Touch [END] to return to the system setup screen.(14)Touch [Function Limit] on the screen of the

system setup.

(15)Select [ON] or [OFF] and then touch [END].


8-21

<< 2 >> ADFR Adjustment (2 sided ADF)

[1] Features(1) Document stop position adjustment

< Function/default > • Adjusts the stop position of documents for ADFR.• Can adjust the positions for “1 Sided”, “2 Sided”, or “Single feed

mode”, separately.• “-” adjusts the position to the direction closer to the position for

manual feeding, so that documents overlap with the scale, while “+” adjusts the position to the opposite direction, i.e., set documents away from the position for manual feeding.

Note“Scale” is the ruler part of the document size display.

(2) Registration loop adjustment< Function/default > • Adjusts the amount of the document loop (looseness of a document)

at the ADFR registtration roller to adjust the registtration. (This is done by putting the leading edge of a document to the registtration roller.)

• “-” for less loop while “+” for more loop.

[2] Procedures(1) Touch [2 Sided ADF] on the screen of the

service choice. (See Section 8-3-4 “Service choice.”)

(2) Touch [Original Stop Position] on the ADFR screen.

Description Default

1 Sided mode -7 to +7 0

2 Sided mode -6 to +7 0

Single feed mode -7 to +7 0

Description Default

-5 mm to +5 mm 0


8-22

(3) Adjust the position of document stop on the screen for document stop position.Clear the adjustment value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad.

Change the signs “+” or “-” with the “ID” key or the < >key.(4) Touch [END] to return to the ADFR screen.(5) Touch [Registration Loop] on the ADFR screen.

(6) Adjust the registtration loop on the screen for the registtration loop.Clear the adjustment value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad.

Change the signs “+” or “-” with “ID” key or < >key.(7) Touch [END] to return to the ADFR screen.

<< 3 >> Printer Adjustment

[1] Features(1) Document feeder loop

< Function/default > •Adjusts the document feeder loop (i.e., looseness of document fed to the timing roller).

•Adjusts 3 feeding paths independently.• “-” for less loop while “+” for more loop. (Setting unit: 1 mm)

•Proceed with this adjustment when you observe fluctuation of printing front defects, or skewing, bending, or misfeeding of print papers.

(2) ATDC sensor gain< Function/default > •Adjusts the gain of the ATDC sensor. (Record the current value

before changing it.)Current value : the present control voltage of ATDC.Setting value : the set control voltage of ATDC

•The gain setting is a stepwise adjustment.

• “-” for more T/C ratio to be detected while “+” for less T/C ratio.ATDC sensor gain = 5.1 ¥ 2.2 ¥ [setting value] / 256 [V]

Description Default

First cassette -5 mm to +5 mm 0

Add-on cassette -5 mm to +5 mm 0

Dup & manual feed -5 mm to +5 mm 0

Description Default

123 to 186 155


8-23

(3) Edge erase adjustment< Function/default > • Adjust the edge erase of the main and sub scanners for the engine.

• Can be adjusted leading/trailing/up-down (by 1 mm).(“Up-down” corresponds to “right-left” when you see the direction of the paper ejection vertically.)

• Perform this adjustment after replacing the printer head. It should be done after the printer adjustment (the adjustments of the main/sub scanner record starting positions.)

(4) ID adjustment< Function/default > •Adjusts the contrast of printed images.

•Specifies the center value of “print density” of the copy setting.• “-” for less contrast while “+” for more contrast of printed images.

(5) VG adjustment< Function/default > •Adjusts VG to match the characteristics of the photosensitive drum.

Perform this adjustment when you observe voids or overlapping in images.

• It is a step-wise adjustment.• “-” for more VG (less the absolute value) while “+” for less VG (more

the absolute value.)

[2] Procedures(1) Touch [Printer] on the screen of the service

choice. (See Section 8-3-4 “Service choice.”)

Description Default

Leading edge 0 to +5 mm 4

Trailing edge 0 to +5 mm 4

Up-down 0 to +5 mm 4

Description Default

-2 to +4 0

Description Default

-2 to +2 0


8-24

(2) Touch [Loop Adjustment] on the printer screen.

(3) Adjust “Paper Feed Loop” on the screen for paper feed loop.Clear the displayed value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad.

Change the signs “+” or “-” with the <ID> key or the < >key.(4) Touch [END] to return to the printer screen.(5) Touch [ATDC Set] on the printer screen.

(6) Adjust the ATDC sensor gain on the screen of the ATDC. Type an adjusted value with the 10-key pad and the <Clear> key.

(7) Touch [END] to return to the printer screen.(8) Touch [Edge Erase] on the printer screen.

(9) Perform the adjustment on the screen for edge erase adjustment. Use the <Clear> key to delete the displayed value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad.

(10)Touch [END] to return to the printer screen.(11)Touch [Image Density] on the printer screen.


8-25

(12)Perform the ID adjustment on the screen for ID adjustment.Use the <Clear> key to delete the displayed value and then type a new value with

the 10-key pad. Change the signs “+” or “-” with the <ID> key or the < >key.(13)Touch [END] to return to the printer screen.(14)Touch [VG Adjust] on the printer screen.

(15)Perform the VG adjustment for screen of the VG adjustment. Use the <Clear> key to delete the displayed value and then type a new value with the 10-key pad.

(16)Touch [END] to return to the printer screen.

8-3-5. SYSTEM INPUT

[1] Features(1) Paper size input : Section 8-3-5 << 1 >>(2) Change fixed zoom : Section 8-3-5 << 2 >>(3) Machine configuration : Section 8-3-5 << 3 >>(4) Serial number : Section 8-3-5 << 4 >>(5) Permit Imaging Unit : Section 8-3-5 << 5 >>

[2] Procedures(1) Select [System Input] on the screen of the

service mode.

(2) Select [Paper Size Input], [Machine Configuration], [Permit Imaging Unit], [Change Fixed Zoom], [Serial Number], or [Original Size Detecting Option] on the screen of the system input.

<< 1 >> Paper Size Input

[1] FeaturesSpecify a paper size for a 500-sheet cassette.


8-26

[2] Procedures(1) Select [Paper Size Input] on the screen of the

system input.

(2) Select the cassette that is a 500-sheet cassette on the screen of [Paper Size Input 1].

(3) Select one of paper sizes displayed on the screen of [Paper Size Input 2]. Alternatively, press <F> or <C> and enter numbers with the 10-key pad.

(4) Touch [END] to return to the [Paper Size Input 1] screen.(5) If you wish to set up another cassette, select that cassette and repeat the steps (3)

and (4).(6) If you do not wish to set up another cassette, touch [END] to return to the screen of

the system input.< Selectable range > •Paper cassette

2nd to 5th paper cassette•Printable paper size

A3L, A4L, A4C, B4L, B5L, B5C11×17" L, 11×14" L, Legal L, Letter L, Letter C, and FLS. L: Lengthwise, C: Crosswise

•Numerical range with 10-key pad: 0 - 999mm

NoteA4L and 5.5×8.5" are not available; they will be displayed on screen but are not available.

< Default sizes >

* These are valid for inserted cassettes.* Specify LCC with its internal dip switch. It cannot be change from the panel.

2nd bin 3rd bin 4th bin 5th bin LCC

Letter C Letter C Letter C Letter C Letter C


8-27

<< 2 >> Change Fixed Zoom

[1] Features• Changes a fixed zoom to a variable zoom.• Displayed figures on keys remain the same.

[2] Procedure(1) Select [Change Fixed Zoom] on the screen of

the system input.

(2) Touch the fixed zoom to be changed, then the current value will be displayed.Clear it with <Clear> key and type a new value with the 10-key pad.

(3) Touch [Enter] to return to the system setup screen.< Zoom range > ×0.250 to ×4.000 (common to all zoom keys)< Selectable range > • Zoom out: Legal→Letter, 11×15→Letter, 11×17→Letter, ×0.5

• Zoom in: Legal→11×17, Letter→11×17, 5 1/2×8 1/2→Legal, ×2.0• Fullsize

<< 3 >> Machine Configuration

[1] FeaturesDisplays the Machine configuration.

[2] Procedure(1) Select [Machine Configuration] on the screen of

the system input.

(2) Touch [Next].


8-28

How to confirm the add-on memory capacity:• When you add a memory card, ROT (8MB or 16MB), the system indicates “8.3MB” of the

rotational memory. • If you add a PKG-ASS’Y (ROT) with the rotational memory of 8.3 MB, the image memory

capacity is increased by 8.0MB or 16MB and the system indicates “8 MB” or “16MB”, respectively.

• If you add a PKG-ASS’Y (TMEM), the image memory of 32 MB is added and the system indicates “32MB.”

(3) Touch [Enter] to return to the system input screen.

<< 4 >> Serial Number

[1] FeaturesRegisters the factory serial number.

[2] Procedure(1) Select [Serial Number] on the screen of the

system input.

(2) Register the serial number on the new screen.(3) Touch [Enter] to return to the system setup screen.

<< 5 >> Permit Imaging unit

[1] Features• Enable an inserted I/C by mistake.• Once it is enabled, it cannot be disabled again.

[2] Procedure(1) Select [Permit Imaging Unit] on the screen of the

system setup.

(2) Select [Yes] or [No] on the screen of the Imaging Unit.(3) Touch [Enter] to return to the system setup screen.

<< 6>> Original size detecting option

Set whether the optional Original Size Detecting Sensor is available or not.(1) Select [Original Size Detecting Option] on the screen of the system setup. (2) Select [Yes] or [No] on the screen of the Imaging Unit.(3) Touch [Enter] to return to the system setup screen.\


8-29

8-3-6. COUNTER

< Features > • Displays and changes values of various counters as reference data for checking up by technical service personnel. (See each section of counters for details.)

• Can reset the value of each counter.How to reset:(1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.)(2) Touch [Counter] in the service mode.(3) Touch [Counter Reset].(4) Select a counter to be reset.(5) Touch [END].

<< 1 >> Paper Counter

[1] Features(1) Displays the accumulated number for each size and type of print paper.(2) Can reset each counter independently.(3) Will not count the unprinted paper passed while the system is in the service mode.

• List of paper counters

Item Description

Paper Accumulated numbers for each paper size and an special papers

Jam Number of occurrences of jamming

Trouble Number of occurrences of trouble

PM Number of usage of each element (parts for PM)

Per Device Number of prints for each application

Maintenance Specifies the number of pages until the indication of requiring maintenance, or displays the number of accumulated copies

Item Description

A3 Number of A3L papers used

B4 Number of B4L papers used

A4 Number of A4L, C papers used

B5 Number of B5L, C papers used

A5 Number of A5L, C papers used

B6 Number of B6L papers used

A6 Number of A6L papers used

11×17" Number of 11×17L papers used

11×14" Number of 11×14 papers used

Letter Number of Letter L, C papers used


8-30

[2] Procedures(1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.)(2) Touch [Counter] on the screen of the service

mode.

(3) Touch [Paper].

(4) Touch [Next].

(5) Select a counter to be reset.If you do not wish to reset any counters, touch [End].

(6) Press <Clear> to reset the selected counter.If you wish to cancel the reset, press <Interrupt> right after <Clear>. The previous value will be restored.

Legal Number of Legal L, C papers used

5-1/2×8-1/2" Number of 5.5×8.5L, C papers used

FLS Number of FLS papers used

Normal Number of standard papers used

Recycled Number of recycled paper used

Special Number of special papers used

Not for 2 sided Number of single-side only papers used

Item Description


8-31

<< 2 >> Jam Counter

[1] Features(1) Displays the number of occurrences of misfeed and its rate of occurrences (MCBJ

and MDBJ).(2) Can reset each counter separately.

• List of Jam counters

Item Description

MCBJ system Average number of papers between paper misfeed incidentsTotal counter/misfeed counter for MCBJ (including misfeed in finisher)

MCBJ Machine Only

Average number of papers between paper misfeed incidentsTotal counter/misfeed counter for MCBJ (including misfeed in finisher)

1st Drawer Number of occurrences of misfeed in the 1st drawer of the main machine

2nd Drawer Number of occurrences of misfeed of the 2nd drawer in the main machine

3rd Drawer Number of occurrences of misfeed of the 3rd drawer in the main machine

4th Drawer Number of occurrences of misfeed of the 4th drawer in the main machine

5th Drawer Number of occurrences of misfeed of the 5th drawer in the main machine

Manual feed Number of occurrences of misfeed of the manual feed in the main machine

Vertical transport Number of occurrences of misfeed of the vertical transfer section in the main machine

Separator Number of occurrences of misfeed of the separator in the main machine

Fusing Number of occurrences of misfeed in the fuser of the main machine

2 sided Entrance Number of occurrences of misfeed in the reversed 2 sided paper holding section of the main machine

2 sided Feed Number of occurrences of misfeed in 2 sided paper feeder of the main machine

LCC feed Number of occurrences of misfeed in the LCC feeder

LCC transport Number of occurrences of misfeed in the LCC transfer section

Shift/Job Tray Transport

Number of occurrences of misfeed in the Shift/Job tray transfer section

Shift/Job Tray Exit Number of occurrences of misfeed in the Shift/Job tray ejector

Finisher Horizontal Transport

Number of occurrences of misfeed in the finisher horizontal transfer section

Finisher Transport Number of occurrences of misfeed in the finisher ejection section

Finisher Exit Number of occurrences of misfeed in the finisher exit section

Finisher staple Number of occurrences of misfeed in the finisher staple


8-32

[2] Procedures(1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.)(2) Touch [Counter] on the screen of the service

mode.

(3) Touch [Jam].

(4) Touch [Next].

Finisher set Transport

Number of occurrences of misfeed in the finisher process tray

MDBJ Average number of papers between document misfeed incidentsADF printout paper counter/ ADF misfeed counter

2 side ADF Print Paper feeding

Number of occurrences of misfeed in the ADFR (ADF) feeder

2 side ADF Transport

Number of occurrences of misfeed in the ADFR (ADF) paper reverse section

2 side ADF Reverse

Number of occurrences of misfeed in the ADFR ejector

2 side ADF single feed

Number of occurrences of misfeed in the ADFR single feeder

Print Number of occurrences of misfeed due to faulty specification to PC print

Engine Number of occurrences of misfeed in communication error (VD error) with the engine

Item Description


8-33

(5) Touch [Next].

(6) Touch [Next].

(7) Touch [Next].

(8) Select a counter to be reset.If you do not wish to reset any counters, touch [End].


<< 3 >> PM Counter

[1] Features(1) Displays the usage counters in the table shown below.(2) Can reset each counter separately.(3) Can reset each counter class separately using clear counter selection. (Cannot

reset I/C life counter.)• List of PM counters

Item Description

I/C Life Number of rotations of I/C

Fusing Unit Number of ejected papers

1st Drawer (multi-purpose)

Number of fed papers from the 1st drawer of the main machine.

2nd Drawer Number of fed papers from the 2nd drawer of the main machine.

3rd Drawer Number of fed papers from the 3rd drawer of the main machine.


8-34

* Drawer = Cassette

[2] Procedure(1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.)(2) Touch [Counter] on the screen of the service

mode.

(3) Touch [PM].

4th Drawer Number of fed papers from the 4th drawer of the main machine.

5th Drawer Number of fed papers from the 5th drawer of the main machine.

LCC Parts 1 Number of printed papers from LCC (for 200K)

LCC Parts 2 Number of printed papers from LCC (for 300K)

Other PM Parts 1 Number of copied papers (for 100K)

Other PM Parts 2 Number of copied papers (for 150K)

Other PM Part 3 Number of copied papers (for 60K/120K)

2 Sided ADF 1 Sided Number of feed 1 sided papers (ADFR)

2 Sided ADF 2 Sided Number of feed 2 sided papers (ADFR)

2-Sided ADF Single-Feed

Number of printed 2-sided single-feed papers (ADFR)

Scanner Clean 1 Number of scans of the scanner (for 60K)

Scanner Clean 2 Number of scans of the scanner (for 120K)

Job Tray Number of ejected papers from the 2 bin tray

Toner Pages Displays the number of sheets converted into the number of black dots in an A4 size paper with 5% black dotted document

Item Description


8-35

(4) Touch [Next].

(5) Touch [Next].

(6) Select a counter to be reset. (The I/C life counter cannot be cleared.)If you do not wish to reset any counters, touch [End].


<< 4 >>Trouble Counter

[1] Features(1) Displays the number troubles occurred.

Can reset each counter separately. • List of counters

Item Description

C0000 Main Motor

10 I/C Motor

45 Cooling Fan

4C Ventilation Fan

4E Cooling Fun (Power supply)

70 Toner Bottle Motor

C0500 Fusing Warming-up

10 Fuser Low Temperature

20 Fuser High Temperature

C0650 Home Sensor

51 Left Sensor

C0990 LCC Transport Motor

91 LCC Lift 1 Limit

95 LCC Lift Motor

99 LCC Lift 2 Limit


8-36


mode.

(3) Touch [Trouble].

9D LCC Communication

C0B00 Finisher Transport Drive Motor

0F Finisher Horiz. Trans. Route Switch

30 Finisher Paper Aligning Bar Unit

38 Finisher Paper Standard Board Unit

4D Finisher Assist Tray Unit

4E Finisher Transaction Tray Unit

50 Finisher Staple Unit

80 Finisher Shift Tray Shift

A0 Finisher Elevate Motor

C0F32 ATDC Sensor

33 ATDC Adjust

C1038 Engine Connection

39 Scanner Connection

C1300 Polygon Motor

30 Communication Error (VSYNC)

3A Communication Error (G/A)

3B Communication Error (Option)

C0 I/C Initial Error

D0 EEPROM

F0 HSYNC (SOS)

C18XX Printer Controller Error

Item Description


8-37

(4) Touch [Next].

(5) Touch [Next].

(6) Touch [Next].

(7) Touch [Next].

(8) Select a counter to be reset. If you do not wish to reset any counters, touch [End].


<< 5 >> Device Counter

[1] Features(1) Displays the number of printouts from each application.


8-38

(2) Can reset each counter separately.• List of counters


mode.

(3) Touch [Device].

(4) Select a counter to be reset. If you do not wish to reset any counters, touch [End].


<< 6 >> Maintenance Counter

[1] Features(1) Can specify the number of printouts until the next maintenance notice. (1k to

9999k).(2) Displays the value of the counter and the specified number by item (1).(3) Can reset each counter separately.(4) A maintenance call mark ( ) on the status line at the bottom of the LCD screen will

be displayed once the counter reaches the specified value.

Item Description

Copier Number of copies

Printer Number of PC printouts

Report print Number of report printouts

Fax print Number of fax printouts

Fax transmission Number of transmitted fax sheets


8-39

• List of counters


mode.

(3) Touch [Maintenance].

(4) If you need to change the specified value, select the maintenance counter (specified) and then go to step (5).If you do not wish to change or reset this counter, touch [End] and then go to step (6).

(5) < Change the specified value >Press <Clear> to reset the specified value and type a new number.Press <Interrupt> right after <Clear> to restore the previous value.

(6) < Clear the counted number >Press <Clear> to reset the counted number.Press <Interrupt> right after <Clear> to restore the previous value.

8-3-7. FUNCTION

< Description > Adjust/confirm several system operations in this mode.

Item Description

Maintenance(set)

Displays a maintenance call once the counter reaches this value.

Maintenance (counted) Counts each printout

Item Description

F-1 Paper feed test without printing

F-2 Specifies output values for each HV (factory setting)

F-8 Automatic adjustment for ATDC sensor

F-12 Prints pre-determined test patterns


8-40

<< 1 >> [F1] - Paper feed test without printing

[1] Features(1) Conduct a paper feed test from the specified paper feeder. Will not print with this

test.(2) Can specify 2 sided paper. In this case, a paper feed test is conducted through the 2

sided copy path.

[2] Procedures(1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.)(2) Touch [Function] on the screen of the service

mode.

(3) Touch [F1].

(4) Select a paper feed slot to be tested. For a 2 sided copy test, touch [2 sided].(5) Press <Start> then the test will be started and the LED turns orange.(6) Press <Stop> then the test will be stopped and the LED turns green.

(Tests will be stopped when the feeder has no paper.)

<< 2 >> [F2] - Specification of output values for each HV

[1] Features(1) Specifies the output value for each HV.

NoteThis is a factory setting. Do not use this feature.

[2] Procedure(1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.)(2) Touch [Function] on the screen of the service

mode.


8-41

(3) Touch [F2].

(4) Select an item to be tested. (5) Press <Start> then the operation will be started and the LED turns orange.(6) Adjust the value with the potentiometer for the specified voltage or current.(7) Press <Stop> then the operation will be stopped and the LED turns green.

(The operation will be stopped automatically after 15 seconds once it is started.)

<< 3 >> [F8] - Automatic adjustment for ATDC sensor

[1] Features (1) Adjusts the ATDC sensor automatically.

(The adjusted voltage will be displayed on the ATDC sensor gain of the element data.)

(2) This adjustment will be carried out automatically when a new I/C is installed.

[2] Procedure(1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.)(2) Touch [Function] on the screen of the service

mode.

(3) Touch [F8].

(4) Press <Start> then the adjustment will be started and the start LED turns orange.(5) Press <Stop> then the operation will be stopped and the start LED turns green.


8-42

<< 4 >> [F12] - Printing pre-determined test patterns

[1] Features (1) Prints test patterns.(2) Prints test patterns from specified paper feeder. Can use 2 sided paper. With 2

sided papers, test patterns are printed on both sides.

[2] Procedures(1) Go to the service mode from <Utility>. (See Section 8-3-1.)(2) Touch [Function] on the screen of the service

mode.

(3) Touch [F12].

(4) Select a paper feeder. Press <2 sided> for 2 sided printing.(5) Press <Start> then the printing will be started and the start LED turns orange.(6) Press <Stop> then the printing will be stopped and the start LED turns green.

(Tests will be stopped if the feeder is out of paper.)

8-3-8. I/O CHECK

[1] Features< Overview > • Displays statuses of sensors and switches.

• Indicates 0 or 1 for sensors. Alternatively analog values (0 to FFFF) are displayed.

Sensor Check Description

Scan-throygh ADF Displays the status of ADF sensors.

Book-scan Displays the status of Book scanner sensors.

2 Sided ADF Displays the status of ADFR sensors.

Output Option Displays the status of paper ejection option sensors (Shift tray, Job tray, Finisher, Mail-bin Finisher).

Printer Displays the status of the printer (engine).


8-43

(1) Printer sensors< Features > • Displays the status of the sensors and switches of the printer (engine).

• Indicates 0: LO or 1: HI for those sensors and switches.• Analog values are decimal numbers.

Item Sensor Description

Drawer 1(MP tray)

Drawer Set Cassette sensor

Double feed Paper stuck sensor

Paper Near Empty Paper near empty sensor

Paper Empty Paper empty sensor

Size Detection Paper size detection sensor(analog value)

Drawer 2 Paper Near Empty Paper near empty sensor


Side Cover Feeder cover sensor

Drawer Detect Set/type sensor (2 bit)

Drawer 3 Take up Paper feed sensor















2 sided/manual feed

2 sided set 2 sided paper feed detection sensor

2 sided paper 2 sided paper sensor

2 sided cover 2 sided cover sensor

Paper Take up Manual feed sensor

Bypass Set Manual feed detection sensor


8-44

* Drawer = Cassette

LCC Lifter level S1 Lifter level sensor 1

Lifter level S2 Lifter level sensor 2

Registration Regist sensor

S1S S1 sensor

PPS0S PPS0 sensor

PPS1S

Paper Near Empty 1 Paper near empty sensor 1

Paper Near Empty 2 Paper near empty sensor 2

Paper Size Paper size sensor


Fuser Fuser thermistor Fuser thermistor (analog value)

I/C I/C Discrimination I/C type signal (analog value)

Toner Empty Toner empty sensor (analog value)

Drum Thermistor Drum thermistor (analog value)

Door/toner LCC Side Cover LCC side cover sensor

LCC Front Cover LCC front cover sensor

Side Cover Main product side cover sensor

Toner Bottle Cover Toner bottle cover sensor

Sub Hopper Sub hopper empty sensor

Toner Bottle Set Toner bottle home position sensor

Paper transfer Timing Roller Timing roller front sensor

Exit Paper ejection sensor

Driver detection

Cooling Fan Internal fan lock signal

Main Motor Main motor lock signal

I/U Motor I/U motor lock signal

Polygon Motor Polygon motor lock signal

Ventilation Fan Ozone fan lock signal



8-45

(2) ADFR sensors< Features > • Displays statuses of ADFR sensors.

• Indicates 0: LO or 1: HI for those sensors and switches.

(3) Paper ejection option sensor< Features > • Displays status of the sensors and switches of paper ejection options (shift

tray, 2-bin tray, finisher, mail-bin finisher).• Indicates 0: LO or 1: HI for those sensors and switches.• Analog values are displayed in decimal numbers.


2 side ADF(ADFR)

Empty Empty sensor

Registration Regist sensor

Exit Section Paper ejection sensor

Dup. Reverse sensor

Single feed empty Single feed empty sensor

Sizes (Back) Width sensor 1 (Back)

Sizes (Center) Width sensor 2 (Center)

Sizes (Front) Width sensor 1 (Front)

Pick up Pick up sensor

Paper ejection option


Shift tray Empty Empty

Tray full Bin full sensor

Shift Home Shift home position sensor

Exit Paper ejection sensor

Cover Cover sensor

Job tray Raised Tray Empty Upper tray empty sensor

Raised Tray Full Upper tray full sensor

Lowered Tray Full Lower tray full sensor

Raised Tray Exit Upper tray paper ejection sensor

Cover Cover sensor


8-46

Finisher HorizontalTransport

Paper Passage Paper pass sensor of horizontal transfer path

Tray Empty Empty sensor of horizontal transfer tray

Horizontal Position Horizontal sensor of horizontal transfer

Non-Sort Position Non-sort position sensor of horizontal transfer

Top Tray Exit Ejection sensor of first tray

Full Detect Full detection sensor of first tray

Empty Empty sensor of first tray

Elevate Tray Raised Elevate tray upper limit sensor

Lowered Elevate tray lower limit sensor

Empty Elevate tray empty sensor

Finisher Transaction Tray

Exit Process tray ejection sensor

Home Process tray fixed position sensor

Paper Aligning Bar Home

Matching rod position S

Paper standard Board Home

Matching reference plate position S

Assist Tray Exit Position Sub tray idle position sensor

Assist Tray Home Sub tray fixed position S

Stapler Paper detect Paper to be stapled detection sensor

Home Stapler home sensor

Staple Empty Staple empty sensor

Self priming Self priming sensor

Mail-bin Finisher

Exit Mail-bin ejection sensor

Empty 1st mail-bin 1st mail-bin empty sensor

2nd mail-bin 2nd mail-bin empty sensor

3rd mail-bin 3rd mail-bin empty sensor

4th mail-bin 4th mail-bin empty sensor

5th mail-bin 5th mail-bin empty sensor

Fulldetection

1st mail-bin 1st mail-bin full sensor

2nd mail-bin 2nd mail-bin full sensor

3rd mail-bin 3rd mail-bin full sensor

4th mail-bin 4th mail-bin full sensor

5th mail-bin 5th mail-bin full sensor

Paper ejection option



8-47

(4) Scan-through ADF sensors< Features > • Displays statuses of ADF sensors.

• Indicates 0: LO or 1: HI for those sensors and switches.• Sensors are S1 to S9.

(5) Book Scan sensors< Features > • Displays statuses of Book scan sensors.

• Indicates 0: LO or 1: HI for those sensors and switches.• Sensors are carriage (L), carriage (HP), cover open sensor, and 15°

sensor.

[2] Procedure< 1 > ADF

(1) Select [I/O Check] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Scan-through ADF] on the screen of the check sensor.

(3) Confirm ADF sensors.

(4) Touch [Enter] to return to the sensor check screen.

< 2 > Book scanner(1) Select [I/O Check] on the screen of the service

mode.


8-48

(2) Select [Book-scan] on the screen of the check sensor.

(3) Confirm book scanner sensors.

(4) Touch [Enter] to return to the sensor check screen.

< 3 > ADFR(1) Select [I/O Check] on the screen of the service

mode.

(2) Select [2 Sided ADF] on the screen of the check sensor.

(3) Check ADF sensors.

(4) Touch [END] to return to the sensor check screen.


8-49

< 4 > Paper ejection option(1) Select [I/O Check] on the screen of the service

mode.

(2) Select [Output Option] on the screen of the check sensor.

(3) Check a paper ejection sensor.

(4) Touch [Next] to confirm another sensor.Touch [END] to return to the sensor check screen.




8-50

< 5 > Printer(1) Select [I/O Check] on the screen of the service

mode.

(2) Select [Printer] on the screen of the check sensor.

(3) Check a printer sensor.




8-51



8-3-9. MOVEMENT CHECK

[1] Features< Function > Operates a specified section of the system for checking.

[2] Procedure< ADFR paper feed check >

(1) Select [Movement Check] on the screen of the service mode.

(2) Select [Paper Feed Check] on the screen of the movement check.

Load documents on the “document tray” and select one of the following items on screen:[1-sides No Detect] . . to read one side of documents with the same size.[1- sided Mixed Orig][2- sided][SADF]

Item Description

ADFR paper feed check Checks paper out of ADFR

BS scanner arbitrary shift Shifts the carriage of the Book scanner according to the specified value

CCD driving Drives CCD

Lamp check Turn on the cold cathode lamp

Lamp intensity Check the intensity of the cold cathode lamp


8-52

< BS scanner arbitrary shift > < CCD driving > and < Lamp check >(1) Select [Movement Check] on the screen of the

service mode.

(2) Select [Scanner] on the screen of the movement check.

Select one of the following items on screen:CCD driving: [Drive] . . . . . . to drive CCDLamp [On] . . . . . . . . . . . . . to turn on the Xe lampBS carriage arbitrary shift . enter the position (relative or absolute positions) of the

carriage to shift it arbitrarilyAbsolute position :a distance (line) from the carriage home position (HP) Relative position : a distance (line) from the current position of the carriage

(10mm = 236 lines)Number of lines to be entered:

(a) For transferring or packing the system (removal or replacement): 566 lines (the absolute position)

(b) For dismounting and reattaching the Xe lamp: 7505 lines (the absolute position)(c) For replacing the inverter: 0 line (the absolute position) (d) For dismounting and reattaching the slider: 7505 lines (the absolute position)(e) For installing the Book scanner document detection sensor (an inch option)

: 10927 lines (the absolute position)< Lamp intensity >

(1) Select [Movement Check] on the screen of the service mode.


8-53

(2) Select [Exp. Lamp Check] on the screen of the movement check.

Check the intensity of the lamp to adjust its gain.


8-54

8-3-10. ROM VERSION

[1] FeaturesYou can check versions of the following ROMs.

(1) MAIN(2) Printer(3) 2 Sided ADF(4) LCC(5) Printout option

[2] Procedures(1) Select [ROM Version] on the screen of the

service mode.

(2) The versions of ROMs ([MAIN], [Printer], [2 Sided ADF], [LCC] and [Printout opt]) are displayed on screen.

8-3-11. LEVEL HISTORY

[1] Features< Function > Displays data on image stabilization of the system.

Item Description Display Unit

ATDC sensor gain Displays the gain of ATDC sensor* Displays the voltage adjusted by the

ATDC sensor automatic adjustment [F8]

123 to 186 by 1 step -

ATDC sensor output Displays the output of the ATDC sensor 3.0 to 19.0 by 0.5 % %

Vg output value Displays the grid voltage -534 to -748 (Di350f)-514 to -728 (Di250f)

V

Vb output value Displays the bias voltage -409 to -603 V


8-55

[2] Procedure(1) Select [Level History] on the screen of the

service mode.

(2) Data on < ATDC Set >, < ATDC Current >, < Vg Current >, and < Vb Current > are displayed on screen.

8-3-12. FAX SETTING<< 1 >> Setting the service call

[1] FeaturesWhen the pre-set condition of the system occurs, the system informs its status to the call center automatically. There are 2 methods of data transmission: report transmission by fax and data transmission by data communication.Understand the operation of the call center to set this feature properly.

(1) Specify the maintenance date(2) Enter the call number(3) Specify the transmission condition(4) Specify the transmission method(5) Enter the fax destination number

[2] Procedure< 1 > Maintenance date

(1) Select [Fax Setting] on the screen of the service mode.


8-56

(2) Select [Service Call Set] on the screen of the fax setting.

(3) Select [Maintenance Date] on the screen of the service call set.

(4) Select [Year], [Month], and [Day] on the screen of the maintenance date to specify the date for maintenance.

< 2 > Call number(1) Select [Fax Setting] on the screen of the service

mode.



8-57

(3) Select [Call Number] on the screen of the service call set.

(4) Enter [TEL#] on the screen of the call number to specify the phone number.

(5) Select [Com. Mode] on the screen of the call number to specify the communication mode.

< 3 > Transmission condition(1) Select [Fax Setting] on the screen of the service

mode.



8-58

(3) Select [TX Condition] of the service call set.

(4) Set [No. of print], [Toner empty], and [Drum life] ([ON] or [OFF]) on the screen of the transmission condition and touch [Enter].

(5) If you touch [ON] in the step (4), the screen will be for “presetting the number of prints.” Specify [Preset # of Print] on this screen and touch [Enter].

< 4 > Transmission method(1) Select [Fax Setting] on the screen of the service

mode.



8-59

(3) Select [Transmission Method] of the service call set.

(4) Select [Report] or [Data] on the screen of the transmission method and touch [Enter].

* Select [Report] for fax transmission and [Data] for data communication.

< 5 > Fax destinationEnters the fax number on a report when a notification to the call center fails.Example:

*** NOTICE ***

(THU) JUN 17 1999 16:35

Imaging Unit (I/U) is almost running out.Would you please replace the old I/U with a new one.

If you don't have any in stock, please send this sheetvia fax to the following address;

Our sales representaive will call you as soon as possible.Thank you in advance.

Fax to : (xxx) xxx-xxxxSerial # : xxxxxxxxxx


8-60

(1) Select [FAX Setting] on the screen of the service mode.


(3) Select [FAX destination] on the screen of the service call set.

(4) Enter the fax number on the screen of the fax destination.

<< 2 >> Terminal transmission

[1] FeaturesYou can receive data on the one touch dial or send the data stored in the system to the call center. When the service call is in the data transmission mode, the same call number will be used to make a terminal transmission to the call center. If the service call is in the fax transmission mode, you need to switch it to the data transmission mode and also change the call number. Always restore the service call setup after you complete a terminal transmission.


8-61

[2] Procedure(1) Select [FAX Setting] on the screen of the service

mode.

(2) Select [Terminal TX] on the screen of the fax setting.

(3) Enter [Function ID Code] and [Extended ID Code] on the screen of the terminal transmission and touch [Execute].

NoteEnter the destination number in <Call number> of <Service call setting> and set <Transmission method> in <Service call setting> to be “Report.”

(4) Start remote diagnostics on the screen of the remote diagnostics.


8-62

8-3-13. ADJUSTMENT FEATURES

[1] OverviewThe adjustment features will be used to do fine adjustments of the “scanner” and the “printer.” Follow the procedures described below to carry out checkups and adjustments.

Flow chart of the adjustment overview

First, check and adjust the printing section and then go to the document reading section.

<< 1 >> Printer Adjustment

[1] FeaturesAdjusts and prints the starting position of printing by setting the main scanner reference position and the sub scanner reference position.Proceed with this adjustment when an add-on cassette is installed or the printer head is replaced.

Set range:Main scanner : -4 mm to + 4 mm by 0.1 mm step Sub scanner (Di350f) : -6.08 mm (-19 units) to +6.08 mm (+19 units). by 0.32 mm step (Di250f) : -5.98 mm (-26 units) to +5.98 mm (+26 units). by 0.23 mm step

Start

Check and adjust the cassette record section

Check and adjust the document reading section

Check and adjust document detection

• Adjust printer registration (cassette)

• Zoom adjustment• Adjustment of Reading position

• Adjustment of document detection

Set the main scanner reference position (set value = 0 mm).

Printingdirection

- (Minus) + (plus)

- (Minus)

Setting the sub scanner reference position (set value = 0 line).

+ (plus)


8-63

Restrictions:• Without setting options, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 2 sided settings are invalid. • There is one setting for the sub scanner per fax system.

[2] How to check(1) Checking cassettes

Print an “Activity Report (TX)” from each installed cassette to check the recording positions.

Print the Activity Report (TX) to Letter size paper (Lengthwise).

(2) Checking 2 sided paperComplete the adjustment of paper feeding from cassette (the registration adjustment) and of the reading section of the Book scanner. Then check the 2 sided paper.

a. Print an Activity Report (TX) on a Letter size paper (Lengthwise).b. Make a single→2 sided copy using a blank paper as the document.c. Make a single→2 sided copy with the Book scanner using the Activity Report

(TX) printed in (a).d. Overlap the document and its copy to check their mismatch.

Refer to “Method of overlapping a document and its copy (position correction)” for this step.

e. Proceed to the adjustment to minimize mismatch.


8-64

[3] Detailed Flow Chart of Adjustment(1) 1 sided printing

End

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

YesNo

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Start

No

No

Print an Activity Report (TX) from 1st cassette

Sub scanner OK?

Carry out the sub scanner adjustment

Check sub scanner OK?

1st main scanner OK?

Carry out 1st main scanner adjustment

Check 1st main scanner OK?

Print an Activity Report (TX) from 2nd cassette

2nd cassette installed?

2nd main scanner OK?

Carry out 2nd main scanner adjustment

Check 2nd main scanner OK?

No

No

Yes

YesPrint an Activity Report (TX) from 3rd cassette

3rd cassette installed?

3rd main scanner OK?

Carry out 3rd main scanner adjustment

Check 3rd main scanner OK?

Print an Activity Report (TX) from 4th cassette

4th cassette installed?

4th main scanner OK?

Carry out 4th main scanner adjustment

Check 4th main scanner OK?

Print an Activity Report (TX) from 5th cassette

5th cassette installed?

5th main scanner OK?

Carry out 5th main scanner adjustment

Check 5th main scanner OK?


8-65

(2) 2 sided printing

[4] Procedures(1) Print an Activity Report (TX) on Letter size paper (Lengthwise).

NotePrint the report from a drawer whose registration is to be adjusted.

(2) Measure the size of the frame of the Activity Report (TX) (lengths a and b in the figure shown below).(The standard values are a=10mm and b=18.6mm. Adjust the size to obtain these numbers as close as possible.)

NoteThe value b for the sub scanner will be changed with the value of the [Service mode]-[Printer]-[Edge Erase]-[Leading edge]. The standard value b=18.6 mm corresponds to the “leading edge”=4 mm

END

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Start

Carry out adjustments for 1 sided printing

1 sided printing OK?

Carry out Book scanner adjustments

Check Book scanner OK?

Carry out adjustments for 2 sided printing

Check 2 sided printing OK?

a

b

Letter paper

Sub scanner

Main scanner

Printing directionon ACTIVITY REPORT (TX)


8-66

(3) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.)(4) Touch [Service Mode] after pressing <Utility>.

(5) Touch [Adjust].

(6) Touch [Printer].

(7) Select “Registration (FD)” and touch [END].

NoteNo need to specify it for each cassette. Adjust it for one cassette only.

(8) Type an adjusted value with the 10-key pad or the touch key and touch [END].

NoteCan change the sign of “+” or “-” with the <ID> key or the “ ” key.


8-67

(9) Select “Registration (CD)” and touch [END].

(10) Specify a cassette whose registration is to be adjusted. Type the adjusted value with the 10-key or the touch key.

NoteChange the sign of “+” or “-” with the <ID> key or the “ ” key.

(11)Touch [END].

<< 2 >> Scanner Adjustment

[1] Features< 1 > Scanner zoom adjustmentCan adjust the zoom values of the main and the sub scanners for ADF and BS independently.

Minus: zoom outPlus : zoom in

Adjustable range:ADF main scanner -1.0% to +1.0% by 0.1%ADF sub scanner -1.0% to +1.0% by 0.1%BS main scanner -1.0% to +1.0% by 0.1%BS sub scanner -1.0% to +1.0% by 0.1%

< 2 > Scanner registration adjustmentCan adjust the start position of the main and sub scanners for ADF and BS independently.

Adjusting reference position for main scanner (adjusted value 0 dot)

Scanningdirection

- (minus) + (plus)

- (minus)

(Document leading edge)

(Document trailing edge)

Adjusting reference position for sub scanner(adjusted value 0 line)

+ (plus)


8-68

Adjustable rangeADF main scanner -72 dots to +72 dots by 1 dotBS main scanner -72 dots to +72 dots by 1 dot (1mm = 24 dots)ADF sub scanner -127 lines to +127 lines by 1 lineBS sub scanner -24 lines to +127 lines by 1 line (1mm = 24 line)

NoteFirst proceed to the zoom adjustments and then go to the scanning position adjustments.

[2] Copy Book Zoom Ratio Adjustment

< 1 > How to checkMeasure the difference of the zoom ratios between a document and its copy. Type this measured value for this adjustment. We describe an example using an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List.

(1) Print an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List on Letter-size paper (Lengthwise).(2) For the main scanner, measure the length of the horizontal line c of the Activity

Report (TX) with a ruler. For the sub scanner, measure the length of the vertical line d of the Setting List with a ruler.

(3) Make each copy of the printouts obtained in the step (1) with the Book scanner.(4) Repeat the step (2) for the copies obtained in the step (3).(5) Calculate the zoom ratios.

Zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (4)) / (Measured value in step (2)) (6) Reference values for the zoom ratios

Main scanner : 100% ±1.0%Sub scanner : 100% ±1.0%If the zoom ratio is different from its reference value, adjust it following the flow chart of the adjustment. Try to obtain the closest value to [100% - the zoom ratio calculated in the step (5)].

Reference value c=188 mm Reference value d=185.2 mm

ACTIVITY REPORT (TX) SETTING LIST

SELF ABBR.#

ADMINISTRATOR MANAGEMENT INITIAL SETTING ID SELF ID :

The length to be measured as c

The

leng

th to

be

mea

sure

d as

d

PRINT PAPER

ROTATE PRINT :


8-69

< 2 > Flow chart for adjustment

[3] Copy ADF Zoom Ratio Adjustment

< 1 > How to checkMeasure the difference in the zoom ratios between a document and its copy. Type this measured value for this adjustment. We describe an example using an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List.

(1) Print an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List on Letter-size paper (Lengthwise).(2) For the main scanner, measure the length of the horizontal line c of the Activity

Report (TX) with a ruler. For the sub scanner, measure the length of the vertical line d of the Setting List with a ruler. (Similar to step (2) of [2] “Copy Book zoom ratio adjustment”)

(3) Make each copy of the printouts obtained in the step (1) with the ADF scanner.(4) Repeat the step (2) for the copies obtained in the step (3).(5) Calculate the zoom ratios.

Zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (4)) / (Measured value in step (2)) (6) Reference values for zoom ratios


End

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Start

Copy with Book scanner

Zoom ratio of Book main scanner OK?

Adjust zoom ratio of Book main scanner

Check Book zoom ratio of Book main scanner OK?

Zoom ratio of Book sub scanner OK?

Adjust zoom ratio of Book sub scanner

Check zoom ratio of Book sub scanner OK?


8-70


[4] Fax Book Zoom Ratio Adjustment

< 1 > How to check(1) Print an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List on Letter-size paper (Lengthwise).(2) Measure the zoom ratios of the Activity Report (TX) and the Setting List obtained in

the step (1). (Similar to [2] “Copy Book zoom ratio adjustment”, measure the lengths c and d with a ruler to obtain the quotients with the reference values of c=188 mm and d=185.2 mm).

(3) Make each copy of the printouts obtained in the step (1) with the Book scanner.(4) Measure the zoom ratios of these copies. (Similar to [2] “Print Book zoom ratio

adjustment”, measure the lengths c and d with a ruler to obtain the quotients with the measured values in the step (2)).

(5) Calculate the zoom ratios.First, calculate the zoom ratios for the copies:

Copy zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (4)) / (Measured value in step (2)).Next, calculate the zoom ratios for the printouts:

Printout zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (2)) / (Reference value in step (2)).The zoom ratio is given by

Zoom ratio = (Copy zoom ratio / Printout zoom ratio).(6) Reference values for zoom ratios


End

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Start

Copy with ADF scanner

Zoom ratio of ADF main scanner OK?

Adjust zoom ratio of ADF main scanner

Check zoom ratio of ADF main scanner OK?

Zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner OK?

Adjust zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner

Check zoom ratio of ADF sub scanner OK?


8-71


[5] Fax ADF Zoom Ratio Adjustment

< 1 > How to check(1) Print an Activity Report (TX) and a Setting List on Letter-size paper (Lengthwise).(2) Measure the zoom ratios of the Activity Report (TX) and the Setting List obtained in

the step (1). (Similar to [2] “Copy Book zoom ratio adjustment”, measure the lengths c and d with a ruler to obtain the quotients with the reference values of c=188 mm and d=185.2 mm).

(3) Make each copy of the printouts obtained in the step (1) with the ADF scanner.(4) Measure the zoom ratios of these copies. (Similar to [2] “Print Book zoom ratio

adjustment”, measure the lengths c and d with a ruler to obtain the quotients with the measured values in the step (2)).

(5) Calculate the zoom ratios.First, calculate the zoom ratios for the copies:

Copy zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (4)) / (Measured value in step (2)).Next, calculate the zoom ratios for the printouts:

Printout zoom ratio = (Measured value in step (2)) / (Reference value in step (2)).The zoom ratio is given by

Zoom ratio = (Copy zoom ratio / Printout zoom ratio).(6) Target values for zoom ratios


End

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Start




Check zoom ratio of Book main scanner OK?





8-72


[6] Book Scanning Position Adjustment

< 1 > How to check(1) Print an Activity Report (TX) on a Letter-size paper (Lengthwise).(2) Make a copy of the printout obtained in the step (1) with the Book scanner.(3) Overlap the copy with the document to check their mismatch.

Refer “How to overlap a copy with its document (position adjustment).”(4) Target values for the mismatch

Main scanner : ±2.0mmSub scanner : ±1.5mmIf the mismatch is different from its target value, adjust it following the flow chart shown below.

NoteFirst adjust the printer (Section 8-3-13) and the zoom ratio of the scanner. Then carry out this adjustment.

End

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Start









8-73


NoteAdjust both Book scanner copy and Book scanner fax.

< 3 > How to adjustRefer “How to overlap a copy with its document (position adjustment).”

[7] ADF Scanning Position Adjustment

< 1 > How to check(1) Print an Activity Report (TX) on a Letter-size paper (Lengthwise).(2) Make a copy of the printout obtained in the step (1) with the ADF scanner.(3) Overlap the copy with the document to check their mismatch.

Refer “How to overlap a copy with its document (position adjustment).”(4) Target values for the mismatch

Main scanner : ±2.0mmSub scanner : ±3.0mmIf the mismatch is different from its target value, adjust it following the flow chart shown below.

NoteFirst adjust the printer (Section 8-3-13) and the zoom ratio of the scanner. Then carry out this adjustment.

End

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Start




Check zoom ratio of Book main scanner OK?





8-74


NoteAdjust both ADF scanner copy and ADF scanner fax.

End

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Start









8-75

We will describe the method of overlapping a document with its copy.

(1) Overlapping document and its copy.Match the left upper corners of a document and its copy.

(2) Check lines for mismatches• The left side (vertical line) of the title frame for the main scanner.• The upper line (first line) of the title frame for the sub scanner.

[8] Procedures(1) Adjust the printer following Section 8-3-13.(2) Make a copy of an Activity Report (TX).(3) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.)(4) Touch [Service Mode] under <Utility>.

How to overlap a copy with its document (position adjustment)

Match

Match

Document

Copy

ACTIVITY REPORT (TX)

ACTIVITY REPORT (TX)

Check line for main scannermismatch

Check line for subscanner mismatchACTIVITY REPORT (TX)


8-76

(5) Touch [Adjust].

(6) Touch [Scanner].

(7) Select an item to be adjusted from ADF-Copy, ADF-Fax, Book Scanner-Copy, or Book Scanner-Fax. Then touch [Enter].Example: Touch [ADF-Copy] to display the

screen for the adjustment of the ADF sub scanner.

(8) Select an item to be adjusted and type a new adjusted value with the 10-key pad or the touch key. Repeat this step for another item. Touch [Enter].

<< 3 >> Document Size Detection

[1] OverviewAdjusts the document size detection sensors of Book scanner/ADFR automatically.

[2] Procedures(1) Go to the maintenance mode. (See Section 8-3-1.)(2) Touch [Service Mode] under <Utility>.


8-77

(3) Touch [Adjust].

(4) Touch [Scanner].

(5) Select an item to be adjusted from [Copy Detect Adj.] or [FAX Detect Adj.]. Then Touch [Enter].Example: Touch [FAX Detect Adj.] to display the

screen for the adjustment of the print document detection.

(6) Touch [Adjust].

(7) Load 5 sheets of A3 or 11x17" paper on the Book scanner.

(8) Close the cover of the Book scanner and touch [Start Key].

(9) The adjustment of the document size detection is carried out automatically. Once the adjustment is completed (the start LED turne green), the following screen will be displayed automatically.


8-78

(10)Touch [Enter].Repeat those steps for the copy document detection.Remove the reference papers from the Book scanner after completing both adjustments.

NoteThe values on this adjustment are active after turning the power switch OFF and then ON.• Display Contents: None• LED of <Start> key shows the products status

Red: printing Green: standby to start• Press <Start> key to start adjustment• When finishing adjustment LED color turns to Green.


8-79

8-4. SOFT SWITCH LIST8-4-1. SOFT SWITCHES DISCLOSED TO USERS

Utility

Printer (Refer to the PC printer instruction manual)

Report 1

Report 2

TX. Act. Report

RX. Act. Report

Bulletin Board

User List

Bulletin board number

F CODE

F CODE Password

Title

User 1

User 2

User Name

Access Number

User Number

F CODE

F CODE

F CODE Password

User TSI

One-touch List

Abbr. # List

FAX Program List

Relay Group List

Reg.

Abbr. #

One-touch

Index

FAX Program

Relay Group

Self-Abbr. #

Bull.

User Reg.

1 to 10Copy Programs

Remote Input Check (ON/OFF)

Remote Input Check (ON/OFF) MODE 027 Bit 2

Func.

Priority Screen (FAX/Auto/Copy)

Priority FAX Screen (One-touch/Abbr. #/10-Key Dialing/Index)

Received Document (Print/Forwrd/Print&Forwrd/Save to Box/Move)

MODE 402 Bit 1-0

MODE 018 Bit 5,4

Priority Contrast (Lighter-Normal-Darker) MODE 001 Bit 3-1

TX (Memory TX/Real Time) MODE 000 Bit 1

Report with Image (ON/OFF) MODE 023 Bit 3

TSI (Inside doc/Outside doc) MODE 000 Bit 5,4

TX 1

Priority Quality (Standard/Fine/Super Fine/Text+Photo/GSR/Super GSR)

MODE 001 Bit 7-4

TX Marker (Bottom/Top and Bottom/OFF)(optional)

TX Report (Output ON/If TX fail/Output OFF)

MODE 000 Bit 7,6

MODE 002 Bit 6,5

Remote Output Check (ON/OFF)

TX 2

Report


Maint.

Sound Vol.

Panel Cleaning

Time & Date

Toner Replenisher

Anti-dew

Administ.

Initial Setting

ID

Line

Func.

Buzzer Sound Volume

Alarm Sound Volume

Year, Month, Date, Hours, Minutes

TSI

Self-ID

Self-telephone #

Monitor Sound Volume

MODE 415 Bit 7-5

MODE 415 Bit 4-2

MODE 416 Bit 7-5

Manage

Line Type (DP20pps/DP10pps/PB) MODE 006 Bit 7-5PSTN1

PSTN/Ext Line Switch (Extension/PSTN) MODE 006 Bit 4

MODE 001 Bit 3-1

Priority Screen (FAX/Auto/Copy) MODE 402 Bit 1-0

MODE 018 Bit 5,4

Administrator Number

Comm. Password (00 to 99)

User Management Mode (Limited/Open)

Incomplete TX hold(10 Minutes to 72 Hours: 1 Hour) MODE 004 Bit 3-0

MODE 000 Bit 1

Password TX (ON/OFF) MODE 000 Bit 2

MODE 000 Bit 5,4

MODE 001 Bit 7-4

MODE 000 Bit 7,6

TX Setting

TX Set 1

TX Set 2

TX Set 3

Continue tonext page

Relay-station Print (ON/OFF) MODE 002 Bit 0

Line Selection (Auto/Manual) MODE 006 Bit 1

MODE 011 Bit 7-5PSTN2

MODE 011 Bit 4

Utility

Priority FAX Screen (One-touch/Abbr. #/10-Key Dialing/Index)

Received Document (Print/Forwrd/Print&Forwrd/Save to Box)

Priority Contrast (Lighter-Normal-Darker)

Priority Quality (Standard/Fine/Super Fine/Text+Photo/GSR/Super GSR)

TX (Memory TX/Real-Time)

TSI (Inside doc/Outside doc)

TX Marker (Bottom/Top and Bottom/OFF)

8-80


8-81

RX Setting

Report set

RX 1

RX 2

Paper

Reception Mode (Auto/Manual)

No. of RX Call Rings (1 to 9)

Password Reception (ON/OFF)

LongDOC

MODE 004 Bit7-4

MODE 000 Bit2

Default Level (Lighter/Normal/Darker) MODE 410 Bit 7,6,3-0

"Small" Originals (ON/OFF) MODE 424 Bit 3

Auto Scale (ON/OFF) MODE 403 Bit 7

Mixed Original Detection (ON/OFF) MODE 400 Bit 6

If no paper matching up to TX doc. size(Paper Priority/Cassette Priority)

MODE 008 Bit7

Print Paper Select (Standard/Width Priority/Constant Width Mode)

MODE 008 Bit 6-3

Unselectable Cassette MODE 037 Bit 7-3

Long Document (Reduction/Cut Off) MODE 007 Bit 1

Reduction (60/65/80/85/90/95/100%) MODE 007 Bit 4-2

Cut off Length (0/8/12/14/18/20/24mm) MODE 007 Bit 7-5

2-TO-1 RX (ON/OFF) MODE 030 Bit 4

Rotate Print (Sort ON/Sort OFF/RotationOFF) MODE 030 Bit 6,5

4-TO-1 Copy Order / MODE 409 Bit 7,6

Intelligent Sorting (ON/OFF) MODE 412 Bit 3

Density Priority (Auto/Manual)(Text/Photo/Text+Photo)

· MODE 409 Bit 5· MODE 409 Bit 4-1

Output Priority (Non-Sort/Sort/Group) MODE 412 Bit 7-4

Copy Setting

Scan

Print

Sort

Func.

Memory Recall (ON/OFF)

Continue tonext page

Continued fromprevious page

MODE 400 Bit 7

Auto Paper/Auto Size(Auto Paper/Auto Size/Manual) MODE 402 Bit 4,3

Orig. → Copy (1-Sided → 2-Sided/2-Sided → 2-Sided/1-Sided → 1-Sided)

MODE 402 Bit 7-5

Auto-reset (ON/OFF) MODE 403 Bit 0

MODE 023 Bit 3

MODE 002 Bit 6,5

Activity Report (Output ON/Output OFF) MODE 002 Bit 7

Memory Cleared Report (Output ON/Output OFF)

MODE 002 Bit 3

Report Screen (ON/OFF)

TX Report (Output ON/If TX fail/Output OFF)

1 23 4

1 32 4

Print Set Default Print Paper (Top cassette)

Special Paper(Normal/Not for 2 Sided Recycled/Special)

Print Exposure (-2 to 0 to 2)

Output Tray (optional)

MODE 408 Bit 7-4

MODE 411 Bit 7,2-0

MODE 413 Bit 5,4,2-0


8-82

Continued fromprevious page

User Reg.

User 1 User Name

Access Number

User Number

User Account

User selection No. of print

Pages of TX Doc.

User 2 User TSI

Max. Print Page (0 to 999, 999 pages)

F CODE F CODE

F CODE Password

Remote Input Check (ON/OFF) MODE 027 Bit 2

Total Page

Counter Total

Size

Backside Total

Backside Size

User Total

Page FAX Print

Copy Print

Report Print

TX

PC Print

Print Limit

User Acc. Report

User List

Setting List

Rep. Print

Auto-reset (1 to 240 Minutes)

Pre-heat (15 to 240 Minutes)

Heater OFF (15 to 240 Minutes: 60 Minutes)

LCD Back-light OFF (1 to 240 Minutes)

MODE 404 Bit 7-0

MODE 405 Bit 7-0

MODE 406 Bit 7-0

MODE 407 Bit 7-0

Power Save

Anti-dew


8-4-2. LIST OF DEFAULTS

Note* in the remark indicates a mode that has items opened to users.

MODE Default Remark

000 30 TX Marker, TSI, Password, Memory TX *

001 14 FAX quality, Density *

002 AB Report *

003 33 Line monitor, Forward RX (PSTN1) *

004 16 # of ringers, Memory time *

005 20 # of redialings

006 32 DP speed, PB switch, Estimated connection time (PSTN1) *

007 B8 Print range *

008 00 Select print paper *

009 1A Communication mode *

010 00 (Undefined)

011 32 DP speed, PBX switch, Estimated connection time (PSTN2) *

012 C0 Screen: display illustration, #, Input default cassette size at Power source on

013 30 Auto-mode screen

014 00 Redialing interval

015 00 (Undefined)

016 00 (Undefined)

017 00 (Undefined)

018 00 Destination displaying screen *

019 00 (Undefined)

020 40 Display report

021 00 Display symbol rate

022 02 FAX memory nearly full capacity

023 FE Set margins for report image *

024 81 Display forward function button, No receiving by other users

025 7F Various service calls

026 DE Service call, Remote maintenance

027 24 Display ID, Secured comm., F code *

028 63 Remote print protocol, # of remote multi-copies

029 00 (Undefined)

030 31 Rotate print, 2-to-1, print paper selection restriction *

031 80Margins for multi-sheet report image margin, Margins for output format ofreport image

032 71 Detect short doc. jamming, FAX photo/txt mixed mode

033 14 Draft printing mode and level

034 02 Cut print paper leading edge, Overlapped printing

035 03 RX by memory

036 00 (Undefined)

8-83


MODE Default Remark

037 F8 Select FAX +paper cassette *

038 00 Turn on print lamp for out-of print paper

039 00 (Undefined)

040 FA 2-dim coding, T.6 coding, JBIG, V34JBIG

041 40 ECM

042 3F Redialing interval

043 80 # of resending doc., Redialing non-answered call

044 A0 RTN sending error, TCF sending, T1 timer, T4 timer

045 00 (Undefined)

046 00 (Undefined)

047 88 V34 fallback tolerance

048 C6 Set up MODEM standard

049 OD Transmission speed upper limit (TX)

050 0D Transmission speed upper limit (RX)

051 20 Declare RX print paper size

052 00 Relay Transmission (restricted/unrestricted)

053 00 (Undefined)

054 0A History control of V.34 auto dialing, Demodulation method

055 0C ANSam sending

056 00 (Undefined)

057 00 (Undefined)

058 00 (Undefined)

059 00 (Undefined)

060 00 (Undefined)

061 7F (Undefined)

062 00 (Undefined)

063 00 (Undefined)

064 A8 (Undefined)

065 03 (Undefined)

066 03 (Undefined)

067 03 (Undefined)

068 80 (Undefined)

069 00 (Undefined)

070 00 (Undefined)

071 00 (Undefined)

072 00 (Undefined)

073 00 (Undefined)

074 00 (Undefined)

075 00 (Undefined)

076 00 (Undefined)

077 00 (Undefined)

078 00 (Undefined)

8-84


8-85

MODE Default Remark

079 00 (Undefined)

080 00 (Undefined)

081 00 (Undefined)

082 28 Detect busy tone, Detect line disconnection (inverted polarity) (PSTN1)

083 22 DP steady current time (PSTN1)

084 54 DP make rate, PB sending level, PB detection method (PSTN1)

085 80 TX level (PSTN1)

086 40 RX attenuator (PSTN1)

087 90 Detect continuous ringer, Ringer detection frequency (PSTN1)

088 40 Process detection time out of second ringing sound (PSTN1)

089 00 Sending method, Prefix # (PSTN1) *

090 00 (Undefined)

091 00 (Undefined)

092 70 Sending echo protection tone, switch carrier frequency (PSTN1)

093 48 CED, Receive command echo

094 0C AGC lock (PSTN1)

095 20 Digital TX/RX cable equalizer (PSTN1)

096 14 CI signal sending time (PSTN1)

097 14 TCF/NTCF sending level down, V.34 symbol rate (PSTN1)

098 46 Initial time of sending CM signal, EQM threshold value (PSTN1)

099 88 Symbol speed threshold value (PSTN1)

100 00 (Undefined)

101 00 (Undefined)

102 00 (Undefined)

103 00 (Undefined)

104 00 (Undefined)

105 00 (Undefined)

106 00 (Undefined)

107 00 (Undefined)

108 00 (Undefined)

109 00 (Undefined)

110 00 (Undefined)

111 00 (Undefined)

112 28 Detect busy tone, Detect line disconnection (inverted polarity) (PSTN2)

113 22 DP steady current time (PSTN2)

114 54 DP make rate, PB sending level, PB detection method (PSTN2)

115 80 TX level (PSTN2)

116 40 RX attenuator (PSTN2)

117 90 Detect continuous ringer, Ringer detection frequency (PSTN2)

118 40 Process detection time out of second ringing sound (PSTN2)

119 00 Sending method, Prefix # (PSTN2) *

120 00 (Undefined)


8-86

MODE Default Remark

121 00 (Undefined)

122 70 Sending echo protection tone, switch carrier frequency (PSTN2)

123 48 CED, Receive command echo

124 0C AGC lock (PSTN2)

125 20 Digital TX/RX cable equalizer (PSTN2)

126 14 CI signal sending time (PSTN2)

127 14 TCF/NTCF sending level down, V.34 symbol rate (PSTN2)

128 46 Initial time of sending CM signal, EQM threshold value (PSTN2)

129 88 Symbol speed threshold value (PSTN2)

130 00 (Undefined)

131 00 (Undefined)

132 00 (Undefined)

133 00 (Undefined)

134 00 (Undefined)

135 00 (Undefined)

136 00 (Undefined)

137 00 (Undefined)

138 00 (Undefined)

139 00 (Undefined)

140 00 (Undefined)

141 00 (Undefined)

142 00 (Undefined)

143 02 (Undefined)

144 07 (Undefined)

145 07 (Undefined)

146 01 (Undefined)

147 07 (Undefined)

148 00 (Undefined)

149 10 (Undefined)

150 07 (Undefined)

151 20 (Undefined)

152 80 (Undefined)

153 00 (Undefined)

154 00 (Undefined)

155 00 (Undefined)

156 00 (Undefined)

157 00 (Undefined)

158 00 (Undefined)

159 00 (Undefined)

160 00 (Undefined)

161 00 (Undefined)

162 00 (Undefined)


8-87

MODE Default Remark

163 00 (Undefined)

164 00 (Undefined)

165 80 (Undefined)

166 40 (Undefined)

167 00 (Undefined)

168 40 (Undefined)

169 00 (Undefined)

170 00 (Undefined)

171 00 (Undefined)

172 70 (Undefined)

173 48 (Undefined)

174 0C (Undefined)

175 20 (Undefined)

176 14 (Undefined)

177 14 (Undefined)

178 46 (Undefined)

179 88 (Undefined)

180 00 (Undefined)

181 00 (Undefined)

182 00 (Undefined)

183 00 (Undefined)

184 00 (Undefined)

185 00 (Undefined)

186 00 (Undefined)

187 00 (Undefined)

188 00 (Undefined)

189 00 (Undefined)

190 00 Restrict SF/SSF comm.

191 00 (Undefined)

192 C0 Order of displaying year to date

193 33 (Undefined)

194 31 (Undefined)

195 30 (Undefined)

196 32 (Undefined)

197 00 (Undefined)

198 00 (Undefined)

199 00 (Undefined)

200 00 (Undefined)

201 00 (Undefined)

202 00 (Undefined)

203 00 (Undefined)

204 00 (Undefined)


8-88

MODE Default Remark

205 00 (Undefined)

206 00 (Undefined)

207 00 (Undefined)

208 00 (Undefined)

209 00 (Undefined)

210 00 (Undefined)

211 00 (Undefined)

212 00 (Undefined)

213 00 (Undefined)

214 00 (Undefined)

215 00 (Undefined)

216 00 (Undefined)

217 00 (Undefined)

218 00 (Undefined)

219 00 (Undefined)

220 00 (Undefined)

221 00 (Undefined)

222 00 (Undefined)

223 00 (Undefined)

224 00 (Undefined)

225 00 (Undefined)

226 00 (Undefined)

227 00 (Undefined)

228 00 (Undefined)

229 00 (Undefined)

230 00 (Undefined)

231 00 (Undefined)

232 00 (Undefined)

233 00 (Undefined)

234 00 (Undefined)

235 00 (Undefined)

236 00 (Undefined)

237 00 (Undefined)

238 00 (Undefined)

239 00 (Undefined)

240 00 (Undefined)

241 00 (Undefined)

242 00 (Undefined)

243 00 (Undefined)

244 00 (Undefined)

245 00 (Undefined)

246 00 (Undefined)


8-89

MODE Default Remark

247 00 (Undefined)

248 00 (Undefined)

249 00 (Undefined)

250 00 (Undefined)

251 00 (Undefined)

252 00 (Undefined)

253 00 (Undefined)

254 00 (Undefined)

255 00 (Undefined)

256 00 (Undefined)

257 00 (Undefined)

258 00 (Undefined)

259 00 (Undefined)

260 C1 (Undefined)

261 85 (Undefined)

262 B4 (Undefined)

263 90 (Undefined)

264 FF (Undefined)

265 FF (Undefined)

266 FF (Undefined)

267 FF (Undefined)

268 FF (Undefined)

269 FF (Undefined)

270 C1 (Undefined)

271 85 (Undefined)

272 D4 (Undefined)

273 90 (Undefined)

274 FF (Undefined)

275 FF (Undefined)

276 FF (Undefined)

277 FF (Undefined)

278 FF (Undefined)

279 FF (Undefined)

280 C1 (Undefined)

281 85 (Undefined)

282 D4 (Undefined)

283 90 (Undefined)

284 FF (Undefined)

285 FF (Undefined)

286 FF (Undefined)

287 FF (Undefined)

288 FF (Undefined)


8-90

MODE Default Remark

289 FF (Undefined)

290 00 (Undefined)

291 00 (Undefined)

292 00 (Undefined)

293 00 (Undefined)

294 00 (Undefined)

295 00 (Undefined)

296 00 (Undefined)

297 00 (Undefined)

298 00 (Undefined)

299 00 (Undefined)

300 00 REV soft switch for maintenance






306 00 (Undefined)

307 00 (Undefined)

308 00 (Undefined)

309 00 (Undefined)

310 00 (Undefined)

311 00 (Undefined)

312 00 (Undefined)

313 00 (Undefined)

314 00 (Undefined)

315 00 (Undefined)

316 00 (Undefined)

317 00 (Undefined)

318 00 (Undefined)

319 00 (Undefined)

320 00 (Undefined)

321 00 (Undefined)

322 00 (Undefined)

323 00 (Undefined)

324 00 (Undefined)

325 00 (Undefined)

326 00 (Undefined)

327 00 (Undefined)

328 00 (Undefined)

329 00 (Undefined)

330 00 (Undefined)


8-91

MODE Default Remark

331 00 (Undefined)

332 00 (Undefined)

333 00 (Undefined)

334 00 (Undefined)

335 00 (Undefined)

336 00 (Undefined)

337 00 (Undefined)

338 00 (Undefined)

339 00 (Undefined)

340 00 (Undefined)

341 00 (Undefined)

342 00 (Undefined)

343 00 (Undefined)

344 00 (Undefined)

345 00 (Undefined)

346 00 (Undefined)

347 00 (Undefined)

348 00 (Undefined)

349 00 (Undefined)

350 00 (Undefined)

351 00 (Undefined)

352 00 (Undefined)

353 00 (Undefined)

354 00 (Undefined)

355 00 (Undefined)

356 00 (Undefined)

357 00 (Undefined)

358 00 (Undefined)

359 00 (Undefined)

360 00 (Undefined)

361 00 (Undefined)

362 00 (Undefined)

363 00 (Undefined)

364 00 (Undefined)

365 00 (Undefined)

366 00 (Undefined)

367 00 (Undefined)

368 00 (Undefined)

369 00 (Undefined)

370 00 (Undefined)

371 00 (Undefined)

372 00 (Undefined)


8-92

MODE Default Remark

373 00 (Undefined)

374 00 (Undefined)

375 00 (Undefined)

376 00 (Undefined)

377 00 (Undefined)

378 00 (Undefined)

379 00 (Undefined)

380 00 (Undefined)

381 00 (Undefined)

382 00 (Undefined)

383 00 (Undefined)

384 00 (Undefined)

385 00 (Undefined)

386 00 (Undefined)

387 00 (Undefined)

388 00 (Undefined)

389 00 (Undefined)

390 00 (Undefined)

391 00 (Undefined)

392 00 (Undefined)

393 00 (Undefined)

394 00 (Undefined)

395 00 (Undefined)

396 00 (Undefined)

397 00 (Undefined)

398 00 (Undefined)

399 00 (Undefined)

400 00 Copy, Set up memory recall, Priority doc. mixed mode *

401 08 (Undefined)

402 22Copy, Priority doc. mode, Priority copy mode, Automatic function priority mode, Priority application *

403 01 Copy, Draft print zoom ratio, Auto-reset by user

404 06 Auto-reset time

405 0F Pre-heat time

406 00 Auto-Power source off time

407 01 Panel off time *

408 00Copy, Default feeder (print paper) *

409 08 Copy, Default 4-to-1 print order, Exposure level, Doc. Level *

410 44 Copy, AE density level, Priority manual density level

411 00 Copy, Sign bit, Adjust print density *

412 08 Copy, Auto-sort mode, Auto-punch mode, sort/nonsort *

413 04 Specify output bin *


8-93

MODE Default Remark

414 70 Reserve memory copy

415 6CSet sound vol. (buzzer & alarm) *

416 60 Set sound vol. (monitor), No auto-Power source off *

417 63 Set max # of copies

418 00 (Undefined)

419 00 (Undefined)

420 00 (Undefined)

421 20 (Undefined)

422 08 Total counter, Size counter, Copy kit counter

423 48 Copy, Key counter, Vendor mode, Doc. size OP

424 00 Copy, Metrics/inch mix, Copy mode, Small doc. *

425 00 Copy, Adjust quality mode

426 00 (Undefined)

427 00 (Undefined)

428 00 (Undefined)

429 00 (Undefined)


8-94

8-4-3. LIST OF SOFT SWITCHESThe tables below describe the soft switches of this system.✩ mark shows a default value.

Note• The features with (*) are settable by users.• The feature with [**] (bit 1) is available only in a system with a multi-port option.

MODE 000 Factory setting bit : 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 30)

Bit Feature Logic Meaning Description

7 Specifies whether TX marker is returned to ON or OFF after completing operations. *

0 ✩

1NoYes

6 Select position of TX marker. *

0 ✩

1

Leading & trailing edges of doc.Only trailing edge of doc.

5 Specifies whether printing TSI on transmitted document is returned to ON or OFF after completing operations. *

01 ✩

NoYes

4 Select position of TSI. * 01 ✩

Outside doc.Inside doc.

3 Specifies whether confirming group password at TX is returned to ON or OFF after completing operations. *

0 ✩

1NoYes

2 Confirm group password at RX. *

0 ✩

1NoYes

1 Specifies which TX method is returned to ON, memory-stored TX or nonstorage TX after completing operations. *

0 ✩

1Memory-storedNon-stored

Memory-stored TX includes quick memory TX.

0 0 ✩

1 Not availableFixed to “0”


8-95



7654 Specify which image quality is returned to be assigned after completing operations. *

00000001✩

0010001101000101011001111000Others

Not availableStandardFineNot availableSuperfineGSRNot availableSuper GSRText + photoNot available

321 Specify which density is returned to be assigned after FAX communication. *

000001010✩

011100

Others

Much lighterLighterNormalDarkerMuch darkerNot available

0 0 ✩


MODE 002 Factory setting bit : 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 (Hex : AB)


7 Print communication activity report automatically for every 50 activities. *

01 ✩

NoYes

“No” means manual print.

65 Select when a result report should be printed. *

0001 ✩

1011

No printPrint for incomplete TXAlways printNot available

Specifies result reports for TX, incomplete TX, or broadcasting TX.

4 0 ✩


3 Print memory clear report. * 01 ✩

NoYes

2 0 ✩


1 Print relay result report. 01 ✩

NoYes

0 Select relay-station print at relay TX. *

01 ✩

NoYes


8-96



76 00 ✩

Others Not availableFixed to “00”

5 Monitor line. (PSTN1) * 01 ✩

NoYes

4 Forwarding reception. (PSTN1) *

01 ✩

NoYes

3210 0011✩




7654 Select # of rings for automatic reception. *

00000001✩

00100011010001010110011110001001Others

Not available123456789Not available

Specifies number of rings (calling beeps) before the system starts answering an incoming call.

3210 Selects holding time of incompleted TX document in memory. *

0000

000100100011010001010110✩

011110001001101010111100Others

0

10 min20 min30 min40 min50 min1 hr2 hr4 hr8 hr12 hr24 hr72 hrNot available

IC memory deviceDelete file from memory immediately (No redialing function)


Note• If the first stage sets [0000], the system proceeds to the second stage without the first

stage after 10 minutes.• If the first and second stages set [0000], the auto redialing function will not be performed.



7654 Select number of redialing 1.(Number of auto redialing at1st stage)

000000010010✩

0011010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111

0123456789101112131415

Specifies the number ofredialing with the intervalspecified by “Selectredialing interval 1 (MODE042 Bit 7-4).”

3210 Select number of redialing 2.(Number of auto redialing atthe 2nd stage)

0000✩

000100100011010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111

0123456789101112131415

Once redialing set by“Select number of redialing1 (MODE 005 Bit 7-4)”, thesystem redials the numberof times specified by thissoft switch.

Redialing interval follows“Select redialing interval 2(MODE 042 Bit 3-0)” at thefirst time and then follows“Select redialing interval 1(MODE 042 Bit 7-4)” fromthe second time.

8-97


8-98



76 Select dial line speed (DP speed). (PSTN1) *

00 ✩

011011

10 pps20 pps16 ppsNot available

• This is valid only when “Switch PB/DP (MODE 006 Bit5)” sets DP.

• 16pps is unavailable to users.

5 Select a line type (tone or pulse) for calling (switch PB/DP). (PSTN1) *

01 ✩

DPPB

• DP : pulse• PB : tone

4 Select standard phone line connected with the system (extension/external line connection). (PSTN1) *

0

1 ✩

Extension connectionExternal line connection

32 00 ✩


1 Select PSTN port automatically. Specify how to dial standard phone lines. **

01 ✩

NoYes

When the system has 2 PSTN lines and one of them is used, you can use the other line by selecting “Yes.”If you have only 1 PSTN line or wish to use 2 lines for the extension and the external lines separately, select “No.”

0 Estimated connection time. (PSTN1)

0 ✩

117.5 sec52.5 sec


8-99

MODE 007 Factory setting bit : 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 (Hex : B8)


765 Select upper limit of cut-off length after printing:When a received document is longer than the print paper and if the excess length is shorter than that specified here, it is cut off. If it is longer than that specified value with these bits, it is split into multiple pages. This feature is enabled when the following 2 conditions are satisfied: • When printing a received

document• When bit 1 of this mode is

1 *

000001010011100101✩

110111

08 mm12 mm14 mm18 mm20 mm24 mmNot available

432 Select upper limit of reduction ratio of received document: When a received document is longer that the print paper, it will be reduced to fit the paper with the upper limit specified with these bits. This feature is enabled when the following 2 conditions are satisfied:• When printing a received

document• When bit 1 of this mode is 0Example: The reduction is 100-90% when “90%” is specified. *

000001010011100101110✩

111

100 %95 %90 %85 %80 %65 %60 %Not available

Reduction will not be done if a received document is still longer than the paper for a specified reduction.

1 Select cut off/reduction of received document:This bit specifies cutting off or reducing a received document that is longer than the print paper. (This feature is enabled when printing a received document.) *

0 ✩

1ReductionCut off

This bit determines that the received document will be cut off with “Select upper limit of cut off length after printing (MODE 007 Bit7-5)” or reduced with “Select upper limit of reduction ratio of received document (MODE 007 Bit 4-2).”

0 0 ✩



8-100



7 Where to detect papers.(Valid only when printing a received document) *

0 ✩

1

From paperFrom cassette

Selected by paper size.Selected by drawer.

6543 Select size of print paper for received document.(Valid only when printing a received document) *

0000✩

0001001000110100

0101

0110

0111

1000

Others

Std method 1Std method 2Std method 3Std method 4No wider width 1No wider width 2No wider width 3No wider width 4Same width onlyNot available

“Std method” determines an appropriate paper for the length and the width of a print image.Method 1: Same width

and no reduction.

Method 2: Same width and minimum margin.

Method 3: No reduction without considering width of paper.

Method 4: Minimum margin without considering width of paper.

“No wider width” will not take printer paper wider than the print image.No WiderWidth 1: Same width and

no reduction.Width 2: Same width and

minimum margin.Width 3: No reduction

without considering width of paper.

Width 4: Minimum margin without considering width of paper.

“Same width only” selects paper with the same width as the print image.

210 000✩



8-101

MODE 009 Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 (Hex : 1A)


765 Select default display of communication mode: Specifies what to display at first as communication mode. *

000✩

011Others

G3-1G3-2Not available

Returns “Communication mode” to its default after each operation.This soft switch is unavailable in some systems:• With single port (includ-

ing pseudo-multi port)G3 type:all are unavailable• With multi portPSTN+PSTN: G3-1, G3-2 available

43210

11010✩




76 Select dial line speed (DP speed).(PSTN2) *

00 ✩

011011

10 pps20 pps16 ppsNot available

• This is valid only when “Switch PB/DP (MODE 006 Bit5)” selects DP.

• 16pps is unavailable to users.

5 Select a line type (tone or pulse) for calling (switch PB/DP). (PSTN2) *

01 ✩

DPPB

• DP : pulse• PB : tone

4 Select standard phone line connected with system (extension/external lineconnection). (PSTN2) *

0

1 ✩

Extension connectionExternal line connection

3 0 ✩


2 Perform F-Net Silent RX.(PSTN2) *

0 ✩

1

No(No contract)Yes(Contract)

1 0 ✩


0 Estimated connection time. (PSTN2)

0 ✩

117.5 sec52.5 sec


8-102

MODE 012 Factory setting bit : 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : C0)


7 Display illustrations. 01 ✩

NoYes

6 Select function of # key on one-touch screen.

0

1 ✩

Full dialing numberAbbreviated number

5 Select how to input cassette size when Power switch is on.

0 ✩

1

Displays size input screen if any change is detected.Always display size input screen without time out.

43210

00000✩




765 Select numbers of fax one-touches and of print programs on auto-mode screen.

One-touch

Print pro-gram

000001✩

010011100101

543210

012345

Others Not available

43 Determine input of numbers of copies or of FAX destinations on auto-mode screen.

0001 ✩

10Others

1 digit2 digit3 digitNot available

Regards these digits as an input of number of copies.

210 000✩



8-103



765 Select redialing interval for resending document.

000✩

001010011100

Others

10 sec30 sec60 sec120 sec180 secNot available

43210

00000✩




76 00 ✩


54 Select destination screen: Displays screen of destination when document is loaded in FAX mode. *

00 ✩

0110

11

One-touch 1st screenNot availableDial number screenIndex screen

3210 0000✩



8-104



7 Displays # of reports. 0 ✩

1NoYes

“Yes” displays # of pages on phone line in addition to ordinary # of papers.

6 Trace protocol. 01 ✩

NoYes

“Yes” prints result of protocol trace after completing communication. If next communication is proceeded before this printing, information on previous communication protocol will be deleted.

5 Display number of error lines/transmission speed.

0 ✩

1NoYes

“Yes” displays # of error lines/transmission speed on panel and outputs port for auto checking.

4 Select monitor interval for line.

0 ✩

1Phase AAll phases

Specifies interval for monitoring phone lines for G3 communication.

3 Display error codes.(Panel, report)

0 ✩

1NoYes

“Yes” displays error codes (6 digit) on panel and in report.

210 000✩




76543

00000✩


2 Display symbol rate. 0 ✩

1NoYes

Symbol rates are 2400/2743/2800/3000/3200/3429. Rate of 2743 is not actually used.

1 Observe EQM. Check modem & line statuses

0 ✩

1NoYes

0 Observe probing information. Check modem & line statuses

0 ✩

1NoYes


8-105



76543

00000✩


2 FAX memory nearly full to its capacity

0 ✩

1256 KB512 KB

“Memory nearly full” means that unused memory becomes less than a specified capacity.This soft switch specifies threshold capacity.

1 Restrict parameters of memory stored TX.

01 ✩

NoYes

If “Yes” is selected, then all relay transmissions will proceed with A4 size when function of remote side is unknown (not learned/full dialing).For learned destination without size of 16×15.4, TX will be done with 8×7.7.

0 0 ✩



8-106

MODE 023 Factory setting bit : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 (Hex : FE)


7654 Select number of errors in redialing terminal of data type.

0000000100100011010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111✩

0123456789101112131415

3 Set margins for report image.* 01 ✩

NoYes

Specifies whether margin process will be proceeded for report with image margins.

21 11 ✩


0 Select memory over transmission mode.

0 ✩

1

Transmission continuedTransmission disconnected

Specifies whether stored pages will be transmitted if memory is full while scanning documents.



76 Allow G4 RX. 10 ✩


5 Display Administrator/User passwords.

0 ✩

1NoYes

“No” displays “ * .”

4 Display forwarding function button.

0 ✩

1NoYes

3 Select alarm buzzer pattern. 0 ✩

1Pattern 0Pattern 1

21 00 ✩


0 Receive by other user. 01 ✩

NoYes


8-107

NoteThis is valid only when “Allow service call? (MODE 026 Bit 6)” is set to “Yes.”

MODE 025 Factory setting bit : 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (Hex : 7F)


7 Service call for printer option failure.

0 ✩

1NoYes

6 Service call for printer failure. 01 ✩

NoYes

Specifies whether service call will be made for printer failure. Note

5 Service call for exceeding specified number of papers.

01 ✩

NoYes

Specifies whether service call will be made for exceeding specified # of papers. Note

4 Service call for scanner failure.

01 ✩

NoYes

Set whether service call will be made for scanner failure. Note

3 Service call for reaching nearly life cycles of toner A and/or drum A.

01 ✩

NoYes

Set whether service call will be made for reaching near life cycle of toner A and/or drum A. Note

2 Service call for reaching life times of toner A and/or drum A.

01 ✩

NoYes

Set whether service call will be made for reaching life cycle of toner A and/or drum A. Note

1 Service call for reaching nearly life cycles of toner B and/or drum B.

01 ✩

NoYes

Set whether service call will be made for reaching near life cycle of toner B and/or drum B. Note

0 Service call for reaching life times of toner B and/or drum B.

01 ✩

NoYes

Set whether service call will be made for reaching life cycle of toner B and/or drum B. Note


8-108

MODE 026 Factory setting bit : 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 (Hex : DE)


7 Allow remote maintenance. 01 ✩

NoYes

6 Allow service calls. 01 ✩

NoYes

5 0 ✩


4 Print incomplete TX of service call for notifying consumables.

01 ✩

NoYes

3 Service call for empty toner. 01 ✩

NoYes

2 Service call for reaching life cycle of drum.

01 ✩

NoYes

1 Notify out-of-consumables. 01 ✩

NoYes

0 0 ✩



8-109



76 Select ID display order:Specifies priority order of destination ID for printing report/ displaying on screen.

00 ✩

011011

Pattern 1Pattern 2Pattern 3Not available

Pattren1:1→2→3→4→5→6 2:4→5→6→1→2→3 3:4→5→1→2→3→6

1: Name registered in one-touch button

2: Destination # registered in one-touch button

3: Phone # of destination dialed

4: Destination phone # by TSI

5: Extended ID6: Standard ID (# of TSI/

CIG)

5 Display anti-dew button. 01 ✩

NoYes

4 Process drum dry button. 0 ✩

1NoYes

3 Secure comm. with N-method 0 ✩

1NoYes

2 F code function. * 01 ✩

NoYes

Need for G3 and G3-i communications.

1 Assign non-reduction TX for 2-to-1 scan.

0 ✩

1NoYes

Specifies whether 2-to-1 page TX will be sent by A4 always or by appropriate size to receiver’s capability.

0 0 ✩



8-110



7 Select remote copy protocol. 0 ✩

1F codeN method

Fixed to “0”, valid at TX

6543210

Select restricted number of prints of remote multi copy.

0000000

0000001

1100011✩

Others

Not available(same as 1 print)1 print

99 copiesNot available(same as 99 copies)



7 0 ✩


65 Rotate print of FAX RX. * 00

01 ✩

10

11

No rotate printRotate print (without sort)Rotate print (with sort)Not available

“Sort” means “alternate sort” here.

4 Receive 2-to-1 page. (Valid for RX print) *

01 ✩

NoYes

32 Restrict print paper selection: Specifies unselectable paper (including orientation) for FAX.

00 ✩

01

1011

No B5(L), A5 (L), and postcardNo A5(L) and postcardNo postcardNot available

10 Assign mixed mm/inch papers.(Priority Set)(Valid for RX print)

00 ✩

01

1011

Select mm onlySelect inch onlySelect bothNot available


8-111



7 Margin process for multiple copies of report with image margins.

01 ✩

NoYes

Valid when “Set margins for report image? (MODE 23 Bit 3)” is set to “Yes.”

6 Assign output format for image margin report.

0 ✩

1

Same as regular reportAlways A5 format

1: Always output with A5 format regardless of the set status of paper. This is valid when a cassette has A4C papers.

543210

000000✩




7 0 ✩


6 Detect jamming of short doc. 01 ✩

NoYes

“Yes” regards documents less than 70 mm as jamming.

5 Assign scan mode when FAX mixed with photos is selected.

01 ✩

GSRSuper GSR

GSR: 8 line/mm×7.7 line/mm (200 dpi)

Super GSR:16 line/mm × 15.4 line/mm (400 dpi)

4 Select metric/inch for FAX TX. 01 ✩

mminch

3 Set zoom ratio for reducing legal/letter.

0 ✩

164.7 %77.2 %

21 00 ✩


0 Set print mode corresponding to MFP.

0

1 ✩

RegularprintingEmulator printing

“Emulator printing” indicates “size mismatch” without reduction, splitting, or printing on a larger size paper if there is no paper of the same size as the image.


8-112



76 00 ✩


54 Select draft printing mode. 00

01 ✩

10

11

No draft modeToner saving modeHigh resolution saving modeNot available

“Toner saving mode” follows # of skipped pixels (bit 3-2). “High resolution saving mode”, in which each pixel’s size will be reduced, follows # of skipped pixels (bit 3-2) for only at points of transition between white-black along the direction of main scanning.

32 Select draft printing level. 0001 ✩

1011

No skippingSkip 1/4 pixelSkip 2/4 pixelSkip 3/4 pixel

Specifies skipped printing level for copy, RX, and report printing.

10 Select draft printing level between MFP.

00 ✩

011011

No skippingSkip 1/4 pixelSkip 2/4 pixelSkip 3/4 pixel

Specifies skipped printing level for PC print.


8-113



7654 Select cut off length at leading edge of paper.

0000✩

000100100011010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111

02 mm4 mm6 mm8 mm10 mm12 mm14 mm16 mm18 mm20 mm22 mm24 mm26 mm28 mm30 mm

Valid only at RX printing.

3 Set special density. 0 ✩

1NoYes

2 0 ✩


1 Overlap printing. 01 ✩

NoYes

Valid only at RX printing. Overlapped print is fixed to 4mm regardless of line density.

0 Select upper limit for long document.

0 ✩

11 m4 m

Document exceeding upper limit will be regarded as jamming. Notice that document more than 2m with superfine image resolution for nonstorage TX will report communication error.



765432

000000✩


1 RX by memory when reaching I/C lifetime.

01 ✩

NoYes

0 RX by memory when reaching toner empty.

01 ✩

NoYes


8-114

MODE 037 Factory setting bit : 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (Hex : F8)


7 Select FAX paper cassette (1st cassette). *

01 ✩

NoYes

6 Select FAX paper cassette (2nd cassette). *

01 ✩

NoYes

5 Select FAX paper cassette (3rd cassette). *

01 ✩

NoYes

4 Select FAX paper cassette (4th cassette). *

01 ✩

NoYes

3 Select FAX paper cassette (5th cassette). *

01 ✩

NoYes

210 000✩




7 Turn on print lamp when out-of-paper.

0 ✩

1

On when all cassettes are out of paperOn when at least one cassette is out of paper

6543210

0000000✩



8-115

MODE 040 Factory setting bit : 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 (Hex : FA)


7 2-dim coding at TX.(Valid for G3 communication)

01 ✩

NoYes

“No” : MH“Yes” : MH+MR

6 T.6 coding.(Valid for G3 communication)

01 ✩

NoYes

“Yes”: MH+MR+MMRValid only when “2-dim coding? (MODE 040 Bit 7)” is set to “Yes.”

5 JBIG communication.(Valid for ECM communication)

01 ✩

NoYes

4 Third party’s JBIG (ITU-T) communication.(Valid for ECM communication)

01 ✩

NoYes

Valid only when “JBIG communication? (MODE 040 Bit 5)” is set to “Yes.”

3 Proprietary JBIG (ITU-T) communication.(Valid for ECM communication)

01 ✩

NoYes

Valid only when “JBIG communication? (MODE 040 Bit 5)” is “Yes.”

2 0 ✩


1 JBIG capability at V.34 communication.

01 ✩

NoYes

Valid only when “JBIG communication? (MODE 040 Bit 5)” is set to “Yes.”

0 0 ✩




7 0 ✩


6 ECM mode. 01 ✩

NoYes

“No” : G3“Yes.” : G3+ECM

543210

000000✩





7654 Select redialing interval 1. 0000000100100011✩

010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111

Not available1 min2 min3 min4 min5 min6 min7 min8 min9 min10 min11 min12 min13 min14 min15 min

3210 Select redialing interval 2. 0000000100100011010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111✩

Not available1 min2 min3 min4 min5 min6 min7 min8 min9 min10 min11 min12 min13 min14 min15 min

8-116


8-117



76 # of resending document. 000110 ✩

11

0123

5 0 ✩


4 Redialing when line is connected but no answer.

0 ✩

1NoYes

3210 0000✩



8-118

MODE 044 Factory setting bit : 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : A0)


7 Select threshold value for RTN sending error trace.

0

1 ✩

32 lines or more64 lines or more

Specifies # of error lines as reference of sending RTN:• “32 lines or more”:• MCF if error lines are 0 -

31 RTN if error lines are 32 or more

• “64 lines or more”:MCF if error lines are 0 - 31RTP if error lines are 32 to 63RTN if error lines are 64 or more

6 Process TCF sending specially.

0 ✩

1NoYes

5 Select T1 timer. 01 ✩

30 sec60 sec

4 Select T4 timer. (for line delay)

0 ✩

13 sec4.5 sec

3 Take action for communication error from overseas.

0 ✩

1NoYes

Select “No” unless bad line is experienced.

2 Take action for communication error from overseas.

0 ✩

1NoYes

Select “No” unless bad line is experienced.

1 Process RTN RX failure. 0 ✩

1

No(discard as error)Yes(not as error)

0 Retrain V. 34 control channel. 0 ✩

1

No(discard as error)Yes(answer)


8-119



765 Select V. 34 fall back tolerance. (TX)

000001010011100✩

Others

01234Not available

432 Select V. 34 fall back tolerance. (RX)

000001010✩

011100

Others

01234Not available

10 00 ✩




76 Select V.34/V.33/V.17 capabilities.

00

011011 ✩

No capability above 9600 bpsV.33V.17 & V.33V.17 & V.33 & V.34

Sets MODEM’s function

543 000✩


2 Allow V.34. 01 ✩

NoYes

Should be same as “V.8 (MODE 48 Bit 1)”

1 Allow V. 8. 01 ✩

NoYes

Should be same as “V.8 (MODE 48 Bit 2)”

0 Allow V.34 communication for extensions.

0 ✩

1V.34V.17


8-120

MODE 049 Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 (Hex : 0D)


765 000✩


43210

Select upper limit of transmission speed. (TX)

0000000001000100001100100001010011000111010000100101010010110110001101✩

Others

2400 bps4800 bps7200 bps9600 bps12.0 kbps14.4 kbps16.8 kbps19.2 kbps21.6 kbps24.0 kbps26.4 kbps28.8 kbps31.2 kbps33.6 kbpsNot available

• Need to disable “V.34 capability (MODE 048 Bit 2)” by setting “No” for 2400 bps.

• 16.8 kbps or faster is valid only when “Allow V.34? (MODE 048 Bit 2)” is enabled (Yes).

MODE 050 Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 (Hex : 0D)


765 000✩


43210

Select upper limit of transmission speed. (RX)

0000000001000100001100100001010011000111010000100101010010110110001101✩

Others

2400 bps4800 bps7200 bps9600 bps12.0 kbps14.4 kbps16.8 kbps19.2 kbps21.6 kbps24.0 kbps26.4 kbps28.8 kbps31.2 kbps33.6 kbpsNot available

• Need to disable “V.34 capability (MODE 048 Bit 2)” by setting “No” for 2400 bps.

• 16.8 kbps or faster is valid only when “Allow V.34? (MODE 048 Bit 2)” is enabled (Yes).


8-121



765 Declare size of print paper for received document.

000001✩

010011100101

Others

Not availableAutoA4B4A3Auto including rotationNot available

Specifies declaration value of printing function for RX.“Auto” selects max size of paper, max size of loaded cassette, or max size of the last paper.“Auto including rotation” is equivalent to A4L set even A4T is selected by MODE 008 Bit 7.

43210

00000✩




7 Relay TX mode(Nonrestricted/restricted)

0 ✩

1Not restrictedRestricted

6543210

0000000✩

Others Not available

Fixed to “0000000”

MODE 054 Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 (Hex : 0A)


7654 0000✩


3 Control history of V.34 auto dialing.

01 ✩

NoYes

Valid only when a receiver system has V.34 modulation.

2 Modulation method for V.34 manual, nonstorage TX.

0 ✩

1V.17V.34

1 Modulation method for V.34 polling TX document.

01 ✩

V.17V.34

0 Modulation method for V.34 manual RX.

0 ✩

1V.17V.34


8-122

MODE 055 Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 (Hex : 0C)


765 000✩


43 Select timing at starting ANSam TX.

0001 ✩

1011

0.5 sec1.0 sec1.5 sec2.0 sec

210 Select sending time of ANSam.

000001010011100✩

101110111

2.0 sec2.5 sec3.0 sec3.5 sec4.0 sec5.0 sec6.0 secNot available



76 00 ✩


5 Detect busy tone. (PSTN1) 01 ✩

NoYes

4 0 ✩


3 Detect line disconnection (inverted polarity). (PSTN1)

01 ✩

NoYes

210 000✩



8-123



7654 DP steady current time 1:Set interval from S relay ON to DP photo coupler ON.(PSTN1)

000000010010✩

0011010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111

15 msec30 msec50 msec75 msec100 msec125 msec150 msec175 msec200 msec225 msec250 msec275 msec300 msec325 msec350 msec400 msec

Valid only when “DP/PB switch (MODE 006 Bit 5)” selects “DP.”


000000010010✩

0011010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111




8-124



76 DP make rate. (PSTN1) 0001 ✩

Others

33 %44 %Not available

5432 Select PB sending level. (PSTN1)

000000010010001101000101✩

0110011110001001101010111100110111101111

–1 dBm–2 dBm–3 dBm–4 dBm–5 dBm–6 dBm–7 dBm–8 dBm–9 dBm–10 dBm–11 dBm–12 dBm–13 dBm–14 dBm–15 dBm–16 dBm

10 Select PB detection method. (PSTN1)

00 ✩

01

10

11

Method 1

Method 2

Method 3

Method 4

Instantaneous monitor timer = 5 ms/ off monitor timer = 40 msInstantaneous monitor timer = 15 ms/ off monitor timer = 30 msInstantaneous monitor timer = 25 ms/ off monitor timer = 20 msInstantaneous monitor timer = 35 ms/ off monitor timer = 10 ms


8-125



7654 Select TX level. (PSTN1) 1000✩

1001101010111100110111101111Others

–9 dBm–10 dBm–11 dBm–12 dBm–13 dBm–14 dBm–15 dBm–16 dBmNot available

Specifies TX levels other than PB.

3210 0000✩




76 Select RX attenuator. (PSTN1)

00

01 ✩

10

11

0 dB(–48 dBm)5 dB(–43 dBm)10 dB(–38 dBm)15 dB(–33 dBm)

Signals controlled by this soft switch are 1300Hz detection, PB tone detection, V29 & V27 ter, V21 signal detection, and all tonal signal.

543210

000000✩




76 Select detection time of continuous ringer. (PSTN1)

000110 ✩

11

No detection1.8 sec3.0 sec10 sec

543 Select frequency for ringer detection. (PSTN1)

000001010✩

011Others

10-27.5 Hz10-75 Hz10-90 Hz10-200 HzNot available

210 000✩



8-126



7 0 ✩


6 Select process mode at detection time out of 2nd dial tone. (PSTN1)

0

1 ✩

Keeps same operation as before detection even after time outGenerates TX error at time out

543210

000000✩




7 Select TX method. (PSTN1) 0 ✩

1

Insert pause after prefix for external linesInsert pause after 1st dial

6 Select method of detecting dial prefix for external lines. (PSTN1)

0 ✩

1

Dial # search methodPause search method

5432 Select prefix # for external lines. (PSTN1) *

0000✩

000100100011010001010110011110001001Others

0123456789Not available

Valid only when “Select method of detecting dial prefix for external lines (MODE 089 Bit6)” is set to “Dial # search method.”

10 00 ✩



8-127



7 Send V.29 echo protection tone. (PSTN1)

0 ✩

1NoYes


01 ✩

NoYes


01 ✩

NoYes

43 Select V.17 and V.33 carrier frequency. (PSTN1)

000110 ✩

11

1800 Hz1700 Hz1800+1700 HzNot available

210 000✩




76 Select timing for starting CED sending. (PSTN1)

0001 ✩

1011

0 msec2000 msec2500 msecNot available

Specifies time interval from line connection to starting sending CED

54 Select CED frequency. (PSTN1)

00 ✩

011011

2100 Hz1080 Hz1300 HzNot available

Specifies frequency to carry CED or N/A selection.

3 Process CED echo. (PSTN1)

01 ✩

NoYes

Specifies whether CED echo will be processed by set interval of 500 ms between CED and initial identification.

2 Process incoming command echo.(PSTN1)

0 ✩

1NoYes

Specifies whether incoming echo will be processed by set interval of 500 ms between receiving initial identification and incoming command.

10 00 ✩



8-128



7654 0000✩


3 Lock AGC in V.33 mode. (PSTN1)

01 ✩

NoYes


01 ✩

NoYes


0 ✩

1NoYes

0 Lock AGC in V.27ter mode. (PSTN1)

0 ✩

1NoYes



76 Adjust digital TX cable equalizer. (PSTN1)

00 ✩

011011

0 dB4 dB8 dB12 dB

54 Adjust digital RX cable equalizer. (PSTN1)

000110 ✩

11

0 dB4 dB8 dB12 dB

For V.29, actual value will be 4 dB more than the specified value.

3210 0000✩



8-129



76 00 ✩


54 Select time for CI signal sending ON.(PSTN1)

0001 ✩

1011


Use this soft switch for error in V8 sequence.

321 Select time for CI signal sending OFF.(PSTN1)

000001010✩

011100101

Others

0.4 sec0.8 sec1.0 sec1.2 sec1.6 sec2.0 secNot available


0 0 ✩



8-130



7 Attenuate TCF/NTCF sending level. (PSTN1)

0 ✩

1NoYes –3 dB

Specifies whether sending level of TCF and NTCF will be attenuated. For V33/V29, level of attenuation is determined by MODE 085 Bit 7-4 and MODE 097 Bit 6. Otherwise, level of attenuation is determined by MODE 085 Bit 7-4.

6 Attenuate V17/V33/V29 sending level. (PSTN1)

0 ✩

1NoYes –3 dB

Specifies whether sending level of V17/V33/V29 will be attenuated. Level of attenuation is determined by MODE 085 Bit 7-4 and MODE 097 Bit 6.

5 0 ✩


432 Select V.34 symbol rate.(PSTN1)

000001010011100101✩

Others

2400 Sym/SNot available2800 Sym/S3000 Sym/S3200 Sym/S3429 Sym/SNot available

10 00 ✩



8-131



76 Select starting time of sending CI signal. (PSTN1)

0001 ✩

1011

0 sec1 sec2 sec3 sec


54 00 ✩


3210 Select EQM threshold value.(PSTN1)

0000000100100011010001010110✩

011110001001101010111100Others

–6–5–4–3–2–10123456Not available


8-132



7654 Select threshold value 1 for symbol speed.(PSTN1)

000000010010001101000101011001111000✩

1001101010111100110111101111

–8–7–6–5–4–3–2–101234567

Specifies range of tolerance for characteristic distortion of V. 34 line.

3210 Select threshold value 2 for symbol speed.(PSTN1)

000000010010001101000101011001111000✩

1001101010111100110111101111

–8–7–6–5–4–3–2–101234567

Specifies minimum tolerance level of S/N ratio in V.34


8-133



76 00 ✩


5 Detect busy tone. (PSTN2) 01 ✩

NoYes

4 0 ✩


3 Detect line disconnection (inverted polarity). (PSTN2)

01 ✩

NoYes

210 000✩



8-134




000000010010✩

0011010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111




000000010010✩

0011010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111




8-135



76 Select DP make rate. (PSTN2)

0001 ✩

Others

33 %44 %Not available

5432 Select PB sending level. (PSTN2)

000000010010001101000101✩

0110011110001001101010111100110111101111

–1 dBm–2 dBm–3 dBm–4 dBm–5 dBm–6 dBm–7 dBm–8 dBm–9 dBm–10 dBm–11 dBm–12 dBm–13 dBm–14 dBm–15 dBm–16 dBm

10 Select PB detection method. (PSTN2)

00 ✩

01

10

11

Method 1

Method 2

Method 3

Method 4

Instantaneous monitor timer = 5 ms/ off monitor timer = 40 msInstantaneous monitor timer = 15 ms/ off monitor timer = 30 msInstantaneous monitor timer = 25 ms/ off monitor timer = 20 msInstantaneous monitor timer = 35 ms/ off monitor timer = 10 ms


8-136



7654 Select TX level. (PSTN2) 1000✩

1001101010111100110111101111Others

–9 dBm–10 dBm–11 dBm–12 dBm–13 dBm–14 dBm–15 dBm–16 dBmNot available

Specifies TX levels other than PB.

3210 0000✩




76 Select RX attenuator. (PSTN2)

00

01 ✩

10

11

0 dB (–48 dBm)5 dB(–43 dBm)10 dB(–38 dBm)15 dB(–33 dBm)

Signals controlled by this soft switch are 1300Hz detection, PB tone detection, V29 & V27 ter, V21 signal detection, and all tonal signals.

543210

000000✩




76 Select detection time of continuous ringer. (PSTN2)

000110 ✩

11

No detection1.8 sec3.0 sec10 sec

543 Select frequency for ringer detection. (PSTN2)

000001010✩

011Others

10-27.5 Hz10-75 Hz10-90 Hz10-200 HzNot available

210 000✩



8-137



7 0 ✩

1Fixed to “0”

6 Select process mode at detection time out of 2nd dial tone. (PSTN2)

0

1 ✩

Keeps same operation as before detection even after time outGenerates TX error at time out

543210

000000✩


MODE 119 Factory setting bit : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex : 00


7 Select dialing method. (PSTN2)

0 ✩

1

Insert pause after prefix for external linesInsert pause after 1st dial

6 Select method of detecting dial prefix for external lines. (PSTN2)

0 ✩

1

Dial # search methodPause search method

5432 Select prefix # for external lines. (PSTN1) *

0000✩

000100100011010001010110011110001001Others

0123456789Not available

Valid only when “Select method of detecting dial prefix for external lines (MODE 119 Bit 6)” is set to “Dial # search method.”

10 00 ✩



8-138




0 ✩

1NoYes


01 ✩

NoYes


01 ✩

NoYes

43 Select V.17 and V.33 carrier frequency. (PSTN1)

000110 ✩

11

1800 Hz1700 Hz1800+1700 HzNot available

210 000✩




76 Select timing for starting CED sending.(PSTN2)

0001 ✩

1011

0 msec2000 msec2500 msecNot available

Specifies the time interval from line connection to start sending CED

54 Select CED frequency.(PSTN2)

00 ✩

011011

2100 Hz1080 Hz1300 HzNot available

Specifies the frequency to carry CED or disable selection.

3 Process CED echo.(PSTN2)

01 ✩

NoYes

Determines whether CED echo will be processed by specified interval of 500 ms between CED and initial identification.

2 Process incoming command echo.(PSTN2)

0 ✩

1NoYes

Determines whether incoming echo will be processed by the specified interval of 500 ms between receiving initial identification and incoming command.

10 00 ✩



8-139



7654 0000✩



01 ✩

NoYes


01 ✩

NoYes


0 ✩

1NoYes

0 Lock AGC in V.27ter mode. (PSTN2)

0 ✩

1NoYes



76 Select digital TX cable equalizer.(PSTN2)

00 ✩

011011

0 dB4 dB8 dB12 dB

54 Select digital RX cable equalizer.(PSTN2)

000110 ✩

11

0 dB4 dB8 dB12 dB

For V.29, the actual value will be 4 dB more than the specified value.

3210 0000✩



8-140



76 00 ✩


54 Select time for CI signal sending ON.(PSTN2)

0001 ✩

1011



321 Select time for CI signal sending OFF.(PSTN2)

000001010✩

011100101

Others

0.4 sec0.8 sec1.0 sec1.2 sec1.6 sec2.0 secNot available

Use this soft switch for error in a V8 sequence.

0 0 ✩



8-141



7 Attenuate TCF/NTCF sending level.(PSTN2)

0 ✩

1NoYes –3 dB

Specifies whether sending level of TCF and NTCF will be attenuated. For V33/V29, level of attenuation is determined by MODE 115 Bit 7-4 and MODE 127 Bit 6. Otherwise, level of attenuation is determined by MODE 115 Bit 7-4.

6 Attenuate V17/V33/V29 sending level.(PSTN2)

0 ✩

1NoYes –3 dB

Specifies whether sending level of V17/V33/V29 will be attenuated. Level of attenuation is determined by MODE 115 Bit 7-4.

5 0 ✩


432 Select V.34 symbol rate.(PSTN2)

000001010011100101✩

Others

2400 Sym/SNot available2800 Sym/S3000 Sym/S3200 Sym/S3429 Sym/SNot available

10 00 ✩



8-142



76 Select starting time of sending CM signal. (PSTN2)

0001 ✩

1011

0 sec1 sec2 sec3 sec

Use this soft switch for error in a V8 sequence.

54 00 ✩


3210 Select EQM threshold value.(PSTN2)

0000000100100011010001010110✩

011110001001101010111100Others

–6–5–4–3–2–10123456Not available


8-143



7654 Select threshold value 1 for symbol speed. (PSTN2)

000000010010001101000101011001111000✩

1001101010111100110111101111

–8–7–6–5–4–3–2–101234567

Specifies range of tolerance for characteristic distortion of V. 34 line.

3210 Select threshold value 2 for symbol speed. (PSTN2)

000000010010001101000101011001111000✩

1001101010111100110111101111

–8–7–6–5–4–3–2–101234567

Specifies minimum tolerance level of S/N ratio in V.34.



76543210

Select value of layer 2 link N3.(# of outstanding)

0000000000000001

00000111✩

Others

Not available1

7Not available

Set in binary code.


8-144



76543210

Select # of layer 3 logical channels.

00000000✩

00000010Others

12Not available

Set in binary code.



76543210

Select size of layer 3 packet window.

0000000000000001

00000111✩

00001111

Others

Not available1

7

15Not available

Set in binary code.Select 7 when layer 3 module is 8, and 1-15 when 128, respectively.



7 Restrict SF/SSF communication (TX).

0 ✩

1NoYes

For risk management according to new recommendation of G3 high resolution transmission

6 Restrict SF/SSF communication (RX).

0 ✩

1NoYes

For risk management according to new recommendation of G3 high resolution transmission

543210

000000✩



8-145



76 Select order of displaying year to date.

00

0110

11 ✩

Year-Month-Date (default in Japan)Not availableDate-month-yearMonth-date-year (default in North America)

543210

000000✩


MODE 300-305 REV soft switches for maintenance



7 Set memory recall (copy). * 0 ✩

1NoYes

Holds image data even after ejecting last page to select “enable/disable” to recall it.

6 Set priority doc mixed mode (copy). *

0 ✩

1NoYes

Selects priority doc mixed mode when Power source is ON and panel reset key is ON.

543210

000000✩



8-146



7 Select priority doc mode. (copy)

0 ✩

11 sided2 sided

65 Select priority print mode. (copy)

0001 ✩

Others

1 sided copy2 sided copyNot available

43 Select automatic function priority mode. (copy) *

00 ✩

011011

APSAMSNot availableManual

APS: Auto Paper Selection.

AMS: Auto Magnification Selection.

2 0 ✩


10 Select priority application. (after auto clear and panel reset) *

00110 ✩

11

FAXCopyAuto-modescreenNot available

Selects initial screen (copy, FAX, or auto-mode).



7 Select print saving magnification. (copy) *

0 ✩

1

Recommended magnificationNone

Set magnification for 2-to-1 page, 4-to-1 page, Booklet creation, or 2-to-1 page split.

654321

000000✩


0 Auto-reset by user. (copy) * 01 ✩

NoYes

Selects whether to do panel reset or not when ID key will be pressed.



76543210

Select auto-clear time. 0000000000000001✩

11110000

11111111

Others

Not reset1 min

240 min

30 secNot available

For every 1 min

Select whether auto-clear will proceed if there is no operation for a certain time after copy or operation.


8-147



76543210

Select pre-heating time. 00000001

00001111✩

11110000

Others

1 min

15 min

240 minNot available

For every 1 min

Select whether auto-pre-heating will proceed if no operation for a certain time after copy or operation.



76543210

Select auto Power source off time.

00000000

00000001

00111100✩

11110000

Others

NoPower source off1 min

60 min


For every 1 min

Select whether auto Power source off will proceed if there is no operation for a certain time after copy or operation. Also, select its time.No auto Power source off if “Select auto Power source off (MODE 416 Bit 0)” is set to “No.”



76543210

Select panel off time. * 0000000000000001✩

11110000

Others

No panel off1 min


For every 1 min

Select whether auto panel off will proceed if no operation for a certain time, or after operation.


8-148



7654 Select drawer. (paper) (Copy)*

0000✩

000100100011010010101100Others

1st drawer2nd drawer3rd drawer4th drawer5th drawerManualLCCNot available

Selects priority drawer when APS (auto paper mode) or manual mode is selected.

3210 0000✩




76 Select default 4-to-1 page order. (Copy) *

00 ✩

01Others

Pattern 1Pattern 2Not available

Pattern 1: Pattern 2:

5 Select default exposure level. (Copy)

0 ✩

1AEManual

4321 Select priority doc level. (Copy)

0000

0100✩

1000Others

Txt/Photo modeTxt modePhoto modeNot available

“Photo mode” is unavailable if MODE 409 Bit 5 selects “AE (auto).”

0 0 ✩


1 2 1 3

3 4 2 4


8-149



76 Select AE print density level.(Copy)

00 ✩

011011

DarkerNormalNot availableLighter

Specifies level of auto density.

54 00 ✩


3210 Select priority manual density level. (Copy)

00000001001000110100✩

0101011001111000Others

EXP 1EXP 2EXP 3EXP 4EXP 5EXP 6EXP 7EXP 8EXP 9Not available

Selects manual density level at mode initialization or level when auto density is switched to manual density:

EXP1 (lighter) |EXP5 (normal) |EXP9 (darker)



7 Select sign bit. (Copy) 0 ✩

1+–

Selects direction (+/–) of print density adjustment by MODE 411 Bit 2-0.

6543 0000✩


210 Adjust print density. (Copy) * 000

011Others

0

3Not available

Selects print density by adjusting development bias.


8-150



76 Select auto sort mode.(Copy)

00 ✩

011011

Sort off modeSort on modeNot availableGrouping mode

Specifies mode of paper ejection when ejector option is attached.

5 Select auto staple mode.(Copy)

0 ✩

1NoYes

Settable with other functions except MODE 412 Bit 7-6 “Sort off mode.”

4 Select auto punch mode.(Copy) *

0 ✩

1NoYes

Settable with other functions of MODE 412 Bit 7-6.

3 Select sort on/off auto switch. (Copy)

01 ✩

NoYes

Determines “sort on→sort off” or “sort off→sort on” will proceed according to # of documents

210 000✩




76 00 ✩


5 Select FAX output bin. * 0 ✩

11st trayElevate or tray

Specifies FAX tray when Finisher or Mail-bin finisher is attached.

4 Select PC print output bin. * 0 ✩

11st trayElevate or tray

Specifies PC print tray when Finisher or Mail-bin finisher is attached.

3 0 ✩


2 Select copy output bin. * 01 ✩

1st bin2nd bin

Specifies copy output bin when Job tray is attached.

1 Select FAX output bin. * 0 ✩

11st bin2nd bin

Specifies FAX output bin when Job tray is attached.

0 Select PC print output bin. * 0 ✩

11st bin2nd bin

Specifies PC print output bin when Job tray is attached.


8-151



7654 Select image compression ratio for reserving into copy memory.

010101100111✩

100010011010101111001101Others

0.50.60.70.80.91.01.11.21.3Not available

Shows image compression ratio per copied document for reserving it into copy memory. Reserved necessary capacity of memory for determined compression ratio before starting scanning.

3210 0000✩




765 Select sound volume 1. (Buzzer) *

000✩

001010011100101

Others

0 (no sound)12345Not available

6 stage adjustment of key buzzer

432 Select sound volume 2. (Alarm) *

000001010011✩

100101

Others


6 stage adjustment for alarm

10 00 ✩



8-152



765 Select sound volume 3. (Monitor) *

000001010011✩

100101

Others


6 stage adjustment of line monitor

4321 0000✩


0 Select auto Power source off. 0 ✩

1NoYes

Specifies whether MODE 406 can be set to “No Power source off.”



7 Restrict # of papers. (Copy) 0 ✩

1NoYes

Specifies whether # of copies will be restricted.

6543210

Selects # of papers to be restricted. (Copy)

00000001✩

1100011

Others

1

99Not available

Specifies # of papers when MODE 417 Bit 7 selects “Yes.”


8-153



76 Select count mode of total counter.

00 ✩

0110

Others

Mode 1 (std)Mode 2Mode 3Not available

Specifies a counting method of total counter.

543 Select count mode of size counter.

000001✩

010011100

Others

No countingA3A3/B4A3/B4/FLSA6Not available

Specifies size of paper to be counted by size counter.

21 Select count mode of print kit counter. (Copy)

00 ✩

01

10

11

Mode 1 (No counting)Mode 2 (Counting 1)Mode 3 (Counting 2)Not available

Specifies whether a copy kit counter and disabled copy function are installed.

0 0 ✩




7 Select key counter mode. (Copy)

0 ✩

1# of papers# of copy operations

Specifies the threshold value of copy kit counter and browser counter.

6 Key counter installed. (Copy) 0

1 ✩

Yes (No print allowed)No(Print allowed)

Specifies whether a key counter is installed.

54 00 ✩


3 Document size detection option installed.

01 ✩

YesNo

Specifies whether document size sensors can be used in the inch-option.

210 000✩



8-154



7 Metric and inch mixed modes. (Copy)

0 ✩

1YesNo

Specifies whether document sizes will be rounded off for the system specification in auto paper mode.

65 Select FLS size. (Copy) 00 ✩

011011

210×330203×330216×330220×330

Specifies size of FLS.

4 Restrict print mode. (Copy) 0 ✩

1YesNo

Specifies whether “2 Sided Copy” is disabled in priority copy mode.

3 Print small size document. (Copy)

0 ✩

1NoYes

Specifies whether a warning will be generated when a document smaller than that detectable by document size sensors is loaded.

2 Restrict function. (Copy) 0 ✩

1NoYes

Specifies whether some copy functions (application, doc copy) will be disabled.

10 00 ✩




7654 0000✩


3210 Adjust image quality mode. (Copy)

0000✩

1000Others Not available

Specifies the density of image at printing.


Chapter 9

TROUBLESHOOTING




Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563


9-1

9-1. DIAGNOSIS BY ALARM CODE

This section shows diagnoses of system troubles by alarm codes and their remedies. The default setting for diagnostic codes is “not to be displayed.” If you experience errors fre-quently, setup the soft switch (MODE 020) to display diagnostic codes. Then follow tables 9-1-1 and 9-1-2 for troubleshooting.• Table 9-1-1 shows communication error codes. Each of them has 6-digits on the panel

and a report.Codes 00 to B4 indicate the upper 2 digits. Adding internal 4 digits to them to display 6 digits on the panel and a report.Communication reports (TX and RX) print out diagnostic codes for up to 50 activities. Any codes older than those activities cannot be printed.

• Table 9-1-2 indicates printer alarm codes, which have 2 digits on the panel screen.Before you proceed with a remedy according to the tables, make sure that the power source cable and the connectors are connected properly.

< Setting up diagnostic code display >

See Section 8-3-3 “Maintenance mode << 5 >> Set up Soft Switch” for setting up soft switches.

MODE 020

Bit 3 Meaning

0 Do not display codes.

1 Displays codes.


9-2

9-1-1. COMMUNICATION ERROR CODES

< Errors in operations >

Code Description Cause RemedyRemote Line Local

00 • Received DIS but no document in local terminal

• Polling Reception is requested

• Software failure at time of connection

1. Error in operation❍

Reload a docu-ment and retry TX.

2. Error in operation at remote end

❍

Ask to reload a document and retry TX.

01 • Document pulled out while transmit-ing.

• Document size was too small

Error in operation

❍

Reload a correct document and retry TX.

02 • Illegal dialing oper-ation(Example; dialing

or # with DP setting)

Error in setting up

❍

Check the soft switch (MODE 006 Bit5 & MODE 011 Bit 5).

Error in registration❍

Check the regis-tered one-touch dialing number.

03 • Mismatched TX password

Sender’s password and receiver’s are not matched.

❍ ❍

Check the group password of both sides.

04 • Mismatched RX password

Sender’s password and receiver’s are not matched.

❍ ❍

Check the group password of both sides.

05 • Mismatched pass-word while polling

Incorrect password was entered for set-ting up polling.

❍

Check the status of the remote machine and the local password.

06 • Remote system has no relay func-tion

Failure in remote machine ❍

Check the status of the remote machine.

07 • Remote system has not confiden-tial communication function

Failure in remote machine

❍



9-3

< Terminal alarm >


09 • Incompatibility (Example; no doc-ument in local sys-tem while polling RX)

• TX failure due to mismatch of com-munication type and/or transmis-sion speed

Error in operation on remote side ❍

Ask the remote end to reload the document again.

Transmission speeds are set 4800/2400 bps. Remote machine has only V.29.

❍ ❍

Check the soft switch (MODE 049 Bit 4 -0).

Check the maxi-mum transmission speed for each one-touch dialing (only for registra-tion in mainte-nance features).

10 • Error in F code TX Failure in remote machine ❍


11 • Error in F code RX Failure in remote machine ❍



45 • Memory overflow or nearly full

Memory overflows or nearly full

❍

Reset the terminal alarm and ask the remote end for resending.

46 • Document jam-ming

Feeding is not work-ing continuously.

❍Reload a docu-ment.

Jamming in a long document or in the middle of a page (Feeding is not com-pleted even if feed-ing exceeds 1m.)

❍

Reload a docu-ment.

47 • “No print paper” or “Side cover opened” were detected

Out of paper ❍ Load paper.

Side cover was opened during RX ❍

Close the side cover.


9-4

< Communication errors (TX) >(1/3)


33 • Protocol failure in V.34 sequence


❍Try another remote machine.

Line failure ❍ Try another line.

70 • Busy tone while waiting for initial identification signal

• Timeout or modem failure while detect-ing 2nd dialing tone

• Cannot dial due to dialing/ringing con-flict

• T1 timeout while waiting for initial identification sig-nal when FAX sig-nal is not detected



Line failure

❍

Try another line.

71 • T1 timeout while waiting for initial identification sig-nal after FAX sig-nal is detected

• Detected reverse polarity while wait-ing for initial identi-fication signal



Line failure

❍

Try BACK to BACK communication.

72 • Received DCN in phase B while wait-ing for commands other than DCN

Interruption or fail-ure in remote machine

❍

Check the remote system and retry TX.

74 • Received DIS or DTC 3 times while waiting for response to TCF

• No response even after sending TSI/DCS and TCF 3 times

• Received FTT twice even TCF has lowest speed




Failure in PKG-ASS’Y (MFB)

❍

Replace PKG-ASS’Y (MFB)


9-5

(2/3)


76 • Reverse polarity while waiting for signal other than initial identification


Check the remote system and retry TX.

Line failure

❍

If same error will be experienced several times, set the soft switch (MODE 082 Bit 3) 0.

77 • No response to post message (T4 timeout)

• 5-minute timeout in RNR, RR sequence (T5 tim-eout)



No RTC detection in remote machine (line failure) ❍

Try another line.

78 • Received DCN while waiting for response to post message

Interruption or fail-ure in remote machine

❍

Check the status of the remote machine and retry TX.

79 • Received PIP for post message (For response to EOP or PPS-EOP, com-munication is nor-mal even error code is displayed)


❍


7A • Received RTN for post message (where RTN recep-tion is regarded as communication failure)

• Retry out of resending error

• PPR frame error



Line failure ❍ Check the line.

Failure in TX level

❍

Check TX level.

7C • Received CRP 3 times for TCF

• Received CRP 3 times for post mes-sage

• Received CRP 3 times for DTC of polling reception



Line failure

❍

Try another line.


9-6

(3/3)


7D • RX command error (without cutting off carrier)



7F • No remote machine response after changing mode (T1 timeout)


❍


8F • Received PIN for post message




9-7

< Communication errors (RX) >(1/2)


33 • Protocol failure in V.34 sequence




91 • T1 timeout while waiting for initial identification signal




92 • Received DCN while waiting for commands other than DCN in phase B

Interruption or fail-ure in remote machine ❍

Check the status of the remote machine and retry TX.

95 • Detected low speed flag followed by 10 sec. timeout while waiting for detection of image signal carrier (HMCD ON)


❍Try another remote system.

Line failure

❍

Try another line.

96 • Carrier discon-nected for 15 sec-onds while receiving G3 image signal

Error in remote machine

❍Ask for resending.




97 • T2 timeout while waiting for post message

• T2 timeout while waiting for DCN after receiving last page

• No response from remote system after changing mode (T2 timeout)

Error in remote machine


Accidental RTC detection (line fail-ure)

❍

Try another line.

98 • Received DCN while waiting for command other than DCN in phase D

Interruption or fail-ure in remote machine ❍

Ask for resending.


9-8

(2/2)


99 • Received PRI-Q as post message (Communication is regarded as nor-mal even with error message)


❍


9A • Cannot decode line correctly for 35 seconds while receiving ECM image signal





❍Replace PKG-ASS’Y (MFB)

9C • Received CRP 3 times while waiting for initial identifica-tion signal






9D • RX command error (without cutting off carrier)



9F • Interrupted page reception by EOR-Q or EOR-PRI-Q signal from sender in ECM procedure (next page may be received com-pletely because ECM procedure runs continuously )



Line failure

❍

Reduce the initial transmission speed and try resending.


9-9

< Malfunction >


B0 • Power source off Power switch was turned off

❍None.

Power source failure ❍ None.

Defective power sup-ply unit

❍Replace the power source supply unit.

B2 • System failure (Examples; image data conversion failure and error in sequence timing)

Warm restart switch was pressed

❍None.



Line failure❍

Check line noise and reception level.

B4 • Modem failure Document was not loaded for polling reception in V.34 mode

❍

Check the docu-ment loaded in the remote side.

Line failure❍




B5 • Modem failure (modem failure in V.8 sequence at RX)

Line failure❍




B6 • Modem failure (modem failure in V.8 sequence at RX)

Line failure❍




B7 • System failure (Examples; image data conversion failure, error in sequence timing)

Warm restart switch was pressed

❍None.



Line failure❍



9-10

9-1-2. PRINTER ALARMS (MALFUNCTION)This section describes the alarm codes, possible causes and countermeasures to be taken. Take proper countermeasures.Some alarm codes may be displayed due to external noises, etc. Before taking counter-measures, turn on and off the main switch to reset the trouble.

<Malfunction Resetting Procedure>• Turn OFF, then ON the Power Switch or open and close the Side Cover for all malfunc-

tions except fusing-related ones (C05**).

<< 1 >> Detection Timing by Malfunction Code

Code Description Detection Timing

C0000 Main Motor M2 mal-function

The Lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1-sec. period or more while M2 remains energized.

C0010 I/C Motor M1 malfunc-tion

The Lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1-sec. period or more while M1 remains energized.

C0045 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor M3 malfunction

The Lock signal remains HIGH or LOW for a continuous 1-sec. period or more while M3 remains energized.

C004C Ozone Fan Motor M8 malfunction

The Lock signal remains HIGH or LOW for a continuous 1-sec. period or more while M8 remains energized.

C004E Power Source Unit Cooling Fan Motor M4

The Lock signal (analog input voltage) remains 0.4V or less for a continuous 0.5-sec. period or more while M4 remains energized.

C0070 Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M6 malfunction

• Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC10 remains blocked (L) for a continuous 2-sec. period or more while M6 remains energized.

• PC10 remains unblocked (H) for a continuous 6-sec. period or more while M6 remains energized.

C0500 Warming-up failure The temperature of the Fusing Rollers do not reach the required level even after the lapse of a given period of time during a warming-up cycle.• From room temperature to 100°C: within 65 sec.• From 100°C to 140°C: Within 25 sec.• From 140°C to 170°C: Within 20 sec.• From 170°C to the completion of warming-up: Within 22

sec.

C0510 Abnormally low fus-ing temperature

• The fusing temperature remains 130°C or less for a continuous 0.1-sec. period or more during the standby state or printing.

• The fusing temperature remains 105°C (Di350f) / 80°C (Di250f) or less for a continuous 2-min. period or more during the low-temperature standby state.

C0520 Abnormally high fus-ing temperature

The fusing temperature remains 230°C or more for a con-tinuous 0.1-sec. period or more.


9-11


C0650 Faulty Scanner Home Position Sensor 1 PC12

<The Power Switch is turned ON, Original Cover lowered, or Start key pressed when the Scanner is at its home position> • PC12 is not unblocked (H) even when the Scanner

moves 10 mm to the left.• PC12 is not blocked (L) even when the Scanner moves

4 mm to the right after PC12 has been unblocked (H). <The Power Switch is turned ON, Original Cover lowered, or Start key pressed when the Scanner is at any position other than home> • PC12 is not blocked (L) even when the Scanner moves

469.5 mm to the right.

C0651 Faulty Scanner Home Position Sensor 2 PC13

When the Start key is pressed with a document loaded in the Document Feed Tray of AF-7, PC13 is not blocked (L) even when the Scanner moves 463 mm to the left after PC12 has been unblocked (H).

C0990 LCC Lift-Up Motor EMOT malfunction (LCC)

The overcurrent detection circuit detects an overcurrent condition that lasts for a given period of time while EMOT remains energized.

C0991 Lift 1 ascent motion failure (LCC)

Lift-Up Sensor 1 LS1 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after EMOT has been energized (Lift 1 has started moving up).

C0995 LCC Transport Motor HMOT malfunction (LCC)

The HMOT Lock signal is not input for a given period of time.

C0999 Lift 2 ascent motion failure (LCC)

Lift-Up Sensor 2 LS2 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after EMOT has been energized (Lift 2 has started moving up).

C099D Communication error (LCC)

LCC becomes uncontrollable due to an error in communi-cations between the LCC and main product.

C0B00 Transport Motor M1 drive malfunction (Finisher/Mail-bin Fin-isher)

• At any time after M1 has been energized, the Lock sig-nal remains HIGH for a given period of time.

• At any time after M1 has been deenergized, the Lock signal remains LOW for a given period of time.

C0B0F Paper Entrance Switching Motor M1 drive malfunction (Finisher/Mail bin Fin-isher)

(In Non-Sort mode) Non-Sort Tray Transport Position Detecting Sensor PC2 does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M1 has been energized (to swing the Path Switching Guide downward). (In mode other than Non-Sort) Finisher Transport Position Detecting Sensor PC3 does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M1 has been energized (to swing the Path Switching Guide upward).


9-12


C0B30 CD Aligning Motor M4 drive malfunction (Finisher/mail-bin Fin-isher)

CD Aligning Home Position Sensor PC5 does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M4 has been energized (to return the CD Aligning Plate to its home position).

C0B38 Shift Motor M5 drive malfunction (Finisher/Mail-bin Finisher)

Shift Sensor PC6 does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M5 has been energized (to return the Shift Reference Plate to its home position).

C0B4D Paper Holding Tray Motor M10 drive mal-function (Finisher/Mail-bin Finisher)

• Paper Holding Tray Home Position Sensor PC9 does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M10 has been energized (to let the Paper Holding Tray start its retracting motion).

• PC9 does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M10 has been energized (to let the Paper Holding Tray start its home-returning motion).

C0B4E Finisher Tray Motor M8 drive malfunction (Finisher/Mail-bin Fin-isher)

• Finisher Tray Home Position Sensor PC2 does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8 has been energized (to let the Finisher Tray start its retracting motion).

• PC2 does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8 has been energized (to let the Finisher Tray start its home-returning motion).

C0B50 Stapling Motor drive malfunction (Finisher/Mail-bin Finisher)

• The Home Position Sensor does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Sta-pling Motor has been energized (to start a stapling sequence).

• The Home Position Sensor does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapling Motor has been energized (to start a home-returning motion).

C0B80 Shift motion failure (Shift Tray Unit)

(When moving from home to shift position)The Shift Home Sensor is blocked after a given period of time after the Shift Motor has been energized (at which timing the motor is deenergized).(When moving from shift to home position)The Shift Home Sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Shift Motor has been energized.

C0BA0 Elevator Motor M9 drive malfunction (Finisher/Mail-bin Fin-isher)

• Elevator Tray Upper Surface Sensor PC8 does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M9 has been energized (to let the Elevator Tray start the ascent motion).

• The value of input to Elevator Tray Retract Position Sen-sor PC12 does not reach the specified level for the tray’s retracted position even after the lapse of a given period of time after M9 has been energized.


9-13


C0F32 Faulty ATDC Sensor E1

The value of data read by E1 is faulty. [E1 reading is 7% or less (3.92V or more) or 19% or more (1.41V or less).]

C0F33 ATDC adjustment fail-ure

• In an F8 (ATDC control voltage automatic adjustment) operation, the adjustment of ATDC control voltage is not completed within 1 min. after E1 sampling.

• In an F8 operation, the control voltage falls outside the range of 5.39V to 8.15V.

C1038 Engine connection error

• The system fails in checking initial engine connection when Power Switch S1 is turned ON.

• The system succeeded in checking initial connection when S1 was turned ON; then it fails in rechecking ini-tial connection through the execution of a software reset when a communications error occurs during operation.

C1300 Polygon Motor M10 malfunction

<Resolution selection failure detection> • The Lock signal is not detected for a given period of

time after the resolution has been selected. (The Lock signal is not, however, detected for 1 sec. after the start.)

<Faulty Lock signal detection> • No Lock signals are detected for the 1-sec. period

which starts 1 sec. after the first Lock. * First Lock: The first Lock signal following 1 sec. after the

selection of start or half speed. <Out-of-timing Lock detection> • The Lock signal is not detected for a continuous 0.5-

sec. period while M10 is in the stabilized turning state (after a Lock has been detected).

<Abnormal Lock detection> • The Lock signal remains ON for a continuous 5-sec.

period while M10 remains deenergized.

C1330 Communications error (VSYNC)

———————————————

C133A Communications error (G/A)

———————————————

C133B Communications error (option I/F)

———————————————

C13C0 I/C initialization failure After failing to blow the imaging unit fuse 2 consecutive times, 3.6V or more is detected and the I/C is determined to be new.

C13D0 Faulty EEPROM No initial data is written in EEPROM.

C13F0 HSYNC detection fail-ure

• The SOS rising edge is not detected even after the lapse of 0.2 sec. after Polygon Motor M10 has started and laser output started.

• No SOS rising edges are detected while VIA remains ON.


9-14

<< 2 >> Troubleshooting Procedures by Malfunction Code

(1) C0000: M2 MalfunctionC0010: M1 MalfunctionC0045: M3 MalfunctionC004C: M8 MalfunctionC004E: M4 MalfunctionC0070: M6 Malfunction

Relevant Electrical Parts

I/C Motor M1 Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M6

Main Motor M2 Ozone Fan Motor M8

Fusing Cooling Fan Motor M3 Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC10

Power Source Unit Cooling Fan Motor M4 Master Board PWB-A


9-15

C0000

C0010

C0045

Step Check Item Result Action

1 Does M2 turn after the malfunction has been reset?

NO Check various parts for possible overload.

2 Check M2 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ1-3 of M2 and GND change from DC5V to DC0V after the malfunction has been reset?

NO Change PWB-A.

3 Does the voltage across PJ1-4 of M2 and GND change from DC5V to DC0V after the malfunction has been reset?

YES Change PWB-A.

NO Change M2.




2 Check M1 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ2-3 of M1 and GND change from DC5V to DC0V after the malfunction has been reset?

NO Change PWB-A.

3 Does the voltage across PJ2-4 of M1 and GND change from DC5V to DC0V after the malfunction has been reset?

YES Change PWB-A.

NO Change M14.



NO Check the connector and harness between M3 and PWB-A

2 Check M3 for operation. Does the voltage across CN-8 on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC0V to DC24V after the malfunction has been reset?

NO Change PWB-A.

3 Does the “C0045” display persist even after M3 has been replaced with a new one?

YES Change PWB-A.


9-16

C004C

C004E

C0070




2 Check M8 for operation. Does the voltage across CN41-3 on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC0V to DC24V after the malfunction has been reset?

NO Change PWB-A.

3 Does the “C004C” display persist even after M8 has been replaced with a new one?

YES Change PWB-A.



YES Change PWB-A.

2 Does the “C004C” display persist even after M4 has been replaced with a new one?

YES Change PWB-A.


1 After the malfunction has been reset, remove the Rear Lower Cover and block Toner Bottle Cover Sensor PC11. Then, unlocking the Toner Bottle Lock Lever, turn the Toner Bottle a half turn by hand. Does the Toner Bottle turn when PC11 is unblocked (H) with the Toner Bottle Lock Lever kept unlocked?

YES Perform step 3.


2 Does the voltage across PJ8-2 of M6 and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when step 1 is performed again?

YES Change M6.

NO Change PWB-A.

3 Is PC10 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O check. Does the input signal value for “Toner Bottle Set” change between “0” and “1” when the Toner Bottle is turned by hand.

YES Change PWB-A.

NO Change PC10.


9-17

(2) C0500: Warming-up FailureC0510: Abnormally Low Fusing TemperatureC0520: Abnormally High Fusing Temperature

C0500, C0510


Fusing Roller Heater Lamp H1 Fusing Roller Heater Lamp Fuse TF1

Fusing Roller Thermistor TH1 Side Cover Interlock Switch 2 S3

Fusing Roller Thermostat TS1 Power Supply Unit 1 PU1

Master Board PWB-A


1 Does H1 turn ON after the malfunction is reset?

YES Check TH1 for contamination or installation.

2 Is there continuity across CN3-1 and 2 on the Fusing Unit end with CN3 (2P) disconnected?

NO Check H1, TS1, and TF1 for con-tinuity.

3 Is there continuity across 1A and 1B, and across 2A and 2B, of S3 when S3 is turned ON?

NO Change S3.

4 Is the resistance of TH1 (across CN5-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit end) infinity?

YES Change TH1.

5 Is Fuse F2 on PU1 conducting? YES Change PU1 or PWB-A.

NO Change the fuse.


9-18

C0520


1 Is TH1 installed properly? NO Install TH1 correctly.

2 Is TH1 dirty? YES Clean or change TH1.

3 Is the circuit across CN5-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit end closed when CN5 (4P) is disconnected?

YES Change TH1.

NO Change PWB-A or PU1.


9-19

(3) C0650: Faulty PC12C0651: Faulty PC13


Scanner Home Position Sensor 1 PC12 BCR Board BCR

Scanner Home Position Sensor 2 PC13 HGB Board HGB

Scanner Motor M5 MFB Board UN2

Master Board PWB-A


9-20

C0650, C0651


1 Is M5 energized? Select the following functions in this order: Service Mode → Movement Check → Scanner. Then, enter an appropriate value in “Absolute Position” or “Relative Position” and energize M5.

NO Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change M5, BCR, HGB, UN2, or PWB-A, in that order.

2 Is “C0650” being displayed? YES Perform steps 3 and 4.

NO Perform steps 5 and 6.

3 Does the voltage across CN11BCR-1 on BCR and GND change from DC0V to DC5V when step 1 is performed a second time and PC12 is unblocked?

NO Change PC12.

4 Does the voltage across CN1BCR-26 on BCR and GND change from DC0V to DC5V when step 3 is performed a second time?

YES Change HGB, UN2, or PWB-A, in that order.

NO Change BCR.

5 Does the voltage across CN12BCR-1 on BCR and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when step 1 is performed a third time and PC13 is unblocked?

NO Change PC13.

6 Does the voltage across CN1BCR-27 on BCR and GND change from DC0V to DC5V when step 5 is performed a second time?

YES Change HGB, UN2, or PWB-A, in that order.

NO Change BCR.


9-21

(4) C0990: EMOT MalfunctionC0991: Lift 1 Ascent Motion FailureC0995: HMOT MalfunctionC0999: Lift 2 Ascent Motion FailureC099D: Communication Error

C0990


LCC Lift-Up Motor EMOT LCC Main Board PWB-A: LCC

Lift-Up Sensor 1 LS1 Cassette Main Board PWB-A: Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette

Lift-Up Sensor 2 LS2 Cassette Main Board PWB-A

LCC Transport Motor HMOT Master Board PWB-A


1 Does “C0990” reappear even after EMOT has been replaced with a new one?

YES Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.

(Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette)

(Large Capacity Cabinet)

(Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette)

3rd Cassette

4th Cassette

2nd Cassette


9-22

C0991

C0995


1 Is LS1 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

YES Perform step 3 and onward.

2 Does the voltage across CN4A-6 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change to DC5V when LS1 is blocked and to DC0V when LS1 is unblocked?

YES Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), or PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), in that order.

NO Change LS1.

3 Does ENOT turn when a drawer loaded with paper is slid into the machine?

YES Check gears and couplings for proper engagement and, if they are okay, change PWB-A.

4 Does the voltage across CN5A-1 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when step 3 is per-formed again?

YES Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change EMOT.

NO Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.


1 Does “C0995” reappear even after HMOT has been replaced with a new one?

YES Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.


9-23

C0999

C099D


1 Is LS2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

YES Perform step 3 and onward.

2 Does the voltage across CN4A-9 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change to DC5V when LS2 is blocked and to DC0V when LS2 is unblocked?

YES Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), or PWV-A (Cassette Main Board), in that order.

NO Change LS2.

3 Does EMOT turn when a drawer loaded with paper is slid into the machine?

YES Check gears and couplings for proper engagement and, if they are okay, change PWB-A.

4 Does the voltage across CN5A-1 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when step 3 is per-formed again?

YES Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change EMOT.



1 Does “C099D” reappear even after PWB-A (LCC) has been replaced with a new one?

YES Change PWB-A (Universal Cas-sette/500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.


9-24

(5) C0B00 (Finisher)

(6) C0B0F (Finisher)


1 Does Transport Motor M1 start turning after Power Switch is turned ON?

YES Check the rollers and gears for overload. If they are okay, go to step 4.

2 Is the voltage across PJ9A-2 on PWB-A and GND DC24V when the Power Switch is turned ON?

NO Change PWB-A

3 Is the voltage across PJ9A-3 on PWB-A and GND DC5V when the Power Switch is turned ON?

NO Change PWB-A

4 Does the voltage across PJ9A-3 on PWB-A and GND change from DC5V to DC0V after Power Switch is turned ON?

NO Change PWB-A

5 Does the voltage across PJ9A-4 on PWB-A and GND remain DC5V while M1 is turning?

NO Change M1.


1 Does the path switching mechanism of the Horizontal Transport Unit go up when the Finisher is connected to the machine?

YES Change PWB-A.

2 Is the Horizontal Transport Unit con-nected in position?

NO Place It in position and check the Drive Coupling Lever for correct function.

3 Is Finisher Transport Position Detecting Sensor PC3 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Horizontal Position)?

NO Change PC3.

4 Is Non-Sort Tray Transport Position Detecting Sensor PC2 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Non-Sort Position)?

NO Change PC2.

5 Does the voltage across PJ14A-2 on PWB-A and GND instantaneously change from LOW to HIGH when the Finisher is connected to the machine?

YES Change Paper Entrance Switch-ing Motor M1, or check the M1 drive mechanism.

NO Change PWB-A.


9-25



(9) C0B4D (Finisher)


1 Is CD Aligning Home Position Sensor PC5 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Paper Aligning Bar Home)?

NO Change PC5.

2 Turn OFF the Power Switch, move the CD Aligning plate out of its home posi-tion, and then turn ON the Power Switch (to let the plate start its home-returning motion). Is CD Aligning Motor M4 energized at this time?

YES Change PWB-A or M4.

NO Change PWB-A.


1 Is Shift Sensor PC6 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Paper Standard Board Home)?

NO Change PC6.

2 Turn OFF the Power Switch, move the Shift Reference Plate out of its home position, and then turn ON the Power Switch (to let the plate start its home-returning motion). Is Shift Motor M5 energized at this time?

NO Change PWB-A or M5.

YES Change PWB-A.


1 Is Paper Holding Tray Home Position Sensor PC9 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Assist Tray Home)?

NO Change PC9.

2 Turn OFF the Power Switch, move the Paper Holding Tray out of its home position, and then turn ON the Power Switch (to let the tray start its home-returning motion). Is Paper Holding Tray Motor M10 energized at this time?


YES Change PWB-A.


9-26

(10)C0B4E (Finisher)

(11)C0B50 (Finisher)

(12)C0B80 (Shift Tray Unit)


1 Is Finisher Tray Home Position Sensor PC2 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Home)?

NO Change PC2.

2 Turn OFF the Power Switch, move the Finisher Tray out of its home position, and then turn ON the Power Switch (to let the tray start its home-returning motion). Is Finisher Tray Motor M8 energized at this time?


YES Change PWB-A.


1 Is the Stapling Motor overloaded? YES Check the drive coupling mecha-nism.

NO Change the Stapling Unit or PWB-A.


1 Does the shift tray move in the initial operation?

YES Check Step 4.

2 Remove the shift motor and rotate the gears. Does the shift tray slide smoothly?

NO Check for deposited foreign sub-stances or check whether every-thing is properly mounted.

3 Is the control signal sent from the con-trol board to the shift motor?

YES Check the wiring from the control board to the shift motor. If there is nothing wrong, replace the shift motor.

NO Replace the control board.

4 Are there foreign substances or depos-its on the shift home sensor and light shielding plate?

YES Remove or clean off foreign sub-stances.

5 Is the output signal of the shift tray home sensor input to the control board without any error?

YES Replace the control board.

NO Check the wiring from the control board to the shift tray home sen-sor. If there is nothing wrong, replace the shift tray home sen-sor.


9-27

(13)C0BA0 (Finisher)


1 Is Elevator Tray Upper Surface Sensor PC8 operational, as checked through a sensor check (Raised)?

NO Change PC8.

2 Is Elevator Tray Retract Position Sensor PC12 operational, as checked through a sensor check?

NO Change PC12.

3 Does the voltage across PJ6A-1 on PWB-A and GND change from LOW to HIGH after the Start key has been pressed in the Sort mode?

YES Check the drive coupling mecha-nism and change Elevator Motor M9.

NO Change PWB-A.


9-28

(14)C0F32: Faulty E1C0F33: ATDC Adjustment Failure

C0F32, C0F33


ATDC Sensor E1 Master Board PWB-A


1 Are PJ40, CN50, CN17, and PWB-A PJ15A connected properly?

NO Connect them properly.

2 Is the CN50 connection dirty? YES Clean.

3 Is “C0F32” or “C0F33” displayed even when an I/C with the same T/C as that of a new one has been installed?

NO Replace the I/C with a new one.

4 Is “C0F32” or “C0F33” displayed even when an I/C with the same T/C as that of a new one has been installed and an F8 operation run? (Be sure to record the ATDC control voltage setting value if an F8 operation is to be run.)

YES Change PWB-A, install the old I/C, and return the ATDC control voltage setting to the value recorded. If “C0F32” or “C0F33” is redisplayed, replace the I/C with a new one.

NO Replace the I/C with a new one.


9-29

(15)C10** to C13**• These malfunctions are concerned with faulty symptoms as they relate to software, hard-

ware, and communications. For remedial actions, change the board, check for cable con-nections, and turn the Power Switch OFF and ON.

Code Action

C1038 1. Check the connection between PWB-A and MFB Board (UN2), reset the malfunction, and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch.

2. If the same malfunction persists, change PWB-A or MFB Board (UN2).

C1300 1. Reset the malfunction and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. 2. If the same malfunction persists, check the harnesses and PJs between UN3, PH Unit,

and PWB-A and, if they are intact, change UN3, PH Unit, or PWB-A, in that order.

C133A 1. Reset the malfunction and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. 2. If the same malfunction persists, check the connection between the product PWB-A and A

to E below: A. 2nd drawer paper source unit B. 3rd drawer paper source unit (500-sheet Cassette / Universal Cassette / LCC)C. 4th drawer paper source unit (500-sheet Cassette / Universal Cassette / LCC)D. 5th drawer paper source unit (500-sheet Cassette / Universal Cassette)E. Job Tray Unit

1. If the connection is made properly, unplug the connector between the machine and A to E and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. → If the malfunction code display persists, change the machine PWB-A. → If the malfunction is no longer detected, connect the connectors sequentially and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. When “C133A” is detected, check the connector of the corresponding paper source unit and, if it is intact, change the PWB-A of the unit.

C133B 1. Reset the malfunction and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. 2. If the same malfunction persists, check the connection between the machine PWB-A and

Finisher PWB-A. 3. If the connection is made properly, unplug the connector between the machine and Fin-

isher and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch.→ If the malfunction code display persists, change the machine PWB-A.→ If the malfunction is no longer detected, check the connector and, if it is intact, change the Finisher PWB-A.

C13C0 1. Reset the malfunction, turn OFF and ON the Power Switch, and reinstall the I/C.2. If the malfunction is detected again, check the terminal block for the I/C fuse and HV1 and,

if it is intact, change HV1 or PWB-A.

C13D0 1. Reset the malfunction, turn OFF and ON the Power Switch, and unplug the power source cord and plug it back in.

2. If the malfunction is detected again, check the connection between IC3 on PWB-A and the EEPROM and, if it is good, change PWB-A.

3. If the malfunction is still detected, change the EEPROM. * For the precautions to be observed when replacing the EEPROM, see DIS/REASSEMBLY,

ADJUSTMENT.

C13F0 1. Reset the malfunction and turn OFF and ON the Power Switch. 2. If the same malfunction persists, check the harnesses and PJs between UN3, PH Unit,

and PWB-A and, if they are intact, change UN3, PH Unit, or PWB-A, in that order.


9-30

(16)The Product Does not Turn ON.


Power Switch S1 Master Board PWB-A

Side Cover Interlock Switch 1 S2 Control Panel UN1

Power Supply Unit 1 PU1 MFB Board UN2

Power Supply Unit 2 PU2

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

Power source does not turn ON.

1 Is there an AC power supply voltage across PJ1PU1-1 and 3 on PU1 when S1 is turned ON?

NO Check S1, PU1 fuse, and Power supply voltage.

2 Is the voltage across PJ5PU1-10 and GND DC5V when S1 is turned ON?

YES Check the fuse on PWB-A.

NO Change PU1.


NO Change PU1.


NO Change PU1.

5 Does the voltage across the S2 con-nector (yellow) and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when S2 is turned ON?

NO Check S2.

6 Is the voltage across PJ7PU1-9 on PU1 and GND DC3.3V?

NO Change PU1.

7 Is the voltage across CN1PU2-1 on PU2 and GND DC24V?

NO Change PU1.

8 Is the voltage across CN28UN2-8 on UN2 and GND DC12V?

NO Change PU2.

9 Is the voltage across CN28UN2-7 on UN2 and GND DC12V?

YES Change PWB-A.

NO Change PU2.

The control panel indicates nothing.

1 Is DC24V being output from UN2 to UN1? Disconnect CN1UN1 of UN1 and check to see if the voltage across CN1UN1-1 on the harness side and GND is DC24V.

NO Change UN2.

2 Is DC5V being output from UN2 to UN1? Disconnect CN1UN1 of UN1 and check to see if the voltage across CN1UN1-28 on the harness side and GND, and across CN1UN1-29 and GND, is DC5V.

YES Change UN1.

NO Change UN2.


9-31

9-2. DIAGNOSIS OF DOCUMENT MISFEED9-2-1. MECHANICAL MISFEEDThe following table shows causes of mechanical misfeed and their remedies.

9-2-2. SENSOR FAILUREThe table below shows possible causes of sensor failure and their remedies.[1] Automatic Document Feeder

Location Symptom Cause Remedy

Misfeed when feeding document

Does not feed documentDocument pulled unevenly

Dirty and/or aged auxiliary rollers

Clean up rollers. Replace rollers.

Does not feed document Motor malfunctions Replace motor. Replace PKG.

Misfeed when scanning document

Document stopped while feeding

Sensors failure Replace sensors.

Document stopped while feeding

Dirty rollers Aged rollers

Clean up rollers.

Document squeezed while feeding

Foreign objects in docu-ment

Remove objects.

Document squeezed while feeding

Poor paper quality of docu-mentBad document shape

Use Book scanner.

Location Symptom Cause Remedy

Misfeed when feeding document

Panel displays no change even after load-ing document

Failure in document detec-tion sensors

Replace sensors (ADF).

Stops passed over posi-tion of scanning without scanning

Failure in reading position sensors

Misfeed when scanning document

Start and stop reading positions error

Failure in reading position sensors

Document size error Failure in document size detection sensors

Misfeed when ejecting document

Alarm appears on panel while ejecting document

Failure in reading position sensors and document detection sensors

Alarm appears on panel after ejecting document

Failure in reading position sensors and document detection sensors

Others Door open/close detec-tion error

Failure in door open sen-sors

Replace door switch.

Document cover open/close detection error

Failure in BS lid open/close detection sensors

Replace lead switch.


9-32

[2] Book ScannerThe following table shows possible causes of mechanical failure of scanning and their rem-edies.

Symptom Cause Remedy

Carriage does not move

Slipping teeth of the timing belt Check the timing belt.

Check the fixing screws of the motor plate.

Slipping or entangled wires Check wire configuration across the unit.

Check the carriage (1) and the wire.

Check the spring for wire tension.

Strange sound when the power source is ON/OFF

Carriage bumps inside the unit 1 Check the carriage sensor. Replace car-riage sensor if failed again.

2 Readjust the wires of the driving pulley of the book scanner to obtain even winding on front and rear sides on the unit.

Holding plate was not removed when unpacking.

Remove the holding plate.

Dirty copied image when using ADF

Dirty parts Make sure the original glass is clean.

Cannot read image from Book scanner

The precision of the book mir-rors was slightly shifted.

Check the position of the mirror of the Book scanner.

Check the position screws and for foreign objects in the Book scanner.

Jammed lense Check Lens ASS’Y.

Check the lenses and CCD.

Faulty fuser/fusing of glass parts

Make sure the glass is attached to the unit securely.

Make sure the white marker is labeled.

Lamp is not turned on. Check the inverter cable and the lamp.

Poor Shading Check the mirror. Check the white marker label of Glass ASS’Y.

Check the carriage sensors. They may have loose connections.

Check the wire winding on the driver drum. Uneven winding should be adjusted.

Make sure the Glass ASS’Y is securely con-nected.

Make sure the CCD cable is securely con-nected with the connector.


9-33

9-3. DIAGNOSIS OF PRINTER MISFEED9-3-1. MECHANICAL MISFEEDPossible causes of mechanical misfeed and their remedies are shown in the following table.


Misfeed at feeding paper

Creased or folded papers are found in paper cassettes

Replace with new paper.

Paper is not loaded properly. Adjust the paper guide and reload paper.

The paper feeder is clogged with paper slips.

Remove the paper slips.

The paper feeding rollers are worn out.

Replace the feeding rollers.

Misfeed at trans-porting paper

The paper transport unit is clogged with paper slips.

Remove the paper slips and open and then close the side cover.

Misfeed at fuser/fusing/ejection

The fuser/fusing and ejection units are clogged with paper slips.

Remove the paper slips.

The fuser/fusing rollers are dirty. Replace the right and the left roll-ers of the fuser/fusing unit.


9-34

9-3-2. ELECTRICAL MISFEEDPossible causes of mechanical misfeed and their remedies are shown in the following table.


Misfeed at feeding paper

Paper feeder solenoid malfunc-tion.

Check the electrical circuit. If it perform normally, replace the paper feeder solenoid or the mechanism control board.

Paper feeder sensors malfunc-tion.

Check the electrical circuit and the actuator. If they perform nor-mally, replace paper feeding sen-sors or the mechanism control board.

Misfeed at trans-porting paper

Paper driving clutch malfunction. (Feeder driving is not terminated or kept terminated.)

Check the electrical circuit. If it perform normally, replace the paper feeder driver clutch or the mechanism control board.

Timing sensors malfunction. Check the electrical circuit and the actuator. If they perform nor-mally, replace the timing sensors or the mechanism control board.

Timing clutch malfunction. Check the electrical circuit. If it perform normally, replace the tim-ing clutch or the mechanism con-trol board.

Misfeed at fuser/fusing/paper ejec-tion

Paper eject sensors malfunction. Check the electrical circuit and the actuator. If they perform0 nor-mally, replace paper eject sensors or the mechanism control board.


9-35

9-3-3. PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE (INCLUDING OPTIONAL PARTS)

<< 1 >> Paper MisfeedWhen a paper misfeed occurs, the Touch Panel shows the corresponding message, mis-feed location, and paper location.

* If a communication error occurs between UN2 (MFB BOARD) and PWB-A during a print cycle, it forces a paper misfeed condition ( displayed on the Touch Panel). If that happens, check the circuit between UN2 and PWB-A for proper connection and, if it is intact, replace the board.

display Misfeed location

display Paper location

/ Display Misfeed/Paper Location Ref. Page

1 ADFR take-up, ADFR single feed [4] (7)

2 ADFR reverse, ADFR exit

3 ADFR transport

4 ADF take-up, ADF transport

5 Job Tray/Shift Tray transport [4] (8)

6 Job Tray/Shift Tray exit

7 Horizontal transport (Finisher) [4] (9)

8 Finisher transport, 1st Tray exit, Elevator Tray exit

9 Mailbin transport (Mail-bin Finisher)

10 Finisher Tray (Finisher)

11 Separator, Fusing Unit [4] (3)

12 Manual Bypass take-up [4] (2)

13 2 sided Print Unit turnover, 2 sided Print Unit take-up [4] (6)

14 1st drawer take-up (Multi-Purpose Cassette) [4] (1)

15 2nd drawer take-up (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette) [4] (4)

16 3rd drawer transport (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette/LCC) [4] (4) or (5)

17 3rd drawer take-up (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette/LCC) [4] (4) or (5)

18 4th drawer transport (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette/LCC) [4] (4) or (5)

19 4th drawer take-up (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette/LCC) [4] (4) or (5)

20 5th drawer transport (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette) [4] (4)

21 5th drawer take-up (500-sheet Cassette/Universal Cassette) [4] (4)

Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at ●. Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at ●.


9-36

<Resetting the Display>

* If the misfeed display is not reset by these procedures, check the misfeed detecting sen-sor at the paper location.

[1] Misfeed Detection Sensor Layout

[2] Types of Misfeed Detection and Detection Timings• The following are the types of misfeed detection and detection timings for different mis-

feed locations.

<Main Machine Take-Up Misfeed>

Misfeed in the machine Misfeed in the option

Remove all sheets of paper misfed and left inside, and then open and close the Side Cover.

Remove all sheets of paper misfed and left inside, and then raise and lower or discon-nect and reconnect the option.

Type Detection TimingTimer Value

T (sec.)

Paper take-up failure detection

• 1st drawer paper take-up:Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T sec. after Paper Take-Up Sole-noid SL1 has been energized for the second paper take-up retry sequence.

0.92 (Di350f)1.28 (Di250f)

• 2nd drawer paper take-up:PC2 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T sec. after SL1 has been energized for the first paper take-up retry sequence.

1.63 (Di350f)2.27 (Di250f)

• 1st/2nd drawer paper take-up:PC2 is unblocked (H) within T sec. after SL1 has been energized.

0.20

Paper Exit Sensor PC3

2 sided Print Unit Transport Sensor Pl1

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor PC8


9-37

<Manual Bypass Take-Up Misfeed>

<Separator Misfeed>

* Excludes the period of time during which the paper is stationary before the Synchroniz-ing Roller.


T (sec.)

Bypass Paper take-up failure detection

PC2 is not unblocked (H) even after T sec. after Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 has been energized.

0.64 (Di350f)0.89 (Di250f)

PC2 is unblocked (H) within T sec. after CL3 has been energized.

0.20

Paper left Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor PC8 is blocked (L) when the Power Switch is turned ON, CPU is reset, or cover is opened and closed.

—


T (sec.)

Leading edge detection by Paper Exit Sen-sor PC3

PC3 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of T sec. after PC2 has been unblocked (H). 1.38 * (Di350f)

1.92 * (Di250f)

Trailing edge detection by Syn-chronizing Roller Sensor PC2

PC2 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of T sec. after it has been unblocked (H).

3.02 * (Di350f)4.20 * (Di250f)

PC2 is blocked (L) within T sec. after it has been unblocked (H).

0.75 (Di350f)1.05 (Di250f)

Paper is station-ary

During a sequence of detecting a paper size based on the period of time between when Synchronizing Clutch CL1 is energized and when PC2 is blocked (L), the paper size detected is longer than the size data sent from the controller by +260 mm or more.

—

Paper error detection

The paper size detected based on the period of time between when CL1 is energized and when PC2 is blocked (L) is more than the size data sent from the controller by ±20 mm or more.

—

Paper left PC2 is unblocked (H) when the Power Switch is turned ON, CPU is reset, or cover is opened and closed.

—


9-38

<Fusing Misfeed>

<2 Sided Print Turnover/Take-Up Misfeed>


T (sec.)

Trailing edge detection by Paper Exit Sen-sor PC3

PC3 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T sec. after PC2 has been blocked (L). 1.41 (Di350f)

1.96 (Di250f)

Paper left PC3 is blocked (L) when the Power Switch is turned ON, CPU is reset, or cover is opened and closed.

—


T (sec.)

Leading edge detection during 2 Sided Print transport

2 Sided Print Transport Sensor Pl1 is not blocked (H) even after the lapse of T sec. after Paper Exit Sensor PC3 has been unblocked (H).

1.52


PC2 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T sec. after the 2 Sided paper take-up sequence has been started.

0.88

PC2 is unblocked (H) within T sec. after the 2 Sided paper take-up sequence has been started.

0.20

Paper left Pl1 is blocked (H) when the Power Switch is turned ON, CPU is reset, or cover is opened and closed.

—


9-39

[3] Optional Part Types of Misfeed and Misfeed Detection Timings(1) Universal cassette/500-sheet cassette

• Misfeed Detecting Sensor Layout

• Types of Misfeed and Misfeed Detection Timings

Type Detection Timings

Paper left in path The output from Take-Up Sensor S3 is blocked (L) when the copier Power Switch is turned ON or a misfeed is reset.

Detection of paper stopped at Take-Up Sensor

• Additional 1st to 3rd drawer

The period of time counted during which Take-Up Sensor S3 remains blocked (L) is equivalent to +260 mm longer than the recognized paper length.



Take-Up Sensor S3 is not blocked (L) within a given period of time after Take-Up Solenoid SL1 has been energized (after two paper take-up retry sequences).


Additional 1st drawer Take-Up Sensor

Additional 2nd drawer Take-Up Sensor

Additional 3rd drawer Take-Up Sensor


9-40


Vertical transport paper leading edge detection

• Additional 1st drawer

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is not unblocked (H) within a given period of time after Take-Up Sensor S3 of the Additional 1st drawer has been blocked (L).

• Additional 2nd drawer

1. Take-Up Sensor S3 of the additional 1st drawer is not blocked (L) within a given period of time after Take-Up Sensor S3 of the 2nd drawer has been blocked (L).

2. PC2 is not unblocked (H) within a given period of time after S3 of the additional 1st drawer has been blocked (L).

• Additional 3rd drawer

1. Take-Up Sensor S3 of the additional 2nd drawer is not blocked (L) within a given period of time after Take-Up Sensor S3 of the 3rd drawer has been blocked (L).

2. S3 of the additional 1st drawer is not blocked within a given period of time after S3 of the additional 2nd drawer has been blocked (L).

3. PC2 is not unblocked within a given period of time after S3 of the additional 1st drawer has been blocked (L).

Size error detection

* The detection described on the right is also made during a 2 sided print cycle.


The period of time counted from when Take-Up Sensor S3 is blocked (L) to when it is unblocked (H). The difference between the detected length and the paper size which has been recog-nized is more than ±20 mm.


9-41

(2) Large capacity cabinet (LCC)• Misfeed Detecting Sensor Layout


Paper Standby Position Sensor S1

Registration Sensor RSEN

Additional 1st drawer Take-Up Sensor (S3)

Paper Empty Sensor 1 PPS1


9-42



Paper left The output from Registration Sensor RSEN is blocked (H) when the Copier Power Switch is turned ON or a misfeed is reset.

Lift 1 paper take-up failure detection

Paper Standby Position Sensor S1 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after Take-Up Clutch 1 P1CL has been ener-gized.

Lift 2 paper take-up failure detection

Paper Empty Sensor 1 PPS1 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after Take-Up Clutch 2 P2CL has been energized.

S1 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after P1CL has been energized.

Registration Sensor paper leading edge detection

RSEN is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after Sepa-rator Clutch BCL has been energized (after two paper take-up retry sequences).

Registration Sensor paper trailing edge detection

RSEN is not unblocked (L) within a given period of time after Registration Clutch RCL has been energized.

Vertical transport paper leading edge detection

• LCC only:Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is not unblocked (H) within a given period of time after Registration Clutch RCL has been turned ON

• Additional 1st drawer + LCC: Take-Up Sensor S3 of the additional 1st drawer is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after Registration Clutch RCL has been turned ON.

Size error detection

* The detection described on the right is also made during a 2 sided print cycle.

• LCC only:The period of time is counted from when Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL1 is energized to when Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is blocked (L). The difference between the detected length and the paper size which has been recognized is more than ±20 mm.

• Additional 1st drawer + LCC:The period of time is counted from when Take-Up Sensor S3 of the additional 1st drawer is blocked (L) to when it is blocked (H). The difference between the detected length and the paper size which has been recognized is more than ±20 mm.


9-43

(3) 2 sided print unit (Duplexing unit)• Misfeed Detecting Sensor Layout



Paper left The output from 2 Sided Print Unit Transport Sensor PI1 is blocked (L) when the Copier Power Switch is turned ON or a mis-feed is reset.

Paper take-up failure 1. Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is unblocked (H) at a shorter than normal time after a 2 Sided paper take-up sequence has started.

2. Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 is not unblocked (H) within a given period of time after a 2 Sided paper take-up sequence has started.

Paper leading edge detection during trans-port through 2 Sided Print Unit

2 Sided Print Unit Transport Sensor PI1 is not blocked (H) within a given period of time after Paper Exit Sensor PC3 has been unblocked (H).

Paper Exit Sensor PC3


2 Sided Print Unit Transport Sensor Pl1


9-44

(4) 2 sided document feeder (ADFR, Duplexing document feeder) • When a misfeed or malfunction is detected in the ADFR, the corresponding code as

detailed below is shown on the copier Touch Panel.• In addition, the LEDs on PWB-A of the ADFR blink or remain OFF, as detailed below, to

indicate the type of misfeed malfunction.

• Touch Panel Code, LED indication, and Detection Timing of Each Misfeed/Malfunction

(Blinking : OFF : )

Touch Panel Code

LED Indication

Description Detection Timing

A

Document not reach-ing Registration Sen-sor PC2

PC2 is not blocked even after the lapse of 1025 msec. after Take-Up Motor M2 has been ener-gized.

Document staying at Registration Sensor PC2

PC2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of 1010 msec. after Main Drive Motor M3 has been energized.

Document staying at Single Feed Empty Sensor PC9


Pick-Up Motor M1 malfunction

Pick-Up Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 is not blocked or unblocked even after the lapse of 1000 msec. after M1 has been energized.

B

Document left (before operation is started)

When an original is loaded in the Document Feed Tray with all closures in the closed posi-tion, a sensor in the document path is blocked.

Document left (after operation is started)

Exit Sensor PC3 is blocked before the original is positioned after it has been taken up.

C

Document not reach-ing Exit Sensor PC3


Document staying at Exit Sensor PC3

PC3 is not blocked even after the lapse of 1225 msec. after M3 has been energized.

Document not reach-ing Turnover Sensor PC4

PC4 is not blocked even after the lapse of 1215 msec. after M3 has been energized (to turn for-ward).

Document staying at Turnover Sensor PC4

PC4 is not unblocked even after the lapse of 995 msec. after M3 has been energized (to turn backward).

ABC

Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at ●.


9-45

(5) Job tray unit/shift tray unit• Misfeed DetectionA paper misfeed is detected under any of the following conditions, causing a misfeed dis-play to be given on the copier control panel.

(6) Finisher/mail-bin finisher• Location of Misfeed Detecting Sensors


Transport misfeed The Upper Exit Sensor is not blocked within a given period of time after the Paper Exit Sensor of the copier has been blocked.

Paper left The Upper Exit Sensor is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON or a paper misfeed is reset.

Exit misfeed The Upper Exit Sensor is not unblocked within a given period of time after the Paper Exit Sensor of the copier has been unblocked.

1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1

Paper Sensor PC1

Mail Bin Paper Exit Sensor LED PWB-C

Finisher Tray Exit Sensor PC3

Print Set Detecting Sensor PC7

Mail Bin Paper Exit Sensor PQ PWB-B

2nd to 5th Bin Empty Sensor PWB-D


9-46

• Misfeed DetectionA. When a misfeed occurs, the Touch Panel of the copier gives the misfeed message,

showing the misfeed location and places where paper exists.B. The misfeed display may be canceled by opening and closing the door of the Finisher.

Blinking Where a misfeed occurs

ON Where paper exists

DisplayNo.

Category Detection Timing

7 Horizontal Trans-port Unit misfeed

Paper Sensor PC1 at the Horizontal Transport Unit is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) Exit Sensor PC3 of the copier.

8 Finisher transport section misfeed

• Paper Sensor PC1 at the Horizontal Transport Unit is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) it.

• 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 is not blocked (H) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) Paper Sensor PC1 at the Horizontal Transport Unit.

• Finisher Tray Exit Sensor PC3 is not blocked (H) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) Paper Sensor PC1 at the Horizontal Transport Unit.

8 1st Tray exit mis-feed

1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 is not unblocked (L) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (H) PC1.

8 Print set exit mis-feed

Print Set Detecting Sensor PC7 is not unblocked (L) even after the lapse of a given period of time after a stapling sequence has been completed.

8 Staple misfeed The Stapling Motor does not start turning backward even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has started turning forward.

9 Mail-bin transport misfeed

• Mail-bin Paper Exit Sensor PWB-B/C or 2nd-5th Bin Empty Sensor PWB-D is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) Paper Sensor PC1.

• Mail-bin Paper Exit Sensor PWB-B/PWB-C is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (L) it.

10 Finisher Tray exit misfeed

• Finisher Tray Exit Sensor PC3 is not unblocked (L) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the print has blocked (H) it.

21

19

17

15

14

20

18

16

1213

118

9

10 7 6 5

2

3

1

Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at .


9-47

[4] Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedures(1) Copier take-up misfeed


Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL1 Master Board PWB-A

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 Cassette Main Board PWB-A

PJ13A

-13B(S

L1 ON

)P

J13A-12B

(DC

24V)

PJ13A

-11B(C

L2 ON

)P

J13A-10B

(DC

24V)

PJ13A

-6A(G

ND

)P

J13A-7A

(PC

2 ON

)P

J13A-8A

(DL5V

)

2nd Cassete

(Cassete Main Board)


9-48

<Copier Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedure>


Paper is not taken up at all.

1 Does the paper being used meet the product specifications?

NO Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications

2 Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? YES Change the paper. Instruct the user on the storage of paper.

3 Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop (of the drawer) positioned to the exact size of the paper used?

NO Slide the guides to the exact size of the paper.

4 Is the Paper Take-Up Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Paper Take-Up Roll.

5 If the Paper Lifting Plate dirty or deformed?

YES Clean or change the Paper Lifting Plate.

6 Has the misfeed been detected while the Multi Purpose Cassette was being used?

YES Check steps 7 and 8.

NO Check steps 9 and onward.

7 Is the Paper Separator Pad deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Paper Separator Pad.

8 Check SL1 for operation. Does the voltage across CN19-1on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the Start key is pressed?

YES Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change SL1.

NO Change PWB-A.

9 Is the Paper Separator Finger dirty or deformed?

YES Clean or change the Paper Separator Finger.

10 Check CL2 for operation. Does the voltage across CN9-1on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the Start key is pressed?

NO Change PWB-A.

11 Check SL1 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ3A-1A on PWB-A (Cassette Main Board) and GND change from LOW to HIGH when the Start key is pressed?

YES Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change SL1 or CL2.

NO Change PWB-A (Cassette Main Board) or PWB-A.

• Paper is at a stop before the vertical trans-port section.

• Paper is at a stop near the Synchronizing Rollers.

1 Is the Vertical Transport Roller deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Verti-cal Transport Roller.

2 If Vertical Transport Guide Plate dirty or deformed?

YES Clean or change the Verti-cal Transport Guide Plate.

3 Is PC2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

YES Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change PWB-A.

NO Check PC2 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC2.


9-49

(2) Manual bypass take-up misfeed


Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Sensor PC8

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 Master Board PWB-A

α3500CN43


9-50

< Manual Bypass Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedure>




NO Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications.

2 Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? YES Change the paper. Instruct the user on the shortage of paper.

3 Is the Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Roller or Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Man-ual Feed Paper Take-Up Roller or Roll.


NO Change the PC8 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC8.

5 Check CL3 for operation. Does the voltage across CN14-2 and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the misfeed condition is reset?

YES Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change CL3.

NO Change PWB-A.

Paper is at a stop near the Synchro-nizing Rollers.



NO Check the PC2 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC2


9-51

(3) Separator/fusing misfeed


Paper Exit Sensor PC3 Synchronizing Clutch CL1



9-52

< Separator/Fusing Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedure>



1 Are the Synchronizing Rollers deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Syn-chronizing Rollers.

2 Is a good length of loop formed before the Synchronizing Rollers?

NO Select the following func-tions in this order: Service Mode → Service Choice → Printer → Loop Adjustment and make the loop adjust-ment.

3 Is a size error displayed when the mis-feed display is reset?

YES Check that the size of the paper actually loaded in the current paper source matches the size set for it.


NO Check the PC2 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC2.

5 Check CL1 for operation. Does the voltage across CN6-9 on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the Start key is pressed?

YES Check various parts for possible overload and, if they are okay, change CL1.

NO Change PWB-A.

Paper is at a stop near the PC Drum.

1 Is the Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate dirty or deformed?

YES Clean or change the guide plate.

2 Is the Image Transfer Roller deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Image Transfer Roller.

Paper is wedged at the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers.

1 Are the PC Drum Paper Separator Fin-gers dirty or deformed?

YES Clean or change the sepa-rator fingers.

NO Check the clearance between the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers and PC Drum.

Paper is at a stop before the Fusing Rollers.

1 Is the Fusing Guide Plate dirty or deformed?

YES Clean or change the Fusing Guide Plate.

Paper is at a stop at the Fusing Roll-ers.

1 Are the Fusing Rollers deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Fusing Rollers.

2 Are the Fusing Separator Fingers dirty or deformed?

YES Clean, correct, or change the Fusing Separator Fin-gers.

Paper is at a stop at the exit section.

1 Is the Paper Exit Roller deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Paper Exit Roller.





9-53

(4) Paper take-up/transport misfeed (Universal cassette/500-sheet cassette)


Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL1 Master Board PWB-A

Take-Up Sensor S3 Cassette Main Board PWB-A

Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2 Cassette Main Board PWB-A: Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette

Transport Clutch CL2


9-54

< Paper Take-Up/Transport Misfeed (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette)Troubleshoot-ing Procedure>




NO Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications

2 Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? YES Change the paper. Instruct the user on the storage of paper.

3 Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop (of the drawer) positioned to the exact size of the paper used?

NO Slide the guides to the exact size of the paper.



5 Is the Paper Lifting Plate dirty or deformed?

YES Clean or change the Paper Lifting Plate.

6 Is the Paper Separator Finger dirty or deformed?

YES Clean or change the Paper Separator Finger.

7 Check CL2 for operation. Does the voltage across CN9-1 on the PWB-A side and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the Start key is pressed?

NO Change PWB-A.

8 Check SL1 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ13A-1A on PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette) and GND change from LOW to HIGH when the Start key is pressed?

YES Check various parts for pos-sible overload and, if they are okay, change SL1 or CL2.

NO Change PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cas-sette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.


9-55


• Paper is at a stop at the ver-tical transport section.


1 Is the Vertical Transport Roller deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Vertical Transport Roller.

2 Is the Vertical Transport Guide Plate dirty or deformed?

YES Clean or change the Vertical Transport Guide Plate.

3 Is a size error displayed when the misfeed display is reset?

YES Check that the size of the paper loaded in the current drawer matches the size set for that drawer.

4 * A misfeed is detected at the trans-port section of the 3rd drawer.

Is PC2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.


5 Are all S3’s fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

YES Check various parts for pos-sible overload and, if they are okay, change PWB-A.

6 Does the voltage across PJ13A-2B on PWB-A side (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette) and GND change to DC0V when S3 is blocked and to DC5V when S3 is unblocked?

YES Change PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cas-sette) or PWB-A (Cassette Main Board).

NO Check the S3 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change S3.


9-56

(5) Paper take-up/transport misfeed (LCC)


Take-Up Clutch 1 P1CL Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC2

Take-Up Clutch 2 P1CL Transport Clutch CL2

Paper Empty Sensor 1 PPS1 Take-Up Sensor S3

Paper Standby Position Sensor S1 LCC Main Board PWB-A

Separator Clutch BCL Cassette Main Board PWB-A: Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette

Registration Clutch RCL Cassette Main Board PWB-A

Registration Sensor RSEN Master Board PWB-A


9-57

< Paper Take-Up/ Transport Misfeed (LCC) Troubleshooting Procedure>


• Paper is not taken up at all.

• Paper is at a stop before the Paper Feed/Separator Rolls.


NO Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications.

2 Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? YES Change the paper. Instruct the user on the shortage of paper.



4 Is PPS1 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

YES Perform steps 6 and onward.

5 Does the voltage across CN3A-2 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from LOW to HIGH when PPS1 is blocked?

YES Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), or PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), in that order.

NO Change PPS1.

6 Is paper fed up to S1 when paper is loaded in Lift 2 only and the drawer is slid into the Copier


7 Check P2CL for operation. Does the voltage across CN7A-6 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when step 6 is per-formed again?

YES Check various parts for pos-sible overload and, if they are okay, change P2CL.


8 Check P1CL for operation. Does the voltage across CN7A-8 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when step 6 is per-formed again?


9 Is S1 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check. Does the “S1S” input signal change from 0 to 1 when the drawer loaded with paper is slid into the Copier?


10 Does the voltage across CN3A-5 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from LOW to HIGH when step 9 is per-formed again?

YES Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette),or PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), in that order.

NO Change S1.

11 Is the Paper Feed Roll or Separator Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Paper Feed Roll or Separator Roll.


9-58


12 Check BCL for operation. Does the voltage across CN7A-2 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the start key is pressed?

YES Check various parts for pos-sible overload and, if they are okay, change P1CL or BCL.

NO Change PWB-A(LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette), PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), or PWB-A, in that order.

• Paper is at a stop in the verti-cal transport section.


1 Is the Vertical Transport Roller or Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Vertical Transport Roller or Roll.

2 Is RSEN fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

YES Check step 4 and onward.

3 Does the voltage across CN4A-2 on the PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from LOW to HIGH when RSEN is blocked?

YES Change PWB-A (LCC), PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette),or PWB-A (Cassette Main Board), in that order.

NO Change RSEN.

4 Check RCL for operation. Does the voltage across CN7A-4 on PWB-A (LCC) and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the Start key is pressed?


5 Check CL2 for operation. Does the voltage across CN9-1 on PWB-A and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when the start key is pressed?

NO Change PWB-A.

6 * If the 3rd drawer is LCCIs PC2 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

YES Check various parts for pos-sible overload and, if they are okay, change RCL, CL2, or PWB-A, in that order.


7 * If the 4th drawer is LCCIs S3 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

YES Check various parts for pos-sible overload and, if they are okay, change RCL, CL2, or PWB-A, in that order.

8 Does the voltage across PJ3A-2B on the PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cassette ) and GND change to DC0V when S3 is blocked and to DC5V when S3 is unblocked ?

YES Change PWB-A (Universal Cassette/500-sheet Cas-sette) or PWB-A (Cassette Main Board).

NO Check the S3 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change S3.


9-59

(6) 2 sided (Duplex) print unit turnover/take-up misfeed


Paper Exit Sensor PC3 2 Sided Print Unit Transport Motor M2

2 Sided Print Unit Transport Sensor P11 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3


Switchback Motor M1 2 Sided Print Unit Main Board PWB-A


9-60

< 2 Sided Print Unit Turnover/Take-Up Misfeed Troubleshooting Procedure>


Paper is at a stop near the exit sec-tion.

1 Is the Paper Exit Roller deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Paper Exit Roller.



3 Check M1 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ1A-7 on PWB-A (2 Sided Print Unit Main Board) and GND change from DC5V to DC0V during a 2 sided print cycle?

YES Check gears for proper engagement.

NO Change PWB-A.

4 Does the voltage across PJ1A-5 on PWB-A (2 Sided Print Unit Main Board) and GND change from DC5V to DC0V during a 2 sided print cycle?

YES Check various parts for pos-sible overload and, if they are okay, change M1 or PWB-A (2 Sided Print Unit Main Board).

NO Change PWB-A.

Paper is at a stop inside the 2 Sided Print Unit.

1 Is the 2 Sided Print Unit Transport Roller or Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the 2 Sided Print Unit Transport Roller or Roll.

2 Is a torn piece of paper present on the paper path surface?

YES Remove the torn piece of paper.

3 Is the Manual Feed Take-Up Roller or Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or change the Manual Feed Take-Up Roller or Roll.

4 Check M2 for operation. Does the voltage across PJ1A-3 on PWB-A (2 Sided Print Unit Main Board) and GND change from DC5V to DC0V during a 2 sided print cycle?

YES Check gears for proper engagement.

NO Change PWB-A.

5 Is PI1 fully operational? Check the input data using I/O Check.

NO Check the PI1 actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PWB-A (2 Sided Print Unit Main Board).

6 Check CL3 for operation. Does the voltage across CN14-2 and GND change from DC24V to DC0V when paper is taken up from the 2 Sided Print Unit?

YES Check various parts for pos-sible overload and, if they are okay, change CL3 or M2.

NO Change PWB-A.



YES Check various parts for pos-sible overload and, if they are okay, change PWB-A.



9-61

(7) 2 sided (Duplex) document feeder (ADFR) misfeed• Misfeed troubleshooting procedures1. Check the code shown on the Touch Panel.2. Check the LED indication to identify the detail or the misfeed.3. Determine the problem.4. Perform the check procedures according to the problem.

• Document not reaching registration sensor PC2

ProblemStepNo.

Check Item Result Action

• The original is not taken up at all.

• The original is stationary before PC2.

1 Does the document being used meet the specifications for reliable feed-ing?

NO Instruct the user to use the document that meets the specifications for reliable feeding.

2 Has the capacity of the Document Feed Tray been exceeded?

YES Instruct the user not to exceed the capacity.

3 Is any of the Take-Up Rolls, Pick-Up Rolls, or Separator Pads deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or replace the defec-tive part.

4 Are the Pick-Up Rolls pressing the document?

NO Check the pick-up mecha-nism.

5 Carry out a unit check of Take-Up Motor M2 to determine if it is opera-tional.

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace M2.

• The original has been trans-ported to PC2.

1 Carry out a sensor check of PC2 to determine if it is operational.

YES Replace PWB-A.

2 Does the voltage across PJ9A-11 on the PWB-A and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when PC2 is blocked with a sheet of paper?

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace PC2.


9-62

• Document staying at registration sensor PC2

ProblemStepNo.


• The trailing edge of the original does not move past PC2.



2 Is the Registration Roller deformed, worn, or dirty?

YES Clean or replace the Regis-tration Roller.

3 Carry out a unit check of PC2 to determine if it is operational.

YES Go to step 5.

4 Does the voltage across PJ9A-11 on PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC5V when PC2 is changed from the blocked to unblocked state with a sheet of paper?

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace PC2.

5 Is the Transport Belt worn, or dirty? YES Clean or replace the Trans-port Belt.

6 Is the Original Glass dirty? YES Clean or replace the Original Glass.

7 Carry out a unit check of Main Drive Motor M3 to determine if it is opera-tional.

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace M3.

• Two or more originals are taken up at once.



2 Is any of the Take-Up Rolls,Pick-Up Rolls, or Separator Pads deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES Clean or replace the defec-tive part.


9-63

• Document staying at single feed empty sensor PC9

• Misfeed detected when document is loaded or immediately after start key has been pressed.

ProblemStepNo.


• The original is not taken up at all.




2 Carry out a unit check of PC9 to determine if it is operational.

YES Go to step 4.


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace PC9.

4 Is the Transport Belt worn, or dirty? YES Clean or replace the Trans-port Belt.



YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace M3.

ProblemStepNo.


• An ADFR mis-feed is dis-played on the Touch Panel when a docu-ment is loaded in the Docu-ment Feed Tray.

• An ADFR mis-feed is dis-played on the Touch Panel immediately after the Start key has been pressed.

1 Is there an original left in the ADFR? YES Remove the original.

2 Is the felt paper of Registration Sen-sor PC2 dirty or separated?

YES Clean or replace the felt paper.

3 Carry out a unit check of each sensor placed along the document path to determine if it is operational.

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace defective sensor.


9-64

• Document not reaching exit sensor PC3

• Document staying at exit sensor PC3

ProblemStepNo.





2 Is the Transport Belt worn or dirty? YES Clean or replace the Trans-port Belt.



YES Go to step 6.

5 Does the voltage across PJ11A-2 on PWB-A and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when PC3 is blocked with a sheet of paper?

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace PC3.


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace M3.

ProblemStepNo.








YES Go to step 6.


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace PC3.


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace M3.


9-65

• Document not reaching turnover sensor PC4

• Document staying at turnover sensor PC4

ProblemStepNo.








YES Go to step 6.


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace PC4.


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace M3.

ProblemStepNo.





2 Is the Turnover Roller deformed, worn, or dirty?

YES Clean or replace the Turnover Roller.




YES Go to step 7.


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace PC4.

7 Carry out a unit check of Turnover/Exit Motor M4 to determine if it is operational.

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace M4.


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace M3.


9-66

(8) Job tray unit/shift tray unit misfeed• Misfeed troubleshooting procedures

ProblemStepNo.


• The original is caught by the Turnover/Exit Switching Plate.

1 Does the Turnover/Exit Switching Plate operate abnormally?

YES Replace the Turnover/Exit Switching Plate.

2 Carry out a unit check of Turnover/Exit Switching Solenoid SL1 to deter-mine if it is operational.

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace SL1.


1 Does the paper being used meet product specifications?

NO Instruct the user to use paper that meets product specifications.

2 Is the paper curled, waved, or damp? YES Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper.

3 Is the Transport Guide Plate dirty? YES Remove the foreign matter and clean the guide plate.

4 Is the Transport Roller deformed or worn? YES Change the Transport Roller.

5 Does the Transport Motor operate prop-erly?

NO Check the wiring between the Main Board and Transport Motor and, if it is intact, change the motor.

6 Does the actuator of the Upper Exit Sen-sor operate properly?

NO Check the position of the Upper Exit Sensor installation and check the actuator for defor-mation and contamination.

7 Is the Upper Exit Sensor output signal properly applied to the Main Board?

YES Change the Main Board

NO Check the wiring between the Main Board and Upper Exit Sensor and, if it is intact, change the sensor.


9-67

(9) Finisher/mail-bin finisher• Troubleshooting procedures

1) Horizontal transport unit misfeed





3 Is the paper transport path dirty with for-eign matter or deformed?

YES Remove foreign matter; clean or change the defective part.

4 Are the rollers in the transport section dirty, deformed, or worn?

YES Clean or change the defective roller.

5 Is Paper Sensor PC1 of the Horizontal Transport Unit operational, as checked through a sensor check?

YES Change PWB-A.

NO Check the actuator for operation and, if it is intact, change PC1.


9-68

2) Finisher transport section misfeed

3) 1st tray exit misfeed

4) Print set exit misfeed









5 Does the voltage across PJ11A-2 on PWB-A and GND change from DC24V to DC0V after a given period of time after the Start key has been pressed in the Non-Sort/Hole Punch mode?

YES Make a stroke adjustment of Upper Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 or change SL1.

NO Change PWB-A.

6 Is 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 operational, as checked through a sensor check?


7 Is Finisher Tray Exit Sensor PC3 opera-tional, as checked through a sensor check?

YES Change PWB-A.





2 Is the paper curled, waved, or damp? YES Change the paper. Instruct user in how to store the paper.





5 Is 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 operational, as checked through a sensor check?

YES Change PWB-A.








4 Is Print Set Detecting Sensor PC7 opera-tional, as checked through a sensor check?

YES Change PWB-A.



9-69

5) Mail bin transport misfeed

6) Finisher tray exit misfeed

7) Staple misfeed







4 A print is stationary at the entrance to the bin.

YES To step 8.

5 A print is stationary near the entrance to the bin inside the Finisher.

YES To step 7.

6 Does the voltage across PJ10A-2 on PWB-A and GND change from DC24V to DC0V after the lapse of a given period of time after the setting has been made to feed prints into the Mail Bin and the print cycle has been started?

YES Make a stroke adjustment of Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL2 or change SL2.

NO Change PWB-A.

7 Does the voltage across each of the fol-lowing pins and GND change from DC24V to DC0V after the lapse of a given period of time after the setting has been made to feed prints into the Mail Bin and the print cycle has been started? • 1st Mail Bin: PJ10A-4 on PWB-A• 2nd Mail Bin: PJ10A-6 on PWB-A• 3rd Mail Bin: PJ10A-8 on PWB-A• 4th Mail Bin: PJ10A-10 on PWB-A

YES Change 1st-4th Bin Entrance Switching Solenoid SL3-6.

NO Change PWB-A.

8 Are Mail Bin Paper Exit Sensors PWB-B/C and 2nd-5th Bin Empty Sensor PWB-D operational, as checked through a sensor check?

YES Change PWB-A.

NO Change PWB-B, PWB-C, or PWB-D.







4 Is Finisher Tray Exit Sensor PC3 opera-tional, as checked through a sensor check?

YES Change PWB-A.


1 Is the Stapling Unit installed properly? NO Install it properly.

2 Is an overload being applied to the Stapling Motor?

YES Check the drive coupling mechanism.

NO Change the Stapling Unit or PWB-A.


9-70

9-4. DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOMSPossible causes of various problems and their remedies are shown below. Carry out trou-bleshooting according to this table.

NotePrint out the service call report and activity reports (TX/RX) to understand the system set-tings and status before replacing boards or the system entirely, or correct a failure.

ItemNo.


1 No Panel display 1 Is the power switch on? YES Go to item 2.

NO Turn on the power switch.

2 Is the wall outlet live?Can the wall outlet supply the rated power to the system?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Check the electrical path to the wall outlet. (Check the rated power.)

3 Did you experience a special power failure? (Example; The voltage was going down slowly.)

YES Turn off the power switch and leave the system for at least 90 seconds. Then turn on the power switch.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Is the fuse blown? YES Replace the PSU.

NO Go to item 5.

5 Do you have the output voltage of +24V from pin 2 of the cable side when you disconnect CN28 of the MFB board? (GND uses pin 1.)

YES Go to item 6.

NO Check the cable between PSU and MFB. Replace the power supply unit if necessary.

6 Do you have the output voltage of +5V at CN16-28 of MFB board? (GND uses CN16-30)

YES Go to item 7.

NO Check the cable between PSU and MFB.

7 Do you have the output voltage of +5V at CN1-28 of AOP board? (GND uses CN1-30.)

YES Go to item 8.

NO Check the cable between AOP and MFB.

8 Do you have the output voltage of +24V at CN1-1 of PKG AOP board? (GND uses CN1-30.)

YES Go to item 9.

NO Check the cable between AOP and MFB.

9 Do you have the output voltage of -16 to -7V at CN2-12 of AOP board ? (GND uses CN2-5.)

YES Go to item 10.

NO Replace AOP board.

10 Do you have the output voltage of +24V at CN7-1 of AOP board? (GND uses CN7-2.)

YES Go to item 11.

NO Replace AOP board.

11 Does Panel display after replacing the cable between AOP and INV-PKG?

YES Check the cable between AOP and INV-PKG.

NO Go to item 12.


9-71

ItemNo.


12 Does Panel display after replacing INV-PKG?

YES Replace INV-PKG.

NO Go to item 13.

13 Does Panel display after replacing LCD panel unit?

YES Replace the LCD panel unit.

NO Go to item 14.

14 Does Panel display after replacing AOP board?

YES Replace AOP board

NO Go to item 15.

15 Does Panel display after replacing MFB board?

YES Replace MFB board

2 Panel displays “Door open.”

1 Close the specified door once again to see if the display will go.

YES END

NO Go to item 2.

2 Is the cover secured tightly?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Fix the screws tightly.

3 Will the display go if you push the Cover Switch?(AFR-7)

YES Adjust the distance between the Cover Switch and the Take-Up Cover.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Will the display be gone if you surely insert connec-tor between MFB board and the PWB-A?

YES Insert the connector between MFB and the PWB-A.

NO Go to item 5.

5 Is the display gone after replacing ACR board?

YES Replace ACR board.

NO Go to item 6.

6 Is the display gone after replacing HGB board?

YES Replace HGB board.

NO Go to item 7.

7 Is the display gone after replacing the PWB-A?

YES Replace the PWB-A.


9-72

ItemNo.


3 “No Document” is displayed even when a document is loaded.

1 Does the level of CN5-20 of HGB board indicate +0V when the document empty sensor is ON, and +5V when the sensor is OFF?

YES Replace HGB board and Go to item 3.

NO Go to item 3.

2 Does the level of CN1-20 of ACR board indicate +0V when the document empty sensor is ON, and +5V when the sensor is OFF?

YES Replace the cable between ACR and HGB.

NO Go to item 3.

3 Does the level of CN5-7 of ACR board indicate +0V when the document empty sensor is ON, and +5V when the sensor is OFF?


NO Replace document empty sensors.

4 Experiencing docu-ment misfeeding frequently.

1 Single-sheet feeding mode?

YES Go to item 2.

NO Go to item 5.

2 Thin document or fabri-cated paper?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Go to item 13.

3 Do you use a carrier sheet?

YES Go to item 13.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Any improvement if you use a carrier sheet?

YES END

NO Go to item 13.

5 Do you load more sheets than the specified paper capacity?

YES Go to item 6.

NO Go to item 7.

6 Any improvement if you load less sheet than the specified paper capacity?

YES END

NO Go to item 7.

7 Thin document or fabri-cated paper?

YES Go to item 8.

NO Go to item 9.

8 Any improvement with the single paper feeding mode and the carrier sheet?

YES END

NO Go to item 13.

9 Is the document curled or creased?

YES Go to item 10.

NO Go to item 13.

10 Any improvement with-out curl? With single sheet feeding mode and the carrier sheet?

YES END

NO Go to item 13.

11 Is the document fed into the machine?

YES Go to item 12.

NO Go to item 13.

12 Is the document ejected from the machine?

YES Go to item 23.

NO Go to item 24.


9-73

ItemNo.


13 Are Take-Up rollers rotat-ing?

YES Go to item 16.

NO Go to item 14.

14 Are gears rotating? YES Coupling failure in Take-Up roller gears.

NO Go to item 15.

15 No more misfeeding after replacing the Main-motor?

YES Replace the Main-motor.

NO Go to item 17.

16 Is the torque of separator rollers proper while idling?

YES Go to item 21.

NO Replace separator rollers.

17 Do you have the voltage of +24V at CN10-1 of ACR board?

YES Go to item 18.

NO Check the cable between ACR and PSU (including the fuse). If the cable is OK, replace PSU.

18 Is the display gone after replacing the cable between HGB and ACR?

YES Replace the cable between HGB and ACR.

NO Go to item 19.

19 Do you have the voltage of +5V at CN5-29 of HGB board?


NO Go to item 20.

20 Do you have the voltage of +5V at CN12-5 of HGB board?


NO Go to item 21.

21 Is the display gone after replacing the cable between MFB and HGB?

YES Replace the cable between MFB and HGB.

22 Is the document detec-tion sensor fixed prop-erly?

YES Go to item 23.

NO Fix it properly.

23 Does the actuator (arm) of document empty sen-sors move?

YES Go to item 24.

NO Replace document empty sensors.

24 Does the actuator (arm) of registration sensor move?

YES Go to item 25.

NO Replace registration sensor.

25 Is there any obstacle on the document transfer path.

YES Remove them.

NO Go to item 26.

26 Does the level of CN5-20 of HGB board indicate +0V when the document detection sensor is ON, and +5V when the sensor is OFF?

YES Go to item 28.

NO Go to item 27.

27 Does it turn out to be OK after replacing the docu-ment empty sensor unit?

YES Replace document empty sensors.

NO Go to item 29.


9-74

ItemNo.


28 Does the level of CN5-21 of ACR board indicate +0V when the document edge detection sensor is ON, and +5V when the sensor is OFF?

YES Go to item 30.

NO Go to item 29.

29 Does it turn out to be OK after replacing ACR board?


NO Go to item 33.

30 Are Take-Up rollers dirty? YES Clean up Take-Up rollers.

NO Go to item 31.

31 Are separator rollers dirty?

YES Clean up separator rollers.

NO Go to item 32.

32 Does it turn out to be OK after replacing separator rollers?

YES Replace separator rollers.

NO Replace the transport unit. (ADF)

33 Does it turn out to be OK after replacing HGB board?


NO Go to item 34.

34 Does it turn out to be OK after replacing MFB board?

YES Replace MFB board.

NO Go to item 30.

5 No TX marker stamps on docu-ment

1 Is TX marker ON? (Do you have TX marker option?)

YES Go to item 2.

NO Turn ON TX marker. (Install TX marker option.)

2 Does TX marker have ink in it?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Replace TX marker.

3 Any improvement after replacing TX marker?

YES Replace TX marker.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Are there any disconnec-tions or damage on TX marker cable?

YES Replace TX marker.

NO Go to item 5.

5 Is the voltage of +24V supplied to CN10-1 of ACR?

YES Go to item 6.

NO Check the cable between ACR-PSU (including the fuse). If the cable is OK, replace PSU.

6 Any improvement after replacing the cable between HGB and ACR?

YES Replace the cable between HGB and ACR.

NO Go to item 7.

7 Any improvement after replacing ACR board?


NO Go to item 8.

8 Any improvement after replacing HGB board?


NO Go to item 8.


9-75

ItemNo.


6 Document pulled unevenly

1 Is the document set guide adjusted properly?

YES Go to item 2.

NO Adjust it properly.

2 Are documents with dif-ferent sizes loaded together?

YES Set documents with different sizes properly. (See Operator’s manual.)

NO Go to item 3.

3 Is there any obstacle on the document transfer path?

YES Remove them.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Is the document loading tray attached properly?

YES Go to item 5.

NO Attach it properly.

5 Are split rollers worn out? YES Replace separator rollers.

NO Go to item 6.

6 No faulty movements in the auxiliary rollers?

YES Check the auxiliary rollers and replace them as necessary.

NO Go to item 7.

7 Do the Exit rollers locate at the correct position?

YES Go to item 8.

NO Place them in the correct position.

8 Does the system become normal after replacing the scanner unit?

YES Replace the scanner unit.

7 Document is easily creased or torn up.

1 Is the document thin? YES Use the carrier sheet.

NO Go to item 2.

2 Are there any obstacle on the document transfer path?

YES Remove them.

NO Go to item 3.

3 Is document creases at ADF unit?

YES Replace Exit rollers.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Is document creases at the entrance of the docu-ment transfer path?

YES Go to item 5.

NO Go to item 7.

5 Is the document loading tray attached properly?

YES Go to item 6.

NO Attach it properly.

6 Any deformation along the document transfer path?

YES Replace the scanner unit.

NO Go to item 7.

7 Are Exit rollers and their fuser/fusing panels OK?

YES Go to item 8.

NO Attach them correctly.

8 Are Exit rollers dirty? YES Clean up the rollers


9-76

ItemNo.


8 Displays an alarm “Call Service Per-sonnel C0651/C0651” to indicate the failure of the scanner unit

1 Is the connector of BCR board inserted properly?

YES Go to item 2.

NO Fix it properly.

2 No damage on the cables around BCR board?

YES Replace the cables.

NO Go to item 3.

3 Is the connector of HGB board inserted properly?

YES Go to item 4.

NO Fix it properly.

4 No damage on the cables around HGB board?

YES Replace the cables.

NO Go to item 5.

5 Are home position sen-sors fixed tightly?

YES Fix them.

NO Go to item 6.

6 No faulty performance of home position sensors?

YES Replace the sensors.

NO Go to item 7.

7 Are the connections between the shaft of book scanner and the motor OK?

NO Go to item 8.

8 Does the system become normal after replacing BCR board?

YES Replace BCR board.

NO Go to item 9.

9 Does the system become normal after replacing HGB board?


NO Go to item 10.

10 No loose connections or damage in other cables and connectors?

YES Replace cables/fix connectors.

9 Display shows “Out of print paper.”

1 Is paper loaded cor-rectly?

YES Go to item 2.

NO Reload it correctly.

2 Do you have electrical continuity along the cable between the paper empty sensor and the PWB-A?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Replace the cable between the paper empty sensor and the PWB-A.

3 No loose cables of the PPC engine at the rear side of the system

YES Fix the loose cables.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Is the display gone after reinserting the connector between MFB board and the PWB-A?

YES Reinsert the connector between MFB the PWB-A.

NO Go to item 5.



NO Go to item 6.

6 Is the display gone after replacing MFB board?

YES Replace MFB board?


9-77

ItemNo.


10 Frequent paper misfeeds

1 Is paper clogged in the print paper transfer sec-tion of the printer?

YES Remove the clogged paper.

NO Go to item 2.

2 Do you have electrical continuity along the cable between the synchroniz-ing roller sensor and PWB-A?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Replace the cable between the syn-chronizing roller sensor and the PWB-A.

3 No loose cables of the PPC engine at the rear side of the machine

YES Fix the loose cables.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Is the display gone after reinserting the connector between MFB board and the PWB-A?

YES Reinsert the connector between MFB and the PWB-A.

NO Go to item 5.



NO Go to item 6.

6 Is the display gone after replacing MFB board?

YES Replace MFB board?

11 Paper is skewed excessively.

1 Reload paper properly, and make more than 10 copies. Is paper still skewed?

YES Go to item 2.

NO END

2 Is the paper drawer set properly?

NO Set the drawer properly.

12 Skewed printing 1 Is paper skewed in copy operation?

YES Check document and paper loading.

NO Go to item 2.

2 Is the document from the service center skewed?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Failure in the remote side. (Error in the transmission unit of the remote side.)

3 Any improvement after replacing MFB board?



9-78

ItemNo.


13 Black stripes on paper

1 Do those lines appear in the copy mode?

YES Go to item 2.


2 Any dust on mirrors and original glass?

YES Wipe up dust.

NO Go to item 3.



NO Go to item 5.



NO Go to item 6.

5 Is the fuser dirty? YES Clean up the fuser.

NO Go to item 7.

6 Any improvement after replacing the PWB-A?

YES Replacing the PWB-A.

14 Completely black 1 Black pages even in the copy mode?

YES Go to item 2.


2 Is the lamp ON while copying?

YES Go to item 9.

NO Go to item 3.

3 Is the voltage of +24V supplied to CN14-1 of BCR?

YES Go to item 4.

NO Check the cable between BCR-PSU (including the fuse). If it is OK, replace PSU.

4 Are the connections between CN2, CN3 of HGB and CN12, CN13 of MFB OK?

YES Go to item 5.


5 Does the cable of item 4 bend too much? (Radii less than 25 mm)

YES Replace the cable of the item 4.

NO Go to item 6.

6 Any improvement after replacing the cable con-necting INV-PKG, BCR, and HGB.

YES Replace the cable connecting INV-PKG, BCR, and HGB.

NO Go to item 7.

7 Any improvement after replacing INV-PKG?

YES Replace INV-PKG.

NO Go to item 8.

8 Any improvement after replacing the light source?

YES Replace the light source.

NO Go to item 9.


9-79

ItemNo.


9 Any improvement after replacing BCR board?

YES Replace BCR board.

NO Go to item 10.

10. Does the cable have damage between HGB and CCD?

YES Replace the cable between HGB and CCD.

NO Go to item 11.



NO Go to item 12.



NO Go to item 13.

13 Any bad connections between MFB board and the PWB-A?

YES Reinsert the connector between MFB and PPC.

15 Stains 1 Stains in the copy mode? YES Go to item 2.

NO The transmission document from the remote terminal may be a colored document or a photo.

2 Is paper loaded properly? YES Go to item 3.

NO Load print paper properly.

3 Using the specified type of paper?

YES Go to item 4.

NO Use the specified type of paper.

4 Is the fuser unit set prop-erly?

YES Go to item 5.

NO Set the fuser unit properly.

5 Any improvement after replacing the imaging unit?

YES Replace the imaging unit.


9-80

ItemNo.


16 No printing at all 1 Any printing in the copy mode?

YES Failure in the remote side. (Error in the transmission unit of the remote side.)

NO Go to item 2.



NO Go to item 3.

3 Any improvement after replacing the cable between CCD and HGB?

YES Replace the cable between CCD and HGB.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Are the connections between CN2, CN3 of HGB and CN12, CN13 of MFB OK?

YES Go to item 5.


5 Does the cable of item 4 bend too much? (Radii less than 25 mm)

YES Replace the cable of item 4.

NO Go to item 6.

6 Any improvement after replacing the cable between HGB and MFB?

YES Replace the cable between HGB and MFB.

NO Go to item 7.



NO Go to item 8.



NO Go to item 9.


YES Reinsert the connector between MFB and PPC.

NO Go to item 10.

10 Is the connector of the PH unit properly inserted?

YES Go to item 11.

NO Insert the connector properly.

11 Any improvement after replacing the PH unit?

YES Replace the PH unit.

NO Go to item 12.



NO Replace the machine.

17 Distorted images or shifted character positions while printing

1 Image distortions in the report printing?

YES Go to item 4.

NO Go to item 2.

2 Any improvement after replacing the (optical) cables between CN2, CN3 (HGB) and CN12, CN13 (MFB)?

YES Replace the optical cables.

NO Go to item 3.



NO Go to item 4.



NO Go to item 5.


9-81

ItemNo.


17 Distorted images or shifted character positions while printing


YES Reinsert the connector between MFB and the PWB-A.

NO Go to item 6.



18 Received image is stretched with ADF

1 Printed image is exces-sively stretched in the copy mode?

Note: The following causes may be possible (improper document handling): special paper such as very thick paper, non-car-bon print paper, car-bon print paper.

YES Go to item 2.

NO Failure in remote terminal (improper document handling, error in the trans-mission unit of the remote terminal).

2 Is an image from the ser-vice center also stretched?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Go to item 5.



NO Go to item 4.



5 Is the contact of feed roller gears OK?

YES Go to item 6.

NO Replace the feed roller gear unit.

6 Any paper dust on main rollers or feed rollers?

YES Clean up rollers.

NO Go to item 7.

7 Is the pulling out force of feed rollers normal?

NO Replace the leaf spring.

19 Received image is shrunk too much.

1 Printed image is exces-sively shrunk in the copy mode?

YES Go to item 2.

NO Failure in the remote terminal (improper document handling, error in the transmission unit of the remote terminal).

2 Is an image from the ser-vice center also shrunk?

YES Go to item 4.

NO Go to item 3.

3 Any improvement after checking the reading unit?

YES END

NO Go to item 4.



NO Go to item 5.




9-82

ItemNo.


20 Received image is too light or faded.

1 Are copied image or a test image also too light or faded?

Note: The following causes may be possible (improper setting of document contrast): a document with small blue charac-ters or file lines

YES Go to item 2.

NO Failure in the remote side (improper setting of document contrast, improper document handling, poor line condition, and error in the trans-mission unit of the remote terminal).



NO Refer to item 9-8 “Image quality prob-lem.”

21 Received image is squeezed

1 Are characters of copied image or a test image also squeezed?

Improper setting of docu-ment contrast: Received image of small characters or blue copies with “contrast” switch set “Darker.”Error in remote machine:The following causes are possible:(a) Failure in board of scan-

ner unit(b) Improper adjustment of

optical focus (c) Condensation on optical

lenses (Proceed to anti-dew.)

YES Failure in the remote side (improper setting of document contrast, and error in the transmission unit of the remote terminal).

NO Go to item 2.



NO Go to item 4.

22 Clock malfunctions 1 No improper operation? YES Refer Operator’s manual for opera-tion.

NO Go to item 2.

2 Can adjust timing? YES Go to item 3.

NO Replace MFB board.



23 Neither “Sending” nor “Receiving” are displayed.

1 Is an alarm message on screen?

YES Correct the failure and reset the alarm.

NO Go to item 2.

2 Is the external telephone on-hook?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Set the external telephone off-hook then press the communication switch.


9-83

ItemNo.


23 Neither “Sending” nor “Receiving” are displayed.

3 Are you printing some-thing such as report?

YES Proceed to communication after com-pleting print jobs.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Any improvement after replacing AOP board?

YES Replace AOP board.

NO Go to item 5.

5 Any improvement after replacing the cable between AOP and MFB

YES Replace the cable between AOP and MFB.

NO Go to item 6.



24 Cannot go to “Sending” nor “Receiving” modes

1 Is the password checked?

YES Go to item 2.

NO Go to item 3.

2 Is the password correct? YES Disable password check and Go to item 3.

NO Match the password.

3 Try to communicate with the service center. Same problem?

Possible causes:(a) FAX button is not

pressed.(b) Both systems are in the

transmission (or recep-tion) mode.

YES Go to item 4.

NO END Possible causes are line trouble, trou-ble or improper operation in the remote terminal, or the remote FAX is not connected.

4 Are the transmission level and equalizer of the ser-vice center set properly?

YES Go to item 5.

NO Set them properly.

5 Did you check the mode (TX or RX) of the remote side?

YES Go to item 6.

NO Confirm it by phone.

6 Any improvement after replacing PKG ASS’Y (NCUK)?

YES Replace PKG ASS’Y (NCUK).

NO Go to item 7.

7 Any improvement after replacing the cable between NCUK and MGB.

YES Replace the cable between NCUK and MGB.

NO Go to item 8.



NO Go to item 9.



NO Go to item 10.

10 Any improvement after replacing the cable between AOP and MFB.



9-84

ItemNo.


25 Automatic reception disabled

1 Did you select the auto-matic reception mode?

YES Go to item 2.

NO Select the automatic reception mode.

2 Is the external telephone on hook?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Set the external telephone on-hook.

3 Any improvement after replacing PKG ASS’Y (NCUI)?

YES Replace PKG ASS’Y (NCUI).

NO Go to item 4.

4 Any improvement after replacing the cable between NCUI and MFB.

YES Replace the cable between NCUI and MFB.

NO Go to item 5.



NO Go to item 6.



NO Go to item 7.



26 Cannot send dial number from 10 key pad

1 Is the external telephone off-hook?

YES Go to item 2.

NO Set the handset on-hook.

2 Is the line type specified correctly?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Specify the line type (PB, 10, 20PPS) correctly.

3 Dial by 10 key? YES Go to item 5.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Did you register the phone number?

YES Go to item 5.

NO Register the phone number.

5 Any improvement after replacing PKG ASS’Y (NCUK)?

YES Replace PKG ASS’Y (NCUK).

NO Go to item 6.

6 Any improvement after replacing the cable between NCUK and MFB.

YES Replace the cable between NCUK and MFB.

NO Go to item 7.



NO Go to item 8.



NO Go to item 9.




9-85

ItemNo.


27 Cannot monitor communication

1 Is the sound volume switch OFF?

YES Select a sound volume switch other than OFF.

NO Go to item 2.

2 Is S/W DIP SW set to line monitoring?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Set S/W DIP SW.

3 Any improvement after replacing the speaker?

YES Replace the speaker.

NO Go to item 4.



NO Go to item 5.



NO Go to item 6.



28 Strange sound 1 Do you see an obstacle or paper slip in moving parts?

YES Remove them.

NO Go to item 2.

2 Does it happen with a transmission operation?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Go to item 7.

3 Anything interfering with the transport unit?

YES Remove it.

NO Go to item 4.

4 Anything interfering with rollers or roller axes?

YES Remove it.

NO Go to item 5.

5 Does the main-motor (ADF) generate irregular sound?

YES Go to item 6.

NO Go to item 7.

6 Are rollers stiff? YES Make them smooth.

NO Go to item 7.

7 Does it happen while printing?

YES Go to item 8.

NO Go to item 9.

8 Anything interfering with the transport unit?

YES Remove it.

NO Go to item 9.

9 Does the fan rotate smoothly?

YES Go to item 10.

NO Replace fan.



NO Go to item 11.




9-86

ItemNo.


29 Image memory (memory stored for TX image) is not backed up.

1 Proceed to the following procedure. Is the image memory backed up?

(1) TX: Disconnect the line cable and start a quick memory transmission. Turn OFF the power switch while waiting for the answer. Turn ON the power and check if data is stored in the image memory.

(2) RX: Turn OFF the power switch while starting memory reception with-out paper. Turn ON the power again and check if data is stored in the image memory.

YES Normal

NO Go to item 2.

2 Is the connector of MFB board connected?

YES Go to item 3.

NO Connect the connector.

3 Is the voltage of +12 V between CN 18-14 (MFB) and AG (TP21) normal? (+11.4 to +12.6 V)

YES Go to item 4.

NO Go to item 5.

4 Is the battery voltage appropriate? (6.85 V or more)

YES Go to item 8.

NO Go to item 6.

5 Any improvement after replacing PKG ASS’Y (PSU)?

YES Replace PKG ASS’Y (PSU).

NO Go to item 4.

6 Is the battery fully charged? (Approx. 4hr)

YES Go to item 7.

NO Charge the battery.

7 Any improvement after replacing the battery?

YES Replace the battery.

NO Go to item 8.




9-87

9-5. CHECKPOINTS FOR TROUBLE IN ANALOG UNITSUse the following checkpoints and waveforms for troubleshooting analog units.

<<1>> Printer Signal WaveformCheckpoint: MFB board CN15-A15

[1] Waveform

[2] SpecificationV1: 4.0 ± 1.0 V (white pixel)V2: 0 ± 0.8 V (black pixel)

<<2>> Communication Analog Signal Waveform

[1] Transmission<1> Checkpoint: MFB board TP1

(A) Waveform

(B) SpecificationV1: approximately 1.5 Vp-p

<2> Checkpoint: MFB board IC80-13 pin(A) Waveform

(B) SpecificationV1: approximately 1.1 Vp-p (when the transmission power source is -9dBm)

V2

V1

0V V1

0V V1


9-88

[2] Reception< 1 > Checkpoint: MFB board IC80-13 pin

(A) Waveform

(B) SpecificationV1: approximately 1.6 Vp-p when 0 dBm

approximately 14 mVp-p when -43 dBm

< 2 > Checkpoint: MFB board TP2(A) Waveform

(B) SpecificationV1: approximately 1.6 Vp-p when 0 dBm

approximately 14 mVp-p when -43 dBm

0V V1

0V V1


9-89

<<3>> Image Memory Backup Signal WaveformCheckpoint: MFB board IC61-11 pin

NoteObserve the waveform while connecting the battery.

[1] ProcedureProceed with memory reception without paper. After this step, turn OFF the power switch and then turn it ON again. Check the change in the waveform during the OFF-ON step.

[2] Waveform

[3] SpecificationV1: 4.0 - 6.0 V (Battery voltage)V2: 0 V

V2

V1

While backing up

OFF ON


9-90

9-6. WARM RESTART<<1>> OverviewUse the warm restart function when you run the maintenance mode or you cannot use the switches on the control panel due to some error (in the transmission, the reception, or the copy modes).If you push the warm restart button, the status of the machine will be initialized. However, the document and the data stored in the internal memory are maintained. After initializing the machine, start processing the stored document (except a copied document and PC print document).

<<2>> How to Operate Warm RestartPress the switch inside the small hole that is located on the side of the control panel.

<<3>> Warm Restart StepsActivate warm restart by pushing the switch described in << 2 >>.At this moment, all displays on the panel will disappear.After about 5 seconds, warm restart is completed and the initial screen of the panel will be displayed. After this initialization, start processing the stored document.

Control Pane

1

4

7

*

2

5

8

0

3

6

9

#

CStart

Stop Panel Reset

Interrupt

Access

FaxUtility Mode Check Pause Copy

Use a pencil or a pin to push the button inside small hole that is located on the side.


9-91

9-7. CLEARING RAM UNCONDITIONALLY<<1>> OverviewUse this function when warm restart does not work.

<<2>> Operation of Unconditional RAM Clear(1) Turn OFF the power switch.(2) Remove the upper cover and the shield so that you can access MFB board.(3) Short the 2 pins of U6 on the MFB board with a metal object like a clip. Turn ON the

power switch with the 2 pins shorted. (Be careful not short other parts.) With this procedure, the system clears RAM and brings up the initial screen.

(4) Make sure that RAM has been cleared. Then turn OFF the power switch.(5) Remove the clip and reattach the shield and the upper cover.(6) Input the data that was cleared by BBRAM all clear.

<<3>> Steps of Unconditional RAM ClearWith the procedure in << 2 >>, all data stored in BBRAM will be cleared.

Data to be cleared

• Serial number • Model type

• Image information • Management information per business section

• Time • Self information

• Soft switch information • PC printer function setup

• Service call information • Remote side data

• Mechanism adjustment information • Copy function data

• Accumulated number of pages • Communication activity information

• Bulletin board information

MFB board

Short these 2 pins

U6

CN

9C

N8

CN

7

CN2


9-92

9-8. LOW-SPEED MODE SELECTING SWITCH<<1>> PPM switching Board (PWB-L)Use this function when warm restart does not work.

Symbol Name Description

S1 Low-Speed ModeSelecting Switch

Used to make longer the paper-to-paper intervals as a means of preventing the problem in which sheets of paper are fed out untidily when large size paper left to stand under high humidity condition is being used.*Keep this switch in the H position, as it is only for special users.


9-93

9-9. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEMSIf you experience poor image quality, you need to determine whether it comes from failure in the document scanning unit or in the printer unit. Run the test print routine to identify the cause of the problem.

If the problem is due to the printer unit, identify the error pattern of the test sample for trou-ble shooting according to the table below. Notice that the table does not list bad connec-tions among connector and cables. You need to check the connection of the connectors and the cables before replacing parts.

Error Pattern Cause Remedy

Completely white(Blank page)

Empty toner 1 Check the toner. Replace the toner bottle if no toner.

Lack of exposure 1 Replace the printer head. 2 Replace the mechanism control board.

Lack of development 1 Check the high voltage port (contact) for the imaging unit.

2 Replace the imaging unit. 3 Replace the high voltage unit. 4 Replace the mechanism control board.

Error in paper size detection 1 Check the paper guide plate of the feeder drawer.

2 If an irregular size of paper is loaded, use a regular size of paper instead or use the mul-tipurpose cassette and enter the size data.

Completely black(Black page)

Failure in charging (No charging)

1 Check the high voltage port (contact) for the imaging unit.

2 Replace the high voltage unit. 3 Replace the mechanism control board. 4 Replace the imaging unit.

Lack of exposure 1 Replace the printer head. 2 Replace the mechanism control board

Image contrast too light Lack of transfer 1 Use new paper. 2 Check the cable connection at the transfer

output of the high voltage unit. 3 Check the number of pages that passed the

transfer rollers. If it is near lifetime, replace the rollers.

4 Replace the high voltage unit. 5 Replace the mechanism control board.

Lack of development 1 Check the high voltage port (contact) for the imaging unit.

2 Replace the imaging unit.3 Replace the high voltage unit.4 Replace the mechanism control board.

Lack of laser power 1 Replace the printer head.

ABCDEABCDEABCDEABCDEABCDE


9-94

Error Pattern Cause Remedy

Darkeed background Failure in photosensitive drum

1 Check the number of pages that passed through the imaging unit. If it is near lifetime, replace the unit.

Failure in charging (No charging)

1 Check the high voltage port (contact) for the imaging unit.

2 Replace the high voltage unit. 3 Replace the mechanism control board. 4 Replace the imaging unit.

Error in laser output power source

1 Replace the printer head.

Background scatter Scratches on photosensi-tive drum

1 Check scratches on the photosensitive drum. Replace the imaging unit if you find scratches.

Dirty interior of the machine 1 Clean up the inside.

Spilt toner 1 Check if toner has spilt from the toner car-tridge. Replace the toner cartridge if some toner has spilt.

Dirty fuser left roller 1 Check the fuser left roller. If it is dirty, replace it. (Replace the right roller also or replace the fuser unit.)

White spots/character voids

Foreign objects attached to photosensitive drum

1 Check if there are foreign objects on the photosensitive drum. If there is, replace the imaging unit.

Lack of transfer 1 Replace paper with new paper.2 Check the transfer roller for an obstacle.3 Check the transfer roller for flaws. Replace

the roller if it has flaws.

White vertical lines Clogging at blade 1 Check the developing sleeve. If you see toner attached on it, replace the imaging unit.

Dirty lenses/mirrors inside the printer head

1 Replace the printer head.

Stains on backside Interior of the machine is dirty

1 Clean up the inside.

Dirty transfer rollers 1 If there is some improvement after printing a few pages, repeat printing until the backside is clean.

2 Replace transfer rollers.

Dirty fuser right roller 1 Check the fuser right roller. If it is dirty, replace it. (Replace the left roller also or replace the fuser unit.)


A







Printed in Japan


MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 1167-7990-11 9909085011563

Di250f/Di350f

SERVICE MANUAL

Di250f/D

i350f SE

RV

ICE

MA

NU

AL

minolta di250-350f service manual

Documents